Konica cf5001

Service Manual
[Field Service]
CF5001
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dual references may be used on the following:
Official Options name : Popular Options name
AFR-20 : RADF, DF
C-208 : LT
FN-120 : FNS
FN-9 : FNS
Cover Inserter D : PI
PK-5 : PU
TMG-3 TU
In-System Writer : ISW

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS
CONTENTS
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
II ADJUSTMENT
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
I DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
III SERVICE TOOL

1.3 Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Angle adjustment of the operation board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.3 Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
2.5 Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
IV SERVICE
2.6 Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
3. WRITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
3.1 Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
3.2 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
4.1 Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
4.3 Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy V CODE LIST
/the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
4.4 Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
4.8 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
4.9 Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
VI DIAGRAMS
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
5. TONER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
5.2 Replacing the charging dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
II ADJUSTMENT
6.1 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

6.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
6.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
6.4 Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
6.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7. BY-PASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
III SERVICE TOOL
7.2 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.1 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
9.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
9.3 Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
IV SERVICE
9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
9.7 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling
the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
9.8 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling
the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
V CODE LIST
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100

10. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
VI DIAGRAMS
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
ii

11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.2 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.3 Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
II ADJUSTMENT
1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.1 Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123
2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3.1 Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3.2 Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
III SERVICE TOOL

3.3 Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
4.1 Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.1 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
IV SERVICE
1.2 Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
1.3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
2.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
V CODE LIST
3. TRAY UP/DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
3.1 Removing and reinstalling the rear drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
3.2 Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.1 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
1.2 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
VI DIAGRAMS
1.3 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

1.4 Removing and reinstalling of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.5 Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
iii

1.6 Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.7 Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163

1.8 Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
1.9 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
2. CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
2.3 Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
3. MAIN TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
3.1 Replacing the tray up/down motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
II ADJUSTMENT
3.2 Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171

4. STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.1 Replacing the stacking assist roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.2 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.3 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
5. STAPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.1 Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.2 Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180
III SERVICE TOOL
5.3 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.1 Replacing the Punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. External Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
IV SERVICE
1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

2. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.1 Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.2 Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. TRIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
V CODE LIST
II ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
VI DIAGRAMS
4.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4.2 Display transition of 36 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
4.3 Display transition of 25 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
iv

5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5.1 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
6.2 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.3 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.4 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.1 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.3 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
II ADJUSTMENT
6.5 PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.5.1 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.5.2 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.6 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
6.7 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
6.7.1 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
6.7.2 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
6.8 Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
III SERVICE TOOL

6.9 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.13 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
6.14 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.2 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
IV SERVICE
7.2.1 High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7.2.3 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
7.3.2 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
7.3.3 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 V CODE LIST
7.3.4 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
7.3.5 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
7.3.6 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
7.4 Image quality adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
7.4.4 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
VI DIAGRAMS
7.4.5 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

7.4.6 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
7.4.7 Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

7.4.8 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7.4.9 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

7.5 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
7.7 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
7.8 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
II ADJUSTMENT
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102

7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
7.9 List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.2 Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
III SERVICE TOOL
8.3 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108

8.4 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
8.5 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
9.2 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
IV SERVICE
9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139

9.8 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
9.9 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
V CODE LIST
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
VI DIAGRAMS
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171

9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
vi

9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
III SERVICE TOOL

1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
II ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.1 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.3 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3.5 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
III SERVICE TOOL

2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.1 Installing the application program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
2.1.4 Parallel port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
2.2 Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
2.3 Connecting the CF5001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4.1 Update operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
IV SERVICE
2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.4 Running ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 V CODE LIST
2.5 ISW Trns Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.3 NG produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
VI DIAGRAMS
2.7 Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.7.1 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3 INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
vii

3.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.4 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.4.1 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.4.2 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.6.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
II ADJUSTMENT
3.6.2 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.7 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.1 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
III SERVICE TOOL
3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.4 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.2 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.3 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
4.5 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
IV SERVICE
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.2 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1.3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
1.5 Periodic check items (C-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
V CODE LIST
1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.9 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.1 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
VI DIAGRAMS
2.3 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
viii

V CODE LIST
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
II ADJUSTMENT
1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
III SERVICE TOOL

2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
3.1 Main Body timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
3.2 AFR-20 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
3.3 C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
3.4 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
3.5 TMG-3 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4.1 AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4.2 C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
IV SERVICE
4.3 FN-120/FN-9 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
4.4 TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
4.5 Cover Inserter D Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
4.6 PK-5 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
5. APPENDIX
5.1 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
5.3 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8) V CODE LIST
VI DIAGRAMS
ix

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
II ADJUSTMENT
III SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
IV SERVICE
V CODE LIST
VI DIAGRAMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Minolta Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Minolta-trained ser-
vice technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service manual was printed.
Accordingly, Minolta Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in
this Service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
In this Service manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA

Minolta copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and
a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such mod-
ifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the rea-
soning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by Minolta.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Minolta. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.
• Using parts not specified by Minolta.
S-2

2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Minolta copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in
order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However,
in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain
safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
2.1 Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. kw
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4

WARNING: Ground Lead

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C
Humidity: 10 % to 80 % (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke,
or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5

CAUTION: Ventilation
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (Service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from

the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.

(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make

sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
S-8

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
3. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

• If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
• If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and Minolta Corporation must be notified.
• To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Minolta Corporation.
• For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures”.
4. CONCLUSION
• Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
• When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9

SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.
S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious
accidents.
• Overall protection circuit

• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of impair their functions.
1. Overall protection circuit
CBR1
NF
CBR2
8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)

CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in
the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11

2. Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit
PRCB ACDB
TH1 L2 TS1
TH3 AC driver L3
FHCB
Control section
TH2 section
TS2
L4
TH4
RL1
RL1 8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software

The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read
by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).
CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing
temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality
judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4
exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.
CAUTION:
• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
• Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)

When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus inter-
rupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the speci-
fied value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid
burns and electric shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
S-13

8050sf004e
CAUTION
-
S-14

8050sf005e
CAUTION
-
S-15

8050sf006e
CAUTION
-
S-16

8050sf007e
CAUTION
-
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury..
S-17

PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.
Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.
Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.

~
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
CAUTION
-
S-18

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
I DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before dis-
assembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2]. [1]
[2] 8050ma3001
2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] [2] 8050ma3002
1-1

EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
and the ozone filter /1

• Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
• Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover /
[1]
2 [2].
[2] [1] 8050ma3004
2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].
[1] 8050ma3005
1-2

3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone fil-

[1] [3] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ter /3 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be care-
ful not snap and fracture it.
• When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to
press it against the stopper section [4] of the
filter replacement duct.
[4] 8050ma3006
1-3

1.3 Replacing the toner collec-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tion box
• Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be
replaced by the user)
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out
[1]
the toner collection box [2].
[2] 8050ma3007
1-4

2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
and plug the entrance of the toner collection box
[1].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] 8050ma3008
1-5

1.4 Angle adjustment of the

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
operation board
Note:
• The operation board can be set at the two
steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the
front cover /2 provided or not provided.
When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees
When the front cover /2 not provided: 18
degrees
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply
[3] [4] [5] [3]
door [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of
the operation board [4].
3. With the operation board raised up, remove the
front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed
from 7 to 18 degrees).
4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3].
5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply
door [2].
[2]
Note:
• When changing the angle of the operation
board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front
cover /2 by following Step 3.
[1] 8050ma3009
1-6

1.5 Removing and reinstalling
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the main board unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen cover.
2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the
dust filter /2.")
3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and
[8] [6] [5] [7] [6] [5] [4]
then remove the rear cover [3].
4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing
the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.")
5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then
remove the 2 original cover supports [6].
6. Remove 2 caps [4]. [4]
7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the scan-
ner cover /R [8]. [2]
[2]
[2]
[3] [1] 8050ma3010
8. Remove the special screw [1].

[3] [1]
9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
board seal plate /2 [3].
[2] 8050ma3011
1-7

10. Remove 5 connectors [1].

[1] [3] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side,
release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
8050ma3012
Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the
[2]
ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
[1]
[3]
1-8

• Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its

[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
original position, lock the ribbon cable [2].
[1]

[1]
board seal plate /4 [2].
[2] 8050ma3013
1-9

13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].

[4] [3]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main
board unit [4].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the main board
unit, be careful that the battery on the memory
board (MB) does not touch with the frame.
[2]
[1] [3] 8050ma3014
1-10

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER
2. SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.1 Screws that must not be
removed
Note:
Screws that have been paint-locked are not
allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to [1]
remove them.
[1] [1] [1] 8050ma3015

the platen glass
A. Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the origi-
[4] [2] [1] [6] [5]
nal positioning plate /R [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the origi-
nal positioning plate /L [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scan-
ner cover /M [6].
4. Remove the platen glass [7].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its
white reference plate [8] up.
[3] [8] [7] 8050ma3016
1-11

SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the CCD unit

A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing
and reinstalling the platen glass.")
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD
cover [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the rib-
bon cable cover [5].
[4] [5] [3]
[1] [2] 8050ma3141
5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the

lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2].
Note:
• Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert
the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
• Then bring the lock lever back to its original
position, lock the ribbon cable.
[1] [2] 8050ma3142
1-12

6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD

[1] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to remove screws other than
those mentioned above. Otherwise, it
becomes necessary to make all sort of optical
adjustments which cannot be handled in the
field.
• Be careful not to touch the lens. This may
result in poor images.

steps in reverse.
[1] 8050ma3143
1-13


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the exposure unit

A. Procedure for removal
1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and
reinstalling the slit glass.")
2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-
ing and closing of the toner supply section.")
3. Remove 2 caps [2].
[2] [1] [2]
4. Remove 6 screws [1].
5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the
scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side
once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].
[3] [4]
[1]
8050ma3017
1-14

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of

[1] [5] [4] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the exposure unit [2].
7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it hor-
izontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner
room [6].
[3]
[6] [5] [1] 8050ma3018

9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4] [2] [1] [3] [5]
from the cable holder [3].
10. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[4] 8050ma3019
1-15

B. Procedure for reinstallation

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body.

[2] [4] [1]
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side,
and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through
each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror
unit [2] from the front side.
Note:
• When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure
to use the optical positioning jig.
3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4].

4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3].
5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-
lowing the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
[3] 8050ma3020
1-16

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the exposure lamp
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing
of the cable [2]. [1] [3] [6]
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP
detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1 (expo-
sure lamp) [6].
steps in reverse.
[2] [4] [5] 8050ma3021
1-17

2.6 Removing the scanner wire

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
[1] [4] [3] [2] [1]
3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner
cover /R [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner
cover /L [5].
[5] 8050ma3022
5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and

[2]
release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].
[1] 8050ma3023
1-18

6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire 8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
/R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then pulley [10].
remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of 9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following
the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pul- Steps 5 to 7.
ley [5] and the pulley /2 [6].
7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire / Note:
R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove • The scanner wires /F and /R are installed sym-
the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside metrically.
of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].
[9]
[5] [10]
[2]
[4] [6] [3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
[2] [7] [8] 8050ma3024
1-19

2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side,
and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through [1]
the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side.
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the mirror with the
jig.
• When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to
fasten the V-mirror with the optical position-
ing jig.
[2] 8050ma3025
2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a

[6] [5] [1]
metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of
the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting [4]
from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns
[5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.
[3] [8]
[7]
Note:
• For the scanner wires /F and /R, common
wires are used. [8]
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
the wire terminal is on the outside and the [4]
metal bead [7] on the inside.
• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
both ends of the wire come out under the [2] [5] [6]
drive pulley.
• Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires [4]
closely around the drive pully with no wire
running on another wire. [3] [7] 8050ma3026
3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be

sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so
that it will not come off.
1-20

4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead 6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive Steps 4 and 5.
pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mir-
ror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the
metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6].
5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire terminal
[7] side (outside) which is wound around the
drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the
outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9]
in this order, and then hook the wire terminal [7]
onto the spring fixing plate [10].
[9]
[5] [10]
[2]
[4] [6] [3]
FRONT
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
[2] [7] [8] 8050ma3027
1-21

7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten

[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the 2 spring fixing plates [2].

[1] 8050ma3140
1-22

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING
3. WRITING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.1 Screw that must not be
removed
Note:
• The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are
not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not
to remove them.
[1] 8050ma3028
1-23

WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the write unit
Warning:
• Be sure that the write unit should not be
powered with it slid from its normal instal-
lation position.
• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover
while being supplied with power. Otherwise,
laser beams get into your eyes and you may
lose your sight.
Note:
• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover. Do
not loosen the screws, either.
• When removing the write unit, be careful not
to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror
from being stained).
• Be sure not to remove the write unit for at
least two minutes after the main power switch
is turned off.
• When replacing the side cover /1, insert the
prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch
on the main body.
[1] 8050ma3175
A. Procedure
1. Open the by-pass tray [1].
2. Loosen 4 screws [2] and remove the side cover / [4] [5] [2]
2 [3].
1 [5].
[3]
[1] 8050ma3029
1-24

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING
4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1].

[2] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan
holder /R [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2] 8050ma3030
Note:
• Check the direction where the fan is assem-
bled.
[1] Turn the label side inside.
[2] Turn the label side outside.
[1] [2] 5001ma3030
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write

[3] [1]
pressing board [2] while pressing it downward.
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write
cooling ducts [4].
Note:
• Be sure to hold the upper half of the write
pressing board when removing it.
[4]
[3] [2] 8050ma3031
1-25

WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3], [2] [1]
write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5]. [1]

[3]
steps in reverse.
[4]
[5] [1]
[1] 8050ma3032
Note:
• The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common.
• The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is
provided with a wire tension spring [1] which
differentiates these three write units from the
write unit /K.
• Be careful not install any other write unit in
the installation place for the write unit /K.
[1] 8050ma3034
1-26

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT
4. PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.1 Flow of the disassembly of
the process unit section
Open the toner supply section
Open the front fan cover
Pull out the process unit Remove the charging corona unit
Pull out the transfer belt unit
Remove the drum cartridge Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
1-27

PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4.2 Cleaning the charging

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
corona unit
A. Procedure
Note:
• The charging corona units are provided for
the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and
black. These units are common. Do not reuse
a charging corona unit that was once used for
a color since it has been stuck with the toner
of the color.

ing and closing the toner supply section.")
2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1]
pressed down once to the lower right side, pull
out the charging corona unit this side for
removal.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3037
1-28

3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the

[3] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the
outside of the toner supply unit [1].
Note:
• There are two charging cleaning blocks pro-
vided. Be sure to use either of these two
blocks when cleaning the charging corona.
[2] 8050ma3038
4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the

charging control plate [1] comes up, set the
[1]
charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and
insert it from under the bottom on the rear side,
and turn it about 45° clockwise.
[2]
Note:
• If the charging wire is cleaned with the charg-
ing control plate facing down, there is a risk
that dust that has stuck to the charging wire
sticks to the charging control plate. So, when
cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold the
charging corona unit so that the charging
control plate comes upward.
5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and

forth the charging cleaning block [3].
steps in reverse.
[3] 8050ma3039
1-29

4.3 Cleaning/replacing, remov-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing and reinstalling

the charging wire assy
/the charging control plate
• Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies
• Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies
• Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies
Note:
• The charging corona unit is made up of a
charging wire assy, charging control plate and
a charging grid spring.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2
Cleaning and replacing the charging corona
unit.")
2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then
remove the charging control plate [2].
3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off
dust with a blower brush.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to install the charging control plate so
that the side on which the charging control [2]
spring is hooked comes to the front of the
charging corona unit.
• Be sure to install each of the charging control
springs with its tips [3] of both ends point
toward the charging wire.
[1] [2]
[3] 8050ma3040
1-30

4.4 Pulling out the process unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling
out the process unit, be sure to push it back
into the main body.
A. Procedure
2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan
[2]
cover [2].
[1] 8050ma3035
3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the

stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same [3]
time to release the fixing of the process unit [3].
Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out
the process unit [3].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3036
1-31


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the transfer belt unit

A. Procedure
1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each.
[2]
3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2]
counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.
[1]
[1] 8050ma3043
4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charg-

[3] [1]
ing corona suction assembly [2] provided on the
inside of the toner supply unit [1].
Note:
• The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to
allow a removed transfer belt unit to self
stand. When removing the transfer belt unit,
be sure to make necessary arrangements in
advance.
[2] 8050ma3044
1-32

5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the trans-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
fer belt unit [2]. [1] [2]
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt [3] with bare hands.
• Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of
the transfer belt with both hands.
[3]
Hold Hold
[1]
[2]
5001ma3045
6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit

[1] to allow it to self stand.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Make sure not to touch and damage the trans-
fer belt unit with the drum at installation.
[2] [1] 8050ma3046
1-33

Note:
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
• When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be

[1]
sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it
will not turn any more before starting work.
• Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that
2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2
transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompa-
nied with the guide pins [2] provided at two
[2]
places each at front and rear. [2]
• Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when
the transfer belt unit self stand with a support-
ing rod.
[3]
[5] [4] 8050ma3047
1-34

4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
brush unit
• Belt cleaning brush unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt
cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the [2] [2]
belt cleaning unit.
3. Replace the belt cleaning brush unit with a new
one.
steps in reverse.
Note:
[1]
• The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt
cleaning brush unit and the parts listed below.
(For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing
the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing
the toner collection sheet /1.")
Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece
Blade spring : 2 pieces [3]
Stop ring : 2 pieces
Blade fulcrum shaft : 1 piece
8050ma3048
Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece
Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece
Screw : 3 pieces
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply
the setting powder on the portion [3] on the
transfer belt.
• When reinstalling it, set the guide sections
provided on both sides below the belt clean-
ing unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit,
and then attach the screws.
1-35

4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
blade
• Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
2. Remove 2 blade springs [1].
[4] [3]
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the
blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt
cleaning blade [4].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
[3]
mounted, with the setting powder. [1]
[2]
8050ma3049
1-36

4.8 Replacing the toner collec-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tion sheet /1
• Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit.
2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner
collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner
collection sheet /1 [3].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the
toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hit-
ting it on the edge.
[1]
[2] [3] 8050ma3159
1-37

4.9 Replacing the belt separa-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tion claw
• Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sep-
[3]
aration claw unit [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt [3] with bare hands. [4]
• When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be
sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle
[4] of the transfer belt [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3050
3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then

remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
1-38

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
• The screws [1] shown in the drawing below
are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not
to remove them.
B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

• Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies
[1] 8050ma3148
C. Procedure
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") [1] [1]
2. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw.")
4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].
8050ma3053
1-39

5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the

[2] [3] [6]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bot-

tom.
6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of
the handle [3].
[7]
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft
stopper [5].
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the ten- [4] [5]
sion plate /R [7].
Note:
• When reinstalling the tension plate /R, knock
against the projection of the tension plate /R.
9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high

voltage supply curler /R [9].
10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the
bearing [11]. [12] [1]
Note:
• When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to [11] [8]
raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in
the groove of the shaft.
11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that [10] [9] 8050ma3054
the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the

edge of the belt comes up.
• When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold it
within 10mm from the upper end. Be careful
not touch any part other than this.

steps in reverse. 8050ma3152
Note:
• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt with bare hands.
• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
mounted, with the setting powder.
1-40

4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller
• 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.") [5] [7]
2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illus-
tration.
3. Remove the stop ring [1].
4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4
[3] to open the tip end of the transfer release
arm [4].
5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding [7]
it. [7]
6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].
[4] [3] [3] [4]
Note: [7] [6]
• Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so
that a shallow groove near the groove of the
E-ring comes this side.
7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of

the 1st transfer rollers.
steps in reverse. [1] [2] 8050ma3055
1-41

4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller /U
• 2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.")
2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once,
remove it diagonally from the lower side. [2]
Note:
• The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was
released when the transfer belt was removed
at the time of the removal of the high voltage
supply curler.
• Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U
so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the [1]
bottom.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer

1
roller /U [1].
steps in reverse.
2
[2] [1] 8050ma3056
1-42

4.13 Replacing the drum car-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tridge
• Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
• The drum cartridges are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.

2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay
[2]
/U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge
/Y [3]. [8]
3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum car-
[7]
tridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the [3]
same manner as in Step 2.
[4]
[1]
steps in reverse.
[5]
Note:
• When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be [6]
sure to check if both ends of the cartridge
have been dropped into the grooves of the
[9] 8050ma3057
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are
for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps
for other cartridges in the same manner.)
• When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be
careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up.
• Be careful not touch and damage the photo-
sensitive material of the drum with bare
hands.
• When the drum cartridge is not used for a
long period of time, be sure to store it in the
dark place with a cover on it (to shield the
light).
1-43


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the drum
A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
• Screws that are paint locked are not allowed
to be removed. Be careful not to remove them
at all costs.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3058
B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replac-
ing the drum cartridge.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum
[1]
stay /U [2].
[2] 8050ma3059
1-44

3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the coupling /A [2].
5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8]. [6]
screw idler gear [5].
7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove
black screw.).
8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7].
9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for
[9] [7] [5] [4]
removal.
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the cou-
pling side of the drum flange comes to the
rear side of the drum cartridge.

steps in reverse.
[3]
[2] [1] [8] 8050ma3060
1-45

4.15 Replacing the developing

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit
• Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
• Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted
at the developing sleeve side of the develop-
ing unit upper cover.
• When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to
use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE
tool. Using paper or cloth other than Hydro-
Wipe will cause the developing regulation
plate in the developing unit to be stuck with
dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus result-
ing in white streaks on the images.
• The developing units are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a developing unit that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open- [2]

ing and closing the toner supply section.") [3]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 devel-
oping support legs [3] provided inside the toner
supply unit [2].
Note:
• When placing the developing unit by itself, be
sure to set the developing support legs to the
body of the developing unit as a seat to pre- [3]
[1]
vent the toner bristles section from getting in
touch with other sections.
3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out

the process unit.")
8050ma3062
1-46

4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then

[1] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while
sliding the upper side of the developing pressing
blocks.
[2] 8050ma3063
5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and

then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a time.
steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color
label supplied with the developing unit on the
new unit.
Note:
• Be careful not to open the developing unit
cover.
[1] [2] 8050ma3064
1-47

4.16 Replacing the developer

I DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Developer: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replac-
ing the developing unit.")
2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its
upper end in drawing an arc to discharge devel-
oper. After discharging the developer, repeat
Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the
developer.
8050ma3149
3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the

toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agita- [1] [2]
tor screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked
direction.
8050ma3150
1-48

4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note:
• If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it
sometimes occurs that the developer is not
discharged completely. Be careful not to turn
it in the reverse direction.
5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "II .

Adjustment" in Field Service.)
8050ma3151
1-49

4.17 Replacing the belt separa-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tion claw solenoid

• Developer: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sole-
noid lever [2].
3. Remove the relay connector [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and release the cable [6]
from the cable clamp [5].
5. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the SD1
(belt separation claw solenoid) [8].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When having reinstalled the solenoid bar, [8]
check to see if the shaft [9] of SD1 (belt sepa-
ration claw solenoid) moves smoothly while
sliding it.
[7]
[4] [5] [6] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3069
1-50

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the process unit
A. Procedure
2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13
Replacing the drum cartridge.")
3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15
Replacing the developing unit.")
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.
Note:
• When removing the process unit, be sure to
remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum
cartridge and the developing unit. [8]
[6]
• Be careful not to remove black screws.
5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes [4]

possible to see the screw [5] through each hole
[2]
[4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3].
[1]
6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each. [5]
Note:
7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove

[6] [7]
it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as
explained below:
The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into
the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10]
of the process unit is placed on the projection [9]
on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide
rail /L a little against the process unit to remove
it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from [4]
the guide rail /R by raising the process unit.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [1] [5] [3]
steps in reverse.
[10] [9]
8050ma3070
1-51


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the image correction unit

A. Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing
and reinstalling the process unit.")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image
correction unit [3].
[4]
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When removing the image correction unit, be
sure to remove in advance the process unit.
• When removing the image correction unit, be
careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of [3] [1] [4] 8050ma3071
each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress

to it.
1-52

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TONER SUPPLY
5. TONER SUPPLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5.1 Opening and closing the
toner supply section
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply
section [3].
Note:
• With the toner supply section left open, be
sure not to apply force to the toner supply
sections such as the operation board. If
applied, the hinge of the toner supply section
may be deformed.
• When closing the toner supply section,
tighten the screw with a hand before using a
driver to prevent stripping the thread. [1] [2] [3] 8050ma3072
3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the

inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace
it at a new position where it becomes a stopper.
4. Close the front door following the steps for
opening in reverse order.
Note:
• When the toner supply section is opened, be
sure to replace the door lock to a new position
where it becomes a stopper and prevent it
from getting in touch with the process unit
when being pulled out. [2] [1]
[2] [1] 8050ma3073
1-53

TONER SUPPLY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.2 Replacing the charging dust

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
filter
• Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the [3] [1]
inside of the toner supply section [1].

steps in reverse.
[2] 8050ma3074
1-54

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper feed unit
A. Procedure
Note:
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].

paper feed unit cover [3]. [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3160
1-55

PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down

shaft screw [3].
5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear [3]
side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and
then remove the paper feed unit [4].
[5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3161
1-56

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper feed trays /1 to /3
A. Procedure
Note:
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.

2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed
[1]
tray /1 [2] for removal.
steps in reverse.
[1] [2]
8050ma3162
1-57

6.3 Replacing the paper feed

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller and the feed rubber

• Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every
800,000 copies in actual replacement count)
• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
Note:

3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to
the outside and then remove the paper feed [1]
roller assembly [3].
[2] [3] 8050ma3163
1-58

4. Remove a bearing [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the [7]
paper feed roller [3].
6. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the
feed roller [5].
7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller
[5].
steps in reverse. [6]
Note: [5]
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that
[4]
the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked
direction. [1]
• Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck
with grease.
[3] [2] 8050ma3164
1-59

6.4 Replacing the double feed

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
prevention rubber
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replace-
ment count)
B. Procedure
Note:

3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
double feed prevention roller [2]. [5]
5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed pre-
vention roller [2].
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
from the double feed prevention roller [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention
rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in
the arrow-marked direction.
• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-
tion roller is not stuck with grease.
[3] [4] [2] 8050ma3165
1-60

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
clutch and the pre-registra-
tion clutch
• Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11):
Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies
in actual replacement count)
• Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10,
MC13): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
Note:

4. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the [6]
MC7 [3].
MC8 [5]. [3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to
check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in [1]
the specified position.
[5] [4] 8050ma3166
1-61


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the tray up/down wire

Wire length:
• Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531mm
• Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160mm
A. Removing the wire
Note:

3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire
cover /FR [2]. [7] [5] [6] [2]
cover /FL [4].
cover /RR [6].
cover /RL [8].
[1]
[3]
[8] [4] 8050ma3167
1-62

8. Remove an E-ring [1]. 14. Remove an E-ring [13].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and 15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and
remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4]. remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16].
10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley 16. After removing an E-ring [17], remove the pulley
[6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from [18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16]
the wire restraining cover [7]. from the wire restraining cover [19].
11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the 17. Remove a screw [20] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B
[4]. [16].
12. After removing an E-ring [9], remove the pulley 18. After removing an E-ring [21], remove the pulley
[10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire [22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire
restraining cover [11]. restraining cover [23].
13. Remove a screw [12] from the bottom of the 19. Remove a screw [24] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A
[3]. [15].
[7]
[9] [11]
[6]
[3]
[10]
[5]
[3] [8]
[4]
[1]
[12] [2]
[23] [22] [19] [18]
[17]
[15]
[20]
[21] [16]
[15] [24] [14] [13] 8050ma3168
1-63

B. Attaching the wire 4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13]

Note: together with the wire restraining cover [12] and
• Since the composition of the paper feed trays fasten it with an E-ring [14].
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. Note:
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2] [11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
paper feed tray.
2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley 5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside
[4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted
wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an E- into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with
ring [7]. an E-ring [16].
3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft
[9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the
paper feed tray.
[12]
[7] [5] [11]
[4] [3]
[4]
[13]
[6] [3] [8]

[10]
[9]
[16]
[2] [1] [14] [15]
[17]
[18]
[17] 8050ma3169
1-64

Note:
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
[14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-
side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following

Steps 1 to 5.
Note:
• After completion of attaching the wires, be
sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand
to check to see if the up/down plate goes up
and down smoothly.

1-65

BY-PASS TRAY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
7. BY-PASS TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

roller and the feed roller
• Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual
replacement count
• Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual
replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
[1]
paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[2] [1] 8050ma3075
3. Remove the stop ring [1].

4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the [2] [1]
paper feed roller unit [3].
[3] 8050ma3076
1-66

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY
5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed
[2] [3]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear
assembly [3].
6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper
feed gear assembly [3].
[4] [1] 8050ma3077
7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the

[4]
by-pass drive shaft [1].
8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller
assembly [2].
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the
paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in
the drawling.

steps in reverse.
[3] [2] [1] 8050ma3078
Note:
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
[4] [3] [2]
so that the actuator section [2] coincides with
the detection section of the PS47 (no paper
sensor /BP) [3].
• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the tip end of the paper feed side of
the paper up/down lever comes into contact
with the inside of the top plate of the paper
feed roller unit [1].
[1] 8050ma3079
1-67


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
prevention roller
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed roller.
(See "Replacing the paper feed roller and the
feed roller.")
2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1].
[7]
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the dou-
ble feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the
flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller
assembly [5].
4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6]
from the double feed prevention roller assembly
[5].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the
direction shown in the drawing.
[1] [3] [2] [4] [6] [5] 8050ma3080
1-68

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
clutch /BP
• Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (One of the screws is
installed on the underside of the ADU cover/R
[2].)
[1]
5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway,
remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove
the ADU cover /R [2]. [1]
6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the [2]
stand pulling lever [5].
7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU
cover /L [7].
[7]
[6] [5] [4] [3] 8050ma3081
1-69


[3] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3].
steps in reverse.
[1] 8050ma3082
Note:
• When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP
[1]
(MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the
detente groove [2].
[2] 8050ma3083
1-70

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the vertical conveyance
A. Procedure
[4]
4 [2].
5 [4].
[2]
[1]
[3] 8050ma3170
1-71

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3].
[5]
4. Loosen a screw [4].
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side
cover /3 [7].
[6] [7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050ma3171
7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both

sides, and separate the by-pass up/down cover
[2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
[3]
[2] [1] 8050ma3172
1-72

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2],
remove a connector [3] and then remove the
vertical conveyance section [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
• When installing the vertical conveyance sec-
tion, be sure to fasten it with screws with the
vertical conveyance door closed.
[3]
[2] 8050ma3173
1-73

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
8.2 Replacing the intermediate

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
conveyance clutch /1
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the vertical conveyance section.
2. Remove a connector [1].
3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the [4]
spacer [3] and the gear [4].
MC13 [6]. [3]
[7]
steps in reverse.
Note: [2]
• When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check
that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the spec- [1]
ified position.
[6] [5] 8050ma3174
1-74

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING
9. FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• The fixing unit is very hot immediately after
turning off the main switch (SW2). In order to
avoid getting burnt, be sure to start operation
after the temperature goes down sufficiently.
9.1 Screws that must not be

removed
2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be
careful not to remove them. [1]
8050ma3153
1-75

FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the fixing unit

A. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU.
3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
knob [2]. [3] [4] [1] [2]
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing
cover /F [4].
8050ma3098
5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a

[1] [5] [5] [4]
screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then remove
the fixing unit [4].
Note:
• When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit,
slide it toward front and raise it while holding
both ends [5] at front and rear.

steps in reverse.
[2] [3]
8050ma3099
1-76

9.3 Replacing the fixing upper
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
heater lamps /1 and /2
• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies
• Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 cop-
ies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
cover /R [2].
Note: [2]
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
[1]
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3100
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web

motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at [3]
the 3 places.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3154
1-77

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit [2].
Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3101
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a

clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and
a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fix-
ing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater
lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for
[1]
removal.
Note:
• When removing the faston terminal, be sure to
[2] [7]
hold it at the connector.

[3]
steps in reverse.
[6]
Note:
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear.
• When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps,
please note that the lamp fitting holes on the
fixing plate are different. [5] [4] 8050ma3102
1-78

9.4 Replacing the fixing lower
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
heater lamp
• Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
cover /R [2].
Note: [2]
• Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
[1]
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
• When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3103
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to
the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web

motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at [3]
the 3 places.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3155
1-79

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit [2].
Note:
• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-
tion securely into the screw hole.
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3104
5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the con-

nector [2] at the front. [1]
[2] 8050ma3105
1-80

6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and

[6] [5] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate
[4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater
lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal.
[3]
steps in reverse.
Note:
[2]
• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear. [4]
8050ma3106
1-81

9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U,

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ball bearing /U and the heat

insulating sleeve /U
• Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure [1] [2]

2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit
upper cover.
Note:
• When removing the fixing unit upper cover,
raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to
the fixing roller /U.
3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.
8050ma3177
1-82

4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2.
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3].
Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fixing
roller /U [6].
Note:
fixing roller.
6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6].

[3] [4] [5] [6]
7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fix- [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
ing gear [2].
8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side,
remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• After replacing the fixing roller, check whether
the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting
with the roller.
• When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad. [5]
• When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be [4]
sure to make adjustments by referring to the [3]
36 mode "Adjustment item list." Otherwise, 8050ma3108
poor images may result.

• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Maltemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall
them so that their upper surface turns to the
inside as seen in the picture in which they are
arranged after disassembly.
1-83

9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L,

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ball bearing /L and the heat

insulating sleeve /L
• Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies
• Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies
• Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the fixing cover /R.
3. Open the fixing upper unit. [2]
(See “9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater
lamp.”
4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp.
entrance plate /L [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
[1] 8050ma3109
section of the entrance plate /L.
fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate
/L.
[3] [2]
6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once, open

the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the turnout
position and retighten it temporarily and then
remove the fixing roller /L [3].
Note:
fixing roller.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3110
1-84

7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both

[3]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1
each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-
ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve.
• After replacing the fixing roller/r, check
whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in [2]
touch with the roller. [1]
• When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
cleaner and cleaning pad.
8050ma3111
1-85

9.7 Replacing the fixing temper-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ature sensor /3, and remov-

ing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /1 and
the thermostat /1
Caution:
• After installing the fixing temperature sensor
/3, be sure to check that the sensor section is
in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the tem-
perature control may go abnormal or the fix-
ing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low
fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
• The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part.
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wiring
harness is not in touch with the fixing upper
roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after posi-
tioning it properly with a positioning jig
(4969-1885-01). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this
adjustment under the pressure-released con-
dition and the temperature low condition of
the fixing roller /U.

• Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000
copies
1-86

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ture sensor /3)
upper cover [2]. [1] [2]
8050ma3112
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector

[2]. [1] [2]
8050ma3113

temperature sensor /3 [2]. [2] [1]
Note:
• When reinstalling it, check that the sensor
section of the fixing temperature sensor is in
touch with the fixing roller.

steps in reverse.
8050ma3114
1-87

C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
fixing temperature sensor /1)

1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the
mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature [2] [1]
sensor /1.
8050ma3115

temperature sensor /1 [2]. [1] [2]
Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.

steps in reverse.
8050ma3139
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /1 and then remove the ther- [1] [2]
mostat section.
[1]
8050ma3116
1-88

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-

[1] [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
mostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting
board [2].
[3] 8050ma3117
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat)

1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3118
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2

screws [1].
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat
/1.
[2] [1]
[3]
8050ma3119
1-89

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1885-01)

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing a

upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board with 2 screws so that the mounting board
becomes the same thickness as the positioning
jig. [1]
• Specification: a = 3.1 ± 0.2mm
[2] 8050ma3120
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.
[1] 8050ma3121
1-90

9.8 Replacing the fixing temper-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ature sensor /4, and remov-
ing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /2 and
the thermostat /L
Caution:
• After reinstalling the fixing temperature sen-
sor /4, be sure to check that the sensor sec-
tion is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the
temperature control may go abnormal or the
fixing temperature sensor /4 may detect the
low fixing temperature abnormality.
• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
• The thermostat /L is an essential safety part.
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /L, be sure to check that the wir-
ing harness is not in touch with the fixing
lower roller.
• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after posi-
tioning it properly with a positioning jig
(4969-1886-01). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. And also be sure to conduct
this adjustment under the pressure-released
condition and the temperature low condition
of the fixing roller /L.

• Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000
copies
1-91

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ture sensor /4)

entrance plate /L [2]. [2]
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the paper passage
section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].
[1] 8050ma3122
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a

screw [3], and then remove the fixing tempera- [1]
ture sensor /4 [4].
Note:
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the [3]
sensor section of the fixing temperature sen-
sor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller.

steps in reverse.
[4]
[2] 8050ma3123
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

fixing temperature sensor /2) [1]
1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2
screws [3], and then remove the mounting board
[4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
[3] [2] 8050ma3124
1-92

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
temperature sensor /2 [2].
Note:
• Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
• Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [1] [2] 8050ma3125
steps in reverse.
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /L and then remove the ther-
mostat section.
[1]
[2] 8050ma3126
1-93

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting

board /L [2].
[3]
[2]
8050ma3127
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat /

L)
1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3128
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2]

with 2 screws [1]. [3] [4]
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat
/L [3].
[2] [1] 8050ma3129
1-94

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1886-01)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing
lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting
a
board becomes the same thickness as the posi-
tioning jig.
• Specification: a = 2.7 ± 0.2mm [1]
[2] 8050ma3130
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.
[1] 8050ma3131
1-95

9.9 Replacing the fixing drive

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
gear
• Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit. [2] [5] [4]
2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and
then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release
sensor) [3].
Note:
• Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the

actuator [5].
Note:
• Be sure to take note of the direction of the
actuator when reinstalling it. [3] [1] 8050ma3132
4. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web [3]
motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at
the 3 places.
[2]
[1] 8050ma3155
1-96

5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3133

[2]
drive gear [2].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the fixing drive gear, apply
Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.
[1]
8050ma3134
1-97

9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit
• Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the
fixing upper cover [2]. [1] [2]
Note:
• When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it
up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fix-
ing roller /U.
8050ma3156

cleaning unit [2]. [2]
Note:
• Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take
up the slack of the cleaning web before rein-
stalling it to the fixing unit.
[1] [3] 8050ma3157
1-98

• When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure

[2] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
to press it against the paper exit side [2] hori-
zontally while being careful that the paper
entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in
touch with the roller. This is because the
paper entrance prevention plate may cause
damage to the roller.

steps in reverse.
Note:
• After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be
sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning 8050ma3158
unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts

counter - Count of special parts."
If not, a problem such as image smudge may
arise because the web feed amount becomes
less than the set value or the machine dis-
plays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is
require to be replaced. Contact the service
manager or the authorized distributor” and is
disabled to copy or print.
1-99

9.11 Replacing the fixing torque

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
limiter
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper
feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1] 8050ma3144
4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out
with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the [2] [1]
panel.
8050ma3145
1-100

5. Remove the E-ring [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1] 8050ma3146
6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter

[2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a
new one.
Note:
• The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that
the pin does not get lost.

steps in reverse.
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3147
1-101

REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
10. REGISTRATION/ADU/
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
the ADU
Note:
• In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-
vided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• If the process unit has been pulled out when
pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the pro-
cess unit back into the main body.
A. Procedure
2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release
lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU
[2].
4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP").
5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See
"7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed
roller.")
[1] [2] 8050ma3084
1-102

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fix-
ing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].
[2]
[3]
8050ma3085

9. Remove the screw [2]. [1] [9]
10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the
screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] in
the guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws [7]
[5] one at a time.
Note: [10]
11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move the [8]
guide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turn-
out place of the oblong hole [9].
12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3]
and /R [7].
Note:
[6]
• When removing the ADU [6], please note that
this work requires two persons, with one per-
son at the paper feed side and the other at the [11]
paper exit side.
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R
[10]. [4] [5] [2] [3] 8050ma3086
• When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper exit side must hold the handle provided
at the center of the fixing positioning rail [11].

steps in reverse.
1-103

10.2 Replacing the registration

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
cleaning sheet
• Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 cop-
ies
B. Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the regis-
tration cleaning sheet [2]. [2]
steps in reverse.
[1] 8050ma3087
1-104

10.3 Replacing the separation
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
discharging plate unit
• Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000
copies
B. Procedure
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer
[2]
release cover.
[1] 8050ma3176
5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2].

[2] [3]
6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2]
once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the
separation discharging plate unit [2].
Note:
• When removing the faston from the separa-
tion discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out
straight the faston cover section.

steps in reverse.
Note: [1] 8050ma3088
• When reinstalling the separation discharging

plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the
separation fitting screw on the front side for
positioning.
1-105

10.4 Replacing the transfer

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ground plate unit and the

2nd transfer roller /L
• Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 cop-
ies
• 2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit
[1]. (See "10.3 Replacing the separation dis-
charging plate unit.") [4]
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the
transfer ground plate unit [3].
3. Remove 2 stop rings [5].
4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and
remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4].
5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer
roller /L [4]. [1] [6]
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to touch with bare hands the
2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other
than the shaft section.
• When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L, [6] [5]
install it with the dent on the roller shaft [2] [3] [5] 8050ma3089
comes to the rear of the machine (instead of

coming to the side contacting with the trans-
fer earth plate).
1-106

10.5 Replacing the registration
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller
• Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See
"10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning
sheet.")
paper feed clutch /BP.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear
cover [2].
[6]
5. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then [7]
remove the bearings [5], 1 each at front and
rear.
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the regis-
tration unit [7].
Note: [2] [8]

• When removing the registration unit [7], open [3] [6] [1]
the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide
the registration unit toward the rear of the
ADU to pull out the shaft of the front side from
the ADU panel, and then remove the registra-
tion unit.
[5] [4]
[5] [4] 8050ma3090
1-107

7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
istration gear [2] and the pin [3]. [5]

[6]
Note:
• When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be
sure to attach the pin [3] without fail.
[7]
8. Remove 2 registration pressure springs [4]. [4]
9. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6] and
then remove the registration roller [7].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the registration unit, be
careful not to damage the paper passage of [3]
the guide plate.
• Make sure to replace the registration pressure
springs to the original position.
[6]
[1] [2] [5] [4] 8050ma3091
1-108

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
conveyance clutches /2 and /3
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "7.3 Replacing
the paper feed clutch /BP.")
[5] [6]
intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3].
intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[2] [3]
[4] [1] 8050ma3092
1-109

10.7 Replacing the ADU convey-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ance clutches /1 and /2

• ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1):
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2):
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU
cover /L (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed
clutch /BP").
[5] [6] [1]
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3].
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[3]
[4] [2] 8050ma3093
1-110

10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-regis-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
tration clutch
• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3):
B. Procedure
paper feed clutch /BP.")
2. Remove two relay connectors [1].
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU [3] [1]
lock section [3].
[2] 8050ma3094

[1]
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2].
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be
sure to take note of the stopper position of the
the MC3.
[2] 8050ma3095
1-111

10.9 Replacing the decurler roller

I DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the
remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly
[4].
Note:
• The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in
length. Be sure to take note of the position of
the screw [3] when reintalling the assembly. [4] [3]
[2]
[1]
[2] 8050ma3096
1-112

5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob

[16] [13] [12] [9] [17]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2].
6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and
the paper exit open/close spring /F [4].
7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the
bearing [6].
paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9].
paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12]. [15] [14] [11] [10] [8] [7]
10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting
plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit
open/close spring /R [16].
11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove
the decurler [18].
steps in reverse.
[5] [6] [5] [18]

Note:
• When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1
[8], be sure to take note of the direction of the
belt guide.
• When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5.
[4]
Parts counter" and "1. Count of special
parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.
[2] [1] [3] 8050ma3097
1-113

OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
11. OTHER 6. Remove dummy connector.

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.

11.1 Installation of the Key
Counter Socket (OPTION)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Filter Cover.
See 1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2.
2. Remove the Hinge cover and Scanner cover /R.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
3. Remove the Key Counter Cover from the Scan- 4969D513aa
ner cover /R.

.
Note:
Scanner cover /R.
• When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, Set
to the Software DIP Switches.
Key Counter Cover *25mode: DipSW No.4 Bit.4
Key counter removal recovery.
*25mode: DipSW No.9 Bit.3 - 0
Operation at the counter removal.
4969D510aa
4. Remove two screws and the Cover.
4969D511aa
5. Use two screws, secure the Key Counter

Socket.
4969D512aa
1-114

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER
11.2 Installation / Remove of the 5. To mount the memory unit successfully.
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Memory Unit (OPTION) a Insert the memory unit into the memory slot
while being careful to ensure the direction is as
Note: Handling
shown in the picture.
• Precautions against static electricity.
b Fit the slot pins into the holes at both ends of
Keep the memory unit in an antistatic bag
the memory unit, and then push it down so that
while transporting or storing.
the claws at both ends of the slot secure the
Discharge electricity from your body by
memory unit.
touching somewhere metallic portion before
handling, when working on the place where
a
static electricity tend to generate such as on a
carpet.
• Do not touch the gilded pins of memory unit
directly with hands. Direct touch may cause
malcontinuity.
• Do not give the mechanical shock to the mem-
ory unit by dropping or bending and so on.
b
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Platen cover to Main Board unit.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
2. Pull it out toward you to remove it from the main
4969D515aa
body.
Note:
6. When demounting the memory unit.
• When pulling out the main board assembly, be
a Release the claws at both ends of the slot.
careful that the memory board doesn’t touch
b Raise the memory unit gently to remove it.
the stay.
3. If the HDD-7 is installed, remove it. b

4. Memory unit into the memory slots (4 places) of
the Image processing board. a
4 places 4969D516aa

steps in reverse.
Image processing board (IPB) 4969D514aa
1-115

OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-116

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 EXTERIOR
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 RADF hinge opening/clos-
ing angle adjustment
A. Replacing 70-degree and 40-degree fixtures
1. Untighten 4 screws [1] and remove 2 hinge
opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2]. [1]
Fixtures are for 70 or 40-degree use and can be
distinguished by the stamp on them.
2. Install 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
[2] df3193001
1-117

EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
B. Fixing the fixture at 90 degrees

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• When removing RADF or when opening RADF
to remove the scanner components, the fix-
ture should be fixed at an degree of 90°. If not,
the RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting

fixture at an angle of 90° by either one of the fol-
lowing methods. Two types of fixtures, 70° and
40-degree use, are installed. They can be dis-
tinguished by the mark on them.
70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-
ing fixture: As shown in the drawing right,
untighten 4 screws [1], slide down 2 adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [1], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
[2] [1] [1]
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [2] posi-
tively.
2. After completion of required process, return
them to the original positions.
[2] df3193002
1-118

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the front cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit
cover [2]. [4] [1] [2]
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the front
cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
[3] [3]
df3193003
1-119

EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the rear cover

1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit
cover [2]. [1] [3] [4] [3]
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the rear
cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
[2] df3193004
1-120

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the registration roller cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
2. Pull up the paper feed tray [2].
3. Unscrew 4 screws [3] and remove the registra- [3]
tion roller cover [4].
steps in reverse.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
df3193005
1-121

PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
2. PAPER FEED
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.1 Cleaning the no paper sen-

sor
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4
Removing and reinstalling the registration roller
cover.")
2. Clean the no paper sensor (PS304) [1] with a
brush, etc. [1]
df3193006
1-122

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper feed unit
2. Push 2 claw locks [2] at both ends of the paper
feed cover [1] to release and remove the paper [2]
feed guide [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
df3193007
1-123

3. Untighten 1 screw [1] and remove the shaft fix-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing plate [2].

4. Remove 2 snap rings [3]. [1]
5. Pushing 2 bearings [4] inward, remove the
paper feed unit [5].
[2]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal [5]
steps in reverse.
[4] [3] [3] [4] df3193008
1-124

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
• Feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
625,000 copies for actual durable count)
• Paper feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (See "1.4 Remov-
ing and reinstalling the paper feed unit.")
df3193009
2. Remove 1 bearing [1].

3. Remove 1 snap ring [2] and remove 1 pin [3]. [1] [6] [8] [7] [10] [12] [11]
4. Remove the gear [4] and remove the belt [5].
5. Remove the black snap ring [6] and remove 1
pin [7] (long pin) and gear [8].
6. Remove the plastic arm [9] and remove 1 pin
[10].
7. Remove 1 snap ring [11] and remove the paper
feed roller assembly [13] from the arm [12].
[5] [3] [4] [2] [9] [13] df3193010
1-125

8. Remove 1 snap ring [1].

[2] [3]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Remove 1 feed roller [2] and replace with new

one.
10. Remove 1 snap ring [3] and remove 1 pin [4].
11. Remove 2 paper feed rollers [5] and replace
with new ones.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be careful not to lose the paper feed roller and
feed roller fixing pins.
[4]
[1] [5] df3193011
1-126

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
prevention roller
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 1,800,000
copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable
count)
B. Procedure
2. Release the claw lock of the double feed preven-
tion unit cover [2] and remove the cover.
[2]
[1]
[2]
df3193012
1-127

3. Holding both edges of the roller shaft, stand the

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
double feed prevention roller [1].
df3193013
4. Remove the double feed prevention unit [1] and

replace with new one. [1]
steps in reverse.
df3193014
1-128

3. PAPER FEED
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.1 Cleaning the registration
roller
cover.")
2. Moisten cloth with alcohol and wipe 3 registra-
[1]
tion rollers [1] with the cloth.
df3193015
1-129

3.2 Cleaning the registration

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
sensor
cover.")
2. Clean PS301 (registration sensor) [1] with a
blower brush, etc. [1]
df3193016
1-130

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the conveyance belt
Note:
• Be careful not to touch the belt roller or avoid
damage or crease on it. If touching it by hand,
hold at the area of 20mm from the edges in
the width direction.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting

fixture at an angle of 90 degrees.
2. Open RADF [1] vertically.
3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] in the upper part of the con-
veyance belt [2] rightward and loosen.
4. Remove the drive interlocking belt [4] on the left
lower inside of the conveyance belt [2].
5. Remove the conveyance belt unit.
Note: [3] [1] [2] [3]

• When reinstalling, fit the drive interlocking
belt to the conveyance belt unit securely.
[4] df3193017
1-131

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and stand the roller.

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Remove the conveyance belt.

steps in reverse.
[1] df3193018
1-132

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.1 Cleaning the paper exit
roller/the paper exit sensor
1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
2. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 4 paper [2] [1]
exit rollers [2] with the cloth.
3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS306) [3] with a
brush, etc.
[3] df3193019
4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller

1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
2. Open the reverse guide [2]. [2] [1]
df3193020
3. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 5

reverse rollers [1] with the cloth. [1]
df3193021
1-133

REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
5. REMOVING AND
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
REINSTALLING RADF
Note:
• Before removing RADF, fix the RADF hinge
opening/closing angle at 90 degrees. Fix the
fixture also at 90 degrees when opening RADF
and removing parts of the scanner section. If
not, RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.

[2]
2. Fix 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fix-
tures [2] at an angle of 90 degrees.
Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are
installed. They can be distinguished by the
mark on them.
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], slide down 2
adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [3]
positively.
[3] [1] [3]
ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [3] posi-
tively.
df3193023
3. Open RADF [1] vertically.

4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 2 fixtures [3].
5. Raise and remove RADF [1].
steps in reverse.
Note: [3] [1] [3]

• After installing RADF, perform the 36-mode
"RADF installing position adjustment".
[2] [2] df3193024
1-134

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. EXTERIOR
the front cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover [1], remove 4 screws [2] and
then remove the right side cover [3]. [1]
[3]
[2] lt2113004
1-135

EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. Open the front door [1] and remove 3 screws [2]

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
provided on the side inside the door.

4. Remove a screw [3] on the upper face.
5. Remove 2 screws [4] on the right side and then
remove the front cover [5].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4] lt2113005
1-136

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the clutch replacement cover
and the rear cover
1. Remove the right side cover.
clutch replacement cover [2]. [1]
[2]
[1] lt2113007
3. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the rear

[2] [1]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
[1]
lt2113008
1-137

EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper feed pick-up cover

2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Remove the spring [3] from the paper feed unit
[2].
5. Pull out the paper feed pick-up cover /B [5] to [4]
the right side and remove it.
steps in reverse.
Note: [5]
• Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top
cover to the paper supply unit without fail. [2] [1]
[3]
[4] lt2113009
1-138

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED
2. PAPER FEED
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.1 Cleaning the paper dust
removing brush
2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.
3. Close the top cover [1].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] with
[1]
the blower brush.

steps in reverse.
Note:
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[2] lt2113010
1-139

PAPER FEED C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper feed unit

[2] [3] [2] [1]
4. Slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and remove
the paper feed unit [3].
steps in reverse.
Note:
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[1] lt2113011
1-140

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
• Paper feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
• Feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
3. Remove the paper feed unit [1].
[1] lt2113012
4. Remove the bearing [1].

5. Remove 2 stop rings [2] and then remove the
arm [3].
6. Remove the holder plate [4].
7. Remove a stop ring [5].
8. Remove the feed roller [6] and replace it with a
new one.
[1] [2] [3] [5] [7] [4]
9. Remove the paper feed roller [7] and replace it
with a new one.
steps in reverse.
[6] lt2113013
1-141


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
prevention roller
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 600,000
copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replace-
ment count)
B. Procedure
Note:
• Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower
most position in advance by pressing the tray
down switch (SW100) with electricity sup-
plied.

[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the pro-
tective cover [3].
[3] [2] lt2113014
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the dou-

ble feed prevention unit [2].
[2] [1] lt2113015
1-142

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. With the "D" cuts [2] of the shaft and the fixture
attached together, remove the double feed pre-
vention roller [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
[1] lt2113016
7. Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber

[2] from the shaft [1] and replace it with a new [3]
one.
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
roller rubber [2] so that the paint mark [3]
turns in the arrow-marked direction.
• Be sure to check to see if the PET sheet for
the drive gear cover is not damaged.
• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-
tion roller is not smeared with grease.
[2] lt2113017
1-143


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
clutch and the pre-registra-

tion clutch
• Paper feed clutch (MC101): Every 2,500,000
copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actural
replacement count)
• Pre-registration clutch (MC102): Every
2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in
actural replacement count)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the LCT from the main body. [2] [1]
clutch replacement cover [3]. [3]
[2] lt2113018

6. Remove 2 clutches [3] and replace them with
new ones.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling them, be sure to check that
a stopper for each clutch is in its specified
position.
[3] [3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
lt2113019
1-144

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN
3. TRAY UP/DOWN
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the rear drive
A. Removing the cover
Note:
plied.

2. Remove the right side cover and the front cover.
3. Remove the clutch replacement cover and the
rear cover.
B. Removing the paper feed drive

1. Remove 9 connectors [1] provided on the rear
left side. [1]
[1]
[1] lt2113020
2. Remove the paper feed clutch (MC101) and the

pre-registration clutch (MC102) [1]. See ("2.5 [2] [1]
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-
registration clutch").
3. Remove an E-ring [2].
lt2113021
1-145

TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. Remove 6 screws [1], remove then a bearing [2]

[3] [2] [1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
and the LCT drive unit [3].

5. Remove 2 connectors [4] provided on the back
of the LCT drive unit [3] and then remove the
LCT drive unit [3].
[1]
[4]
lt2113022
C. Removing the up/down drive

1. Remove 6 connectors [1] provided on the lower
back side.
[1]
[1] lt2113023
1-146

2. Remove an E-ring [1].

[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 2 bearing [3] and then remove the
guide plate [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]
lt2113024
5. Remove the gear [1].
Note:
• When reinstalling this gear, be sure to make
the positioning adjustments of the remaining
paper detection gear at this step. For posi-
tioning adjustments, see "D. Reinstalling the
rear drive."
6. Remove an E-ring [2] and a pin [3] and then

remove the gear [4]. [1] [4] [3] [2] lt2113025
7. Remove an E-ring [1], and then remove a bear-

ing [2], the gear [3] and a bearing [4]. [3]
8. Remove an E-ring [5] and then remove the gear
[4]
[6] and a pin [7].
[1]
[7] [5] [6] [2] lt2113026
1-147

9. Remove an E-ring [1] and then remove a bear-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing [2].
[2] [1] lt2113027
10. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the up/

down motor unit [2]. [1]
[1]
[2]
[1] lt2113028
1-148

D. Reinstalling the rear drive
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• Reinstall the rear drive following the removal
steps in reverse, but be sure to make position-
ing adjustments of the remaining paper detec-
tion gear at "C. Removing the up/down drive."
1. Conduct in reverse the steps 10 to 6 of "C.

Removing the up/down drive."
2. With the up/down plate at its lower most posi-
tion, stop the actuator of the remaining paper
detection gear [1] at the position where it
detects the remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105) [2]
[2] and install the gear [3].
[3]
[2]
[1] lt2113030
3. Conduct in reverse the steps 1 of "C. Removing

the up/down drive."
lt2113031
1-149


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the up/down wire

A. Wire length:
• Up/down wire /A: 1450mm (4 wires)
• Assist wire /C: 1240mm
• Assist wire /D: 820mm
B. Removing the wire
Note:
plied.

2. Remove the right side cover, front cover, clutch
replacement cover, and the rear cover.
3. Remove the rear drive.
4. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as
[2] [11]
seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate
[4]
[2] up to its upper most position.
[10]
Note:
• When the springs [3] and [4] are removed in
[13]
the succeeding steps, the up/down plate [2]
comes down. For this reason, be sure to sup-
port the up/down plate [2] by hands. (This
work requires two persons.) [12] [5]
[6]
5. Remove the spring [3] and then remove the [3] [1]
assist wire /C [5] from the guide pulleys [6] and
[7]
[7].
6. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /C [5] [10]
[5] around the drive pulley [8], remove the E-ring
[1] [15]
[9] and then remove the drive pulley [8].
7. Remove the assist wire /C [5] from the up/down [14]
drive shaft [1]. [8] [1]
[9]
8. Remove the spring [4] and then remove the lt2113032
assist wire /D [10] from the guide pulleys [11],
[12] and [13].
9. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /D
[10] around the drive pulley [14], remove the E-
ring [15] and then remove the drive pulley [14].
10. Remove the assist wire /D [10] from the up/
down drive shaft [1].
11. Bring down the up/drive plate [2].
1-150

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the [11]
[10]
up/down wire /A [2].
[12] [8] [9]
13. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/ [2]
down drive shaft [4]. [2]
14. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide
pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
[6]
Note:
• When removing the up/down wire /A [2] [7]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],
be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca-
tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.
15. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/ [4]
[5]
down wire protective cover [11].
[2] [3]
16. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it. [9]
[2] [3]
[2]
[8]
[4]
[1]
lt2113034
1-151


I DIS./ASSEMBLY
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the [11]

[8] [9] [10]
up/down wire /A [2].
[12]
18. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/ [2] [2]
down drive shaft [4].
19. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide [6]
pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
Note:
• When removing the up/down wire /A [2]
[2]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],
[5]
be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca- [7]
tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.
[4]
20. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/ [3]
down wire protective cover [11].
[3]
21. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper [2]
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it. [9] [1]
[2]
[8] [4]
lt2113035
22. In the same manner as Steps 12 to 16, remove

the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side. [1]
23. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, remove
the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
[2]
lt2113037
1-152

C. Reinstalling the wire
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main [6] [7] [2]
body.
[2]
2. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide [1]
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
[4]
Note:
• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
insert the wire into the pulley through the
[2]
notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
[5]
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-
ley to the wire that has been already inserted.
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first [3]
to the position where the notch [6] can be
[8]
avoided and then move the wire in the notch
[6] into each pulley. [10]
[11]
3. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire [10] [2]
[7] [12]
installation hole [9] provided inside the up/down [2] [9]
lt2113039
Note:
• The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3
wire installation holes each on the front side
and the rear side. In this step, the inner-most
wire installation hole is used.
4. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down

drive shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position in which the up/
down wire /A [2] is put.
5. Fit the E-ring [12] and fasten the drive pulley
[10].
1-153

6. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main [2] [6] [7]
body.
[2]
7. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide [1]
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
[4]
Note:
• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto [3]
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
insert the wire into the pulley through the
notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-
ley to the wire that has been already inserted.
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first
to the position where the notch [6] can be [8]
[5]
avoided and then move the wire in the notch
[2] [10]
[6] into each pulley.
[2]
[7]
[2]
8. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire [10] [11]
[6]
installation hole [9] provided at the middle of the
up/down drive shaft [8]. [9]
[8]
Note: [12]
• The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3 lt2113040
wire installation holes each on the front side

and the rear side. In this step, the wire instal-
lation hole at the middle is to be used. Since
the inner-most wire installation hole has been
already used, however, only two wire installa-
tion holes can be confirmed for this steps. As
a result, the one near to the drive pulley that
has been already installed is the wire installa-
tion hole [9] at the middle.
9. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down pul-

ley shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position into which the
up/down wire /A [2] is put.
10. Fit the E-ring [12] to fasten the drive pulley [10].
1-154

11. In the same manner as Steps 1 to 5, reinstall the
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side. [2]
12. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, reinstall
[1]
the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
lt2113041
13. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as

seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate [3] [4]
[2] up to its upper most position.
Note: [9] [17]

• Be sure to wind up the up/down wire /A form [16]
inside to outside in each drive pulley. [17] [2]
• The up/down plate [2] comes down by its own [4]
weight if the installation of the assist wire /C
[3] and the assist wire /D [4] have not been
[14]
completed. For this reason, be sure to sup-
port the up/down plate [2] by hands until the
installation of Step 23 is completed. (This
[15] [3]
work requires two persons.)
[8]
14. Insert the assist wire /C [3] into the wire installa- [9] [1]
tion hole [5] provided outside the up/down drive [7]
shaft [1].
[3] [4] [13]
[7]
Note: [1] [18]
• The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided with 3
[5] [12]
wire installation holes each on the front side [11]
[6]
[10] [1]
and the rear side. However, since the wire
installation holes on the inside and at the mid- lt2113043
dle have been already used, only the wire

installation hole on the outside can be con-
firmed for this steps.
15. Insert the drive pulley [6] into the up/down drive
shaft [1] so that the notch [7] of the drive pulley
[6] comes to the position into which the assist
wire /C [3] is put.
1-155

16. Wind the assist wire /C [3] around the drive pul-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ley [6] one turn counterclockwise as seen from [3] [4]

the front side.
Note: [9] [17]

• Be sure to wind the assist wire /C [3] from [16]
inside to outside in the drive pulley [6]. [17] [2]
[4]
17. Reinstall the assist wire /C [3] onto the guide
pulleys [7] and [8] in this order and then fasten
[14]
them with the springs [9].
Note:
[15] [3]
spring [9] when reinstalling it. [8]
[9] [1]
18. Fit the E-ring [10] to fasten the drive pulley [6]. [7]
19. Insert the assist wire /D [4] into the wire installa-
[3] [4] [13]
tion hole [11] provided outside the up/down [7]
20. Insert the drive pulley [12] into the up/down
[5] [12]
drive pulley [1] so that the notch [13] of the drive [11]
[6]
pulley [12] comes to the position into which the [10] [1]
assist wire /D [4] is put. lt2113046
21. Wind the assist wire /D [4] around the drive pul- Note:
ley [12] one turn clockwise as seen from the rear • The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided
side. with 3 wire installation holes each on the
front side and the rear side. However, since
Note: the wire installation holes on the inside
• Be sure to wind the assist wire /D [4] from and at the middle have been already used,
inside to outside in the drive pulley [12]. only the wire installation hole on the out-
side can be confirmed for this steps.
22. Reinstall the assist wire /D [4] onto the guide
pulleys [14], [15] and [16] in this order and then
fasten them with the spring [17].
Note:
spring [17] when reinstalling it.
23. Fit the E-ring [18] to fasten the drive pulley [12].
1-156

24. Reinstall 4 up/down wire protective covers [2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
with a screw [1] for each. [2] [1] [2]
25. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [3] counterclock- [1]
wise as seen from the rear side to bring down
the up/down plate [4].
26. Reinstall the rear drive.
27. Reinstall the rear cover, clutch replacement
cover, front cover and the right side cover.
[4]
[3] lt2113045
1-157

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-158

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Removing and reinstalling of
the booklet tray (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the
booklet tray [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] fs2153001
1-159

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the top cover /1

A. Procedure
2. Open the finisher door [2] and remove 5 screws [1]
[3]. And then remove the top cover /1 [4]. [3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3] fs2153002

the top cover /2
Note:
• When an optional PI has been installed, be
sure to remove it.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the top cover /1.
[3]
2. Open the finisher door [1]. [4]
3. After removing 2 screws [2], pull out the sub-tray
[3] and remove the top cover /2 [4].
[1]
steps in reverse.
[2] fs2153003
1-160

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the side cover
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the side
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[2] fs2153004

the finisher door
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] from the lower hinge [2] [3]
and remove the finisher door [1].
[1]
steps in reverse.
[2]
fs2153005
1-161

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the rear cover

A. Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] fs2153006
1-162

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the main tray
Caution:
• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
A. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the [1]
main tray [2].
2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord from the power out-
let.
[2]
fs2153007

[2]
4. With the main tray [2] raised up, unhook the up/
down stay [3] and remove the main tray [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
fs2153008
1-163

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the main paper exit opening

cover
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
• Top cover /2
• Side cover
• Rear cover
• Main tray
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main
paper exit opening cover [2]. [2]

steps in reverse.
[1]
fs2153009

the booklet paper exit open-
ing cover (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the booklet tray.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the book- [2]
let paper exit opening cover [2].
[1]
steps in reverse.
fs2153010
1-164

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2. CONVEYANCE
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.1 Replacing the paper exit
roller /A (sponge roller)
Caution:
• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body

• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every
250,000 copies.
Note:
• When replacing the sponge rollers, all of the 5
pairs (10 components) must be replaced.
B. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the [1]
main tray [2].
2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord of the main body
[2] fs2153011
1-165

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the [1]

sponge roller.
fs2153012
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

together at their respective concave sections [1],
install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
[1]
steps in reverse.
[1]
fs2153013
1-166

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
conveyance roller (sponge
roller)
• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller):
Every 250,000 copies.
Note:
• When replacing the intermediate conveyance
rollers, all of the 2 pairs (4 components) must
be replaced.
B. Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and a bearing [2], and
then remove the intermediate conveyance roller
[3].
[2]
[1]
[3] fs2153014
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the

sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the [1]
sponge roller.
fs2153015
1-167

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
together at their respective concave sections [1],

install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
[1]
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
• When reinstalling, be sure to insert the pin at
the rear of the intermediate conveyance roller
securely into the receiving groove. fs2153016

the paper exit opening unit
A. Procedure
• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
• Top cover /2
• Side cover
• Rear cover
• Main tray
• Main paper exit opening cover
2. Remove a screw [3] of the paper exit open/close
link [2] of the paper exit opening unit [1]. [2]
[1] [3]
fs2153017
1-168

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. Remove 3 clamp screws [1], a ground screw [2],

[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) con-
nector [3] and the main tray paper exit sensor
(PS706) connector [4]. [3]
[1]
[4] fs2153018
4. Remove E-rings [1] and bearings [2], two each,

[2]
provided at front and rear, and then remove the [1]
paper exit opening unit [3].
steps in reverse.
[2] [1]
[3] fs2153019
1-169

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. MAIN TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.1 Replacing the tray up/down

motor
Caution:
• When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.

• Tray up/down motor (M703): Every 2,500,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. After removing a connector [1], remove 2 screws
[3] while supporting the main tray [2] with your
hand, and then remove the tray up/down motor
[2]
(M703) [4].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[4]
[1]
fs2153020
1-170

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the up/down wire
Caution:
• When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.
Note:
• The wire replacement steps shown below
refer to those taken on the rear side. The
shape and the winding of wire on the front
side are symmetrically the same as those on
the rear side.
• The wire brackets of the up/down wire is
stamped with "F" for the front side and "R" for
the rear side. When reinstalling, be careful not
to mix up the front with the rear.
A. Procedure
• Side cover
• Finisher door
• Rear cover
• Tray up/down motor (M703)
• Main tray
2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the up/
down gear cover [2] and the gear [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
fs2153021
1-171

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. After removing 2 screws [1], remove the wire

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
bracket [3] of the up/down wire [2] on the rear

side from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3] [4] fs2153022
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[2]
[1] fs2153023
5. Remove an E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the up/

down pulley /L [3], and then remove the up/down
wire [4].
[5]
[3]
Note:
• When removing the up/down pulley /L, be
careful not to drop the pins [5]. Otherwise,
they may get lost.
[4]
[1] [2]
fs2153024
1-172

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6. Fasten the wire bracket [1] tentatively to the up/
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note:
• Be sure to set the up/down wire [4] with the
shorter section [5] up and the longer section
[6] down. [6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
fs2153025
7. With a new up/down wire fastened to the wire

end [2] of the up/down pulley /L [1], wind the
wire a little less than 5 turns from inside toward
outside around the pulley without getting loos-
ened and set the up/down pulley /L [1] to the
shaft so that it is in tune with the pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
fs2153026
8. After putting the up/down wire on the up/down

pulley /U [1], wind it 2 turns from inside toward
outside around the up/down pulley /L [2] without
getting loosened and fasten it to the wire end [1]
[3].
[3]
[2] fs2153027
1-173

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
9. Set the pin [1] and the gear [2] to the shaft and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
fasten it with the E-ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] fs2153028
10. Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull

the belt tensioner [1] to the specified force "A"
and tighten it with 2 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5 ± 0.25 kg
[2]
[1] fs2153029
11. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on

the front side. Press down the up/down stay [3]
to make it level, and tighten screws [5] of the [2]
wire bracket [4] on the rear side and screws (4
screws in all).
Note: [1]
• Be sure to check if the up/down stay [3] is
level. If it is out of the level, an undesirable
load may be imposed on the tray up/down
motor (M703) or the gear, causing damage to
[3]
it. [5]
[4] fs2153030

steps in reverse.
1-174

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. STACKER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.1 Replacing the stacking
assist roller
• Stacking assist roller: Every 400,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Open the stacking assist section [1] and lift up
the stacking assist roller [2]. [3] [2]
4. Remove the stop ring [3], and then remove the
stacking assist roller [2].
steps in reverse.
[1] fs2153031

the stacker unit cover
A. Procedure
stacker unit cover [2]. [2]

steps in reverse.
[1] fs2153032
1-175

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the stacker unit
Caution:
• We recommend that at least two people per-
form this service.
• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
• Booklet tray
• Side cover
• Finisher door
• Rear cover
2. Detach the FNS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors [1] (CN1, CN2, CN3) from
[2]
the relay board (RB) [2].
(For FS-115, two connectors (CN1, CN2) are
provided.)
5. Remove each cable from the wiring harness
guide.
[1] fs2153033
1-176

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6. After removing an E-ring [1] and the shaft [2],
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
detach the connecting arm [3].
[2]
[3]
[1] fs2153034
7. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out

the stacker unit [2].
Note:
[1]
• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[2]
[1]
[3] fs2153035
1-177

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and raise the stacker unit

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] to remove the guide rail [3]. [4]

[3]
Caution:
• When removing the guide rail, be careful not [5]
to hurt your hip by taking an appropriate pos-
[1]
ture.

steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the
[5]
guide rail [3], be sure to check to see if the [3]
hook [4] is set securely into the fitting hole [5].
[4] [1]
fs2153036
1-178

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5. STAPLER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the stapler unit cover
Caution:
• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1] fs2153037
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out

the stacker unit [2]. [1]
Note:
• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[2]
[3] fs2153038
1-179

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the sta-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
pler unit cover [2].

steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] fs2153039
5.2 Replacing the clincher

Note:
• Do not use hands to move clincher units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-
duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-
pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")

• Clincher: Every 200,000 staples
B. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler
unit cover.
3. Remove a ground screw [1], and then remove
the ground [2] and the clamp [3]. [5]
4. After removing 4 screws [4], remove the clincher

/F [5] and then remove the connector [6].
[6] [4]
[1]
[3] [2] fs2153040
1-180

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5. Remove 4 screws [2] of the clincher /R [1] and

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the ground [3].
[2]
[3] fs2153041
6. After removing 2 screws [1] and the ball bearing

[3]
spring mounting bracket [2], rotate the clincher /
R [3] to the position in which it can be easily
taken out, and then remove the connector [4].
Note:
• Be careful not to lose the bearing spring [5]
and the ball.

steps in reverse.
[5] [1]
[2] fs2153042
1-181

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.3 Replacing the stapler

I DIS./ASSEMBLY

• Stapler: Every 200,000 staples
Note:
• Do not use hands to move stapler units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-
duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-
pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
B. Procedure
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. After removing 4 screws [2] of the stapler /F [1]
[2]
and a ground screw [3], take out the stapler /F
[1] and remove the connector [4].
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] fs2153043
1-182

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5. After removing 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] of the stapler /F [1] and 3 clamps [4], remove
a ground screw [5] and the connector [6].
Note:
• When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be [4]
[2]
careful that the wiring harness does not inter-
fere with the stapler rotation HP sensor
(PS713) [7] or get caught by the gear.
[6]
[3] [5] [7] fs2153044
6. After removing 4 screws [1], take out the stapler

[1]
/R [2] and remove the connector [3].
[2]
Note:
• When taking out the stapler /R [2], be careful
not to damage PS713 [4].

steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[4] fs2153045
1-183

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-184

PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. PUNCH SECTION Punch unit
Note:
• The following screws should not be removed.
If you do, punching cannot be done as
designed.
Screws that should

not be removed
1.1 Replacing the Punch unit

A. Procedure
1. Remove cap on the top cover.
Punch scraps box
1-185

PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov- punch drive board cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing one screw.
Screw
3. Disconnect two connectors (CN65, 68) and one

Relay connector (CN531)
relay connector (CN531) from the punch drive
board (PKDB). Connector (CN65)
Connector (CN68)
Punch drive board (PKDB)
1-186

PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION
4. Remove three screws to remove the punch unit

punch unit cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
cover.
Screws
5. Disconnect two connectors (CN158, 505).

1 2 3 1
6. Remove the punch unit from FNS by removing
four screws.
steps in reverse
6 1 5
1. Screws
2. Punch unit
3. Connector (CN505)
4. Connector (CN158)
5. Punch shift motor (M802)
6. Punch shift HP PS (PS803)
1-187

PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edges

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
and Punch Scraps Full PS

(PS802)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the punch unit.
2. Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and
punch scraps from the punch edges and punch Punch scraps full PS (PS802)
scraps full PS (PS802).
steps in reverse
Punch edges
1-188

Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 External Section
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. External Section
1.1 Removing / Re-installing the
External covers
A. Procedure Screws
1. Remove cap on the top cover. Cap
2. Remove four screws to detach the top cover.
Top cover
3. Remove one screw to detach the connector

Screws
cover.
Lower cover
4. Remove three screws to detach the lower cover.
Connecting cover
Screw
1-189

External Section Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5. Remove two screws, disconnect the relay con-

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
nector (CN232), and detach the operation panel

cover. Relay connector (CN232) Screw
Screw
steps in reverse.
Operation panel cover
1-190

Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Paper feed unit
2. Paper feed unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.1 Replacing the Paper feed
roller and Feed roller
A. Procedure Stop Bearing Stop ring
1. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed ring
roller for the upper tray, detach the top cover.

2. Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left
and right bearings outside, and remove the feed Bearing
roller unit.
Paper feed roller unit
3. Remove actuator, three stop rings, three bear- Paint mark

ings of the feed roller unit, then slide the roller
shaft in the direction of the allow to remove each
roller.
Rubber
Feed roller
Feed drive belt
Stop ring
Bearing
Rubber
Stop
Feed roller rings
Bearing
Actuator
1-191

Paper feed unit Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed

Top cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller for the lower tray, open the upper tray and Release lever
perform the steps 2 and 3.
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
2.2 Replacing the Double feed

prevent roller and Torque
limiter
A. Procedure
1. When replacing the double feed prevent roller
and the torque limiter for the upper tray, detach
the top cover.
2. Detach the paper feed roller unit. Double-feed prevention roller
3. Release the hooks on both sides, remove the
double feed prevention roller assembly by lifting
up, then pull out the shaft, and remove the dou-
ble-feed-prevention roller together with the feed-
reverse gear.
Hooks
4. Separate the double feed prevention roller and

the torque limiter from the double feed preven-
Stop rings
tion roller assembly. Double feed prevention roller
5. When replacing the double feed prevention
roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray,
open the upper unit and perform the steps 2 and Torque limiter
3.
Notch
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
1-192

TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Trimming knives (upper and lower) are used
in this machine. Be extremely careful in han-
dling these knives to avoid injuries.
1. TRIMMER
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife
/U and trimmer knife /L
• Trimmer knife /U: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
• Trimmer knife /L: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and conveyance door [2].
2. Untighten 4 fixing screws [3] and remove the top [4] [3]
plate [4].
3. Untighten 1 nylon clamp screw fixing the power
cord and remove the power plug.
[1] [2] tu1093001
1-193

TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. Untighten 4 fixing screws [1] and 3 fixing screws

[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] and remove the rear cover [3].
[1] [3] tu1093002
5. Untighten 3 fixing screws [1] and remove the

roller cover [2]. [2] [3] [4]
6. Disconnect 1 relay connector [3] and remove the [5]
wiring harness [5] from the cable clamp [4].
7. Untighten 2 front and rear fixing screws [6] [6]
respectively and remove the entrance convey-
ance roller unit [7].
[6] [1] [7] tu1093003
8. Remove 1 front and rear E-ring [1] and bearing

[3]
[2] respectively and remove the trimmer
entrance driven roller [3].
[1] [2] tu1093004
1-194

TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER
9. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and

[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the trimmer knife /U [3] holding the
replacing handle [2] at 2 positions.
Note: [2]
• When removing the trimmer knife /U [3], be
sure to hold the replacing handle [2]. Never
touch the knife blade.
• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /U or
hit it against some object; its edge may be
nicked.
[3] tu1093005
10. After pulling down the conveyance guide plate

[1], insert a screw (M4 x 16 or more) or the like
[2] into the stopper hole [3] to avoid the convey- [5]
ance guide plate [1] from returning to the origi- [4]
nal position.
Note:
• Do not remove 2 screws [4] and 1 screw [5]
[2]
that should not be removed.
[1]
[3] tu1093006
1-195

TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
11. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and

[2] [4]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the trimmer knife /L [2] holding the front

fixture [3] and inner corner [4].
Note:
• Never touch the blade of the trimmer knife /L
[2].
• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /L or
hit it against some hard object; its edge may
be nicked.
• When installing, align the bottom of the trim-
mer knife /L [2] with the hexagon socket head
bolt [5] and insert into the guide pin [6]. [3] [1]
[6]
steps in reverse.
[5] tu1093007
1-196

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
II ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
1.1 Composition 8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade,
adjusted and their method of adjustment that are
etc.)
required by this machine and gives detailed expla-
10. Is toner filled?
nations.
II ADJUSTMENT
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-
A. Checking before starting work
vice
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary
Due attention should be paid to the following when
to check in advance the following: repairing the machine.
1. Are the power source and voltage secured in

accordance with the specifications? 1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is
2. Is the power source properly grounded? turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut
off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from
3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a
the power outlet. Also, when operating the
lot of electricity connected to the same power
source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as machine with the power supplied, be careful of
elevator and air conditioner) the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to
get caught by the gear.
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful
machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sun- not to get burnt when handling it.
light, ventilation, etc. 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
• Levelness of the location on which the machine careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
is installed. to the unit.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
itself?
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
6. Is density selected properly?
hands.
7. Is the original glass stained?
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there
occurs a claim for poor image quality. However, 2. A circle "{" in the table
these adjustments (including checking) and setting , ................. : Shows that the order of
are also required when a part is replaced with a new priority has been speci-
one. fied for adjustments
(including checking) and
[How to use the tables] setting.
Each item represents the following: { (Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments
1. Mode (including checking) and
Shows which mode is used for adjustments. setting can be done
"25": 25 mode independently.
"36": 36 mode
"47": 47 mode
2-1

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• This table shows the list of adjustment items
when replacing a part. Items are numbered in
" " by the priority if there is any.
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K

Replacement parts
Adjustment items
II ADJUSTMENT
Mode
PM counter resetting
PM count
PM cycle set
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
Fixing cleaning unit
Parts counter Count of special parts 25
Developer /Y, M, C, K
Decurler roller
ISW
Board change mode
Blade setting mode
LD bias adjustment
Process adjust- Automatic gamma adjustment (0) 4
ment Drum peculiarity adjustment
Automatic developer charge
L detection initial auto. adjustment
Initial drum rotation 1
Printer vertical mag. adjustment
Printer horizontal mag. adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Belt line speed adjustment
Fixing line speed adjustment
Image adjustment
Printer lead edge timing adj.
Writing unit skew initial adj. 36
Timing adjustment
Auto. color registration adj. 2
Color registration manual adjustment 3
Scanner gamma adjustment
Printer gamma offset adj.
Printer gamma adjustment Printer gamma sensor adj.
Image quality Printer screen gradation adj.
adjustment Sharpness adjustment
Dot detect adjustment
Image judge adjustment
Color text adjustment
ACS adjustment
Other adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment
*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed
the L detection adjustment.
*2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,
and fixing cleaning unit.
*3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.
2-2

2
1
3
Developer *1
5
4
3
6
1
Transfer belt
2*3
Belt cleaning blade
2
1
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
4
2
1
3
Image correction unit
mode - 92 (output).
Charging corona /Y, M, C, K

Fixing roller /U, L
Fixing cleaning unit
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Decurler roller
6
5
2
7
1
Write unit /K
6
5
1
4 4
7
2
Write unit /Y, M, C
3*3 3*3
Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K
2-3
5
6
7
3
2
1
4
CCD unit
4
5
6
2
1
3
Each scanner mirror
2
3
4
1
Exposure lamp (L1)
2
3
4
1
Original glass
2
1
Overall control board (OACB)

2
1
Printer control board (PRCB)

Image processing board (IPB)
2
1
Operation board /1 (OB1)

1
Memory board (MB) *2
3
2
1
Registration roller
RADF control board (DFCB)
FNS control board (FNSCB)
Stapler unit
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board
section of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47
(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service
II ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1 Setting method
From this screen, the following modes can be
selected without turning off/on the power.
"1 Basic screen"
"2 36 mode"
"3 25 mode"
"4 Key operator mode"
II ADJUSTMENT
"5 47 mode"
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main

switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit

password to change mode" appears.
3. Input 9272 as the password and press the

START button. (The password is fixed and can-
not be changed.) "Mode changing menu
screen" is displayed.
4. Press any desired key.
5. To return to the "Mode changing menu

screen," press the P button and wait until the
"Mode changing menu screen" appears.
6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]

key to return to the basic screen.
2-4

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MODE CHANGE MENU
4.2 Display transition of 36 modes

36 mode 1/2
High voltage adjustment mode menu
x : Factory exclusive use. Service is not used.
1 1st transfer manual adjustment
2 2nd transfer manual adjustment
3 HV adjustment (Separation-AC)
4 HV adjustment (Separation-DC)
5 Pre-transfer guide HV check
Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu

Process adjustment mode menu 1 Blade setting mode
II ADJUSTMENT
2 Automatic drum potential adjustment x
1 High voltage adjustment
3 Automatic gamma adjustment
2 Drum peculiarity adjustment
4 LD bias adjustment
3 Sensor output check
5 Automatic developer charge
4 Exclusive paper setting
6 L detect initial automatic adjustment
5 Recall standard data
7 Initial drun rotation
Sensor output check mode menu

3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode 1 Surface potential sensor output
2 MAX. density sensor output
1 Process adjustment
3 Gamma sensor output
2 Image adjustment
3 Image quality adjustment Magnification adjustment mode menu
4 Running test mode 1 Printer drum clock adjustment
5 Test pattern output mode 2 Printer horizontal adjustment
6 Test pattern density setting 3 Scanner drum clock adjustment
7 Finisher adjustment 4 EDH drum clock adjustment
8 List output mode
Timing adjustment mode menu
Image adjustment mode menu
1 Printer restart timing adjustment
1 Magnification adjustment 2 Printer resist loop adjustment
2 Timing adjustment 3 Printer pre-resist adjustment
3 EDH adjustment 4 Printer lead edge timing adjustment
4 Centering adjustment 5 Scanner restart timing adjustment
5 Non-image area erase check 6 EDH restart timing adjustment
6 Recall standerd data 7 EDH resist loop adjustment
EDH adjustment mode menu

1 EDH density adjustment
2 EDH original size adjustment
3 EDH Incline offset adjustment
Centering adjustment mode menu
1 Printer centring adjustment
2 Scanner centring adjustment
3 EDH centring adjustment
2-5

36 mode 2/2
Printer gamma adjustment mode menu
1 Printer gamma offset adjustment

2 Printer gamma sensor adjustment
3 Printer screen gradation adjustment
Image quality adjustment mode menu
Image judge adjustment mode menu
1 Scanner gamma adjustment
2 Printer gamma adjustment 1 Dot detect adjustment
3 Sharpness adjustment 2 Color text adjustment
4 Contrast adjustment 3 Dot/Text area adjustment
5 Image judge adjustment
Density adjustment mode menu
II ADJUSTMENT
6 ACS adjustment
7 Density adjustment
1 AE adjustment
8 Tone adjustment
2 Copy density adjustment
3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode 9 Recall standard data
3 Background adjustment
1 Process adjustment
Tone adjustment mode menu
2 Image adjustment
3 Image quality adjustment Running test mode menu 1 Red adjustment
4 Running test mode 2 Green adjustment
1 Intermittent copy mode
5 Test pattern output mode 3 Blue adjustment
2 Paperless running mode
6 Test pattern density setting
3 Paperless mode
7 Finisher adjustment
4 Paperless endless mode
8 List output mode
5 Running mode
Finisher adjustment mode menu

1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment
2 Fold stopper adjustment
3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment Punch adjustment mode menu
4 Trimming stopper adjustment 1 Punch vertical position adjustment
5 Punch adjustment 2 Punch horizontal position adjustment
6 Three Folding position adjustment 3 Punch resist loop adjustment
7 2 Positions staple pitch adjustm.
List output mode menu

1 Machine management list 1
2 Adjustment data list
3 Page fill data list
4 Machine management list 2
5 Parameter list
6 Memory dump list
7 Font pattern
2-6

4.3 Display transition of 25 modes
PM count mode menu

1 Count reset
2 Change setting
2-5 Modus /Memory setting mode Collecting data mode menu

1 Software SW setting 1 Total count of each setting
2 Paper size setting 2 Copy count of each paper size
3 PM count 3 Print count of each paper size
II ADJUSTMENT
4 Data collection 4 RADF count
5 Parts counter 5 Page fill of each section
6 Password setting 6 JAM date of time series
7 Telephone number setting 7 JAM count
8 M/C serial number setting 8 Count of each copy mode
9 Indication of ROM version 9 SC count
10 RD mode setting 10 JAM count of each section
11 ISW 11 SC count of each section
12 Setting date input
13 Board change mode Copy count mode menu
1 Count of special parts
2 Count of each parts
Password setting mode menu

1 Key operator password
2 E.K.C. master key cord *1
3 Weekly timer password
M/C serial number setting menu

1 Main body
2 Option tray
3 RADF
4 Finisher
*1 Name of system
E.K.C : Except USA area
E.C.M : USA area only
2-7

4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes

Key Operation mode
System initial setting menu

1 Date & Time setting
2 Language select setting
Key operator mode menu 3 IP address setting / Tandem
4 E-mail transmission setting
1 System initial setting
2 Copier initial setting Weekly timer setting menu
3 User setting mode
II ADJUSTMENT
1 Weekly timer ON/OFF setting

4 E.K.C function setting *1
2 Timer setting
5 Lock / delete program memory
3 Timer action ON/OFF setting
6 Paper type / Special size set
4 Lunch hour off setting
7 Panel contrast / Key sound adj.
5 Timer interrupt password set
8 Key operator data setting
9 Weekly timer
> Next page
10 Control panel adjustment
11 Tray auto select setting Management list print mode menu
12 Power save setting 1 Job memory list
13 Memory switch setting 2 User management list
14 Machine management list print 3 E.K.C. management list
15 * Not use Minolta! 4 Font pattern list
16 Finisher adjustment
17 Front & Back Density setting Finisher adjustment mode menu
18 Scanner transmission setting 1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment
19 Non-image area erase setting 2 Fold stopper adjustment
20 AES adjustment 3 Trim stopper adjustment
21 Execute adjust operation 4 Punch adjustment
22 Magnification adjustment 5 Z-Fold position adjustment
23 Timing adjustment 6 2-Positions staple pitch adjustment
24 Centring adjustment 7 Finisher output limit
25 Printer gamma sensor adj.
Magnification mode menu
*1 Name of system
1 Printer vertical mag. adj.
E.C.M : USA area only 2 Printer horizontal mag. adj.
3 Scanner vertical mag. adj.
Centring adjustment mode menu Timing adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment 1 Printer lead edge timing adj.
2 Scanner centring adjustment 2 Printer registration loop adj.
3 RADF centring adjustment 3 Printer pre-registration adj.
4 Printer erasure amount adj.
5 Scanner re-start timing adj.
6 RADF registration loop adj.
2-8

Key Operation mode

No.13 Memory Switch Setting
No15 - Memory switch menu

1 Auto reset timer 31 E.K.C. password input timing *1
2 Auto reset key function 32 Sound (No paper, toner/ JAM)
3 RADF-Original effect 33 Reserve copy function
4 Job memory auto recall -30- 34 Change page no. Pos. (booklet)
5 Finisher mode by Full-Auto 35 Trimmer (STD./ Non STD size)
6 Initial by Key Counter insert 36 Timer which prohibits print
7 Erasure outside area of original 37 Bookmark function
II ADJUSTMENT
8 RADF frame erasure selection 38 Delete of overlay image
9 Automatic tray switching 39 Orig. direction/ Binding mode
10 Platen APS 40 Screen (Line Screen)
11 RADF APS 41 Screen (Dot Screen)
12 Platen AMS 42 Side 2 drum clock adjust mode
13 RADF AMS 43 Screen (Full Colour-Text/ Photo)
14 Select tray when APS cancel 44 Screen (Full Colour-Photo)
15 Platen original size detect 45 Screen (Monochrome-Text/ Photo)
16 RADF original size detect 46 Screen (Monochrome-Photo)
17 Platen original size detect (SMALL) 47 Screen (Mono Colour-Text/ Photo)
18 Rotation 48 Screen (Mono Colour-Photo)
19 Staple mode reset function 49 Colour gamut
20 Job offset operating
21 Continuation print
22 Key click sound
23 1 Shot indication time
24 Power save screen
25 Start Key latch function
26 Stop Key function
27 Auto select of booklet copy
28 E.K.C. Password *1
29 Arrow key change [Image shift]
30 An interruption suspended way
*1 Name of system
E.C.M : USA area only
2-9

CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.CHECKING BY
THE P FUNCTION
The P function is a function that allows you to con-
firm the following various numeric values by using
the P button.
[1] Total counter

[2] Full color counter
[3] Mono color counter
II ADJUSTMENT
[4] Monochrome counter

[5] Copier counter
[6] Printer counter
5.1 Checking method of the

P function
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main

switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button.
3. "Counter list screen" appears.
4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and

the PM counter is displayed.
5. To output the counter value list, press the

[Counter list output] key.
6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear but-

ton returns to the basic screen.
2-10

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE
6. 25 MODE
6.1 List of adjustment items for
25 mode
Adjustment item menu Remarks

See the "List of software
1. Software SW setting
DIPSW".
2. Paper size setting LCT paper size setting
3. PM count 1. Count reset
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Change setting
4. Data collection 1. Total count of each paper setting
2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
1. Count of special parts
5.Parts counter
2. Count of each parts
6. Password setting 1. Key operator password 4 digits
2. E.K.C. master key code 8 digits
3. Weekly timer password 4 digits
1. Service centre Telephone number 16 digits
7.Telephone number setting
2. Service centre FAX number 16 digits
8. M/C serial number setting 1. Main body
2. Option tray
3. RADF
4. Finisher
9. Indication of ROM version
10. RD mode setting
11. ISW
12. Setting date input
13. Board change mode
2-11

25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
6.2 Setting method 6.3 Setting software DIPSW

This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an A. Setting method
adjustment method. This mode is used when the The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting
memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings screen."
are made.
Note:
• Please note that DIPSW bits are written into
A. Procedure
the memory board (MB) each time a change is
1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset made.
II ADJUSTMENT
switch (SW1) left ON.

B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the screen
same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode
menu screen" appears.
At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode
with normal copy operations unavailable.
3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal dis-

play (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to
each item appears.
[1] [2] [3] [4] 8050fs1026e
4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of
each item. [1] DIPSW number
[2] Bit number (0 to 7)
5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode. [3] Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
[4] 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadeci-
6. New data will be effective after restarting. mals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"

Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.
3. "Software SW setting screen"

Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow
key on the left.
4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the

arrow key on the right.
5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by

using the [ON] or [OFF] key.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return

to the "25 mode menu screen".
• For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of soft-

ware DIPSW."
2-12

List of software DIPSW
Note:
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW Bit Functions 0 1 Default values

No. Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW1 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Print stop method after toner sup- *1 *1 1 1 1
II ADJUSTMENT
ply or waste toner full display
3 *1 *1 0 0 0
4 Prohibition of printing when the PM Not prohibited Prohibited 0 0 0
count is reached
5 Print number setting until printing is *2 *2 0 0 0
6 prohibited after PM is displayed *2 *2 0 0 0
7 *2 *2 0 0 0
DIPSW2 0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Control of the LT paper feed assist *3 *3 0 0 0
fan
5 *3 *3 0 0 0
6 Switchover of the rotational speed *4 *4 1 1 1
7 of the polygon motor *4 *4 0 0 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 SC latch (SC34/35/36) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
2 Password request for 25, 36, 47 Not requested Requested 0 0 0
mode (password: 9272)
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW4 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 1 0
3 — — — 0 0 1
4 Recovery from removal of the key Disabled Enabled 0 1 0
counter
5 APS when change magnification Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
6 Change of fixed magnifications set- Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
ting in key operator mode
7 Large size paper counting method Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
(Other than PM counter)
2-13


DIPSW5 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Change of the size of the large size B4, 8.5 x 14 or A3, 11 x 17 or 0 0 0
paper
larger larger
6 — — — 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW6 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW7 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW8 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Large size paper PM counting Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
method
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW9 0 Operation when the key counter is Same as Immediate stop 0 0 0
removed (copier) the stop button jam
1 Operation when the key counter is Ignored Same as 0 0 0
removed (IP)
DIPSW9-0
2 Message switchover *5 *5 0 0 0
3 *5 *5 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit selection *6 *6 0 0 0
5 *6 *6 0 0 0
6 *6 *6 0 0 0
7 *6 *6 0 0 0
2-14


DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power No reservation 94MB (177MB 0 0 0
on when Expan-
sion memory is
installed)
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Filter for jagged edges on slanting Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
lines
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Adjustment of the image quality in Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
the key operator mode
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Black text screen with overlay func- *7 Screen *7 Nonscreen 0 0 0
tion
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW13 0 Size detection switchover 1 A5, A4R 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R 0 1 0
1 Size detection switchover 2 A6R Post card 1 0 0
2 Size detection switchover 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1
3 Size detection switchover 4 *8 *8 0 0 0
4 *8 *8 0 1 0
5 F4 size setting *9 *9 0 0 0
6 *9 *9 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
2-15


DIPSW14 0 Size detection switchover 5 (main B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
body) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Size detection switchover 5 (by- B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
pass) 8.5 x 11 / B5R
4 Size detection switchover 5 B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
(platen)
8.5 x 11/B5R
II ADJUSTMENT
5 Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR 0 0 0

8.5 x 11 / B5R
6 Size detection switchover 5 (PI) B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0
8.5 x 11 / B5R
7 0 0 0
DIPSW15 0 Selection of the RD mode type Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 FNS alarm stop method *10 *10 0 0 0
4 *10 *10 0 0 0
5 RD mode connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW16 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Recognizing the copy reservation Copy reservation Copy reservation 0 0 0
function/coin vendor
function enabled function prohibited
Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled
2 Coin vendor type Parallel Serial 0 0 0
communication communication
3 Counting of the key counter in the Not counted Counted 0 0 0
printer mode (IP)
4 Display of the total count start date Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
(P function)
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 NIC selection for E-Mail RD-mode IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0
DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting *11 *11 0 0 0
1 *11 *11 1 1 1
2 *11 *11 1 1 1
3 *11 *11 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning the *12 *12 0 0 0
tabed paper
5 *12 *12 0 0 0
6 *12 *12 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
2-16


DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
1 Tray 2 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
2 Tray 3 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
trimmer faulty part isolation
6 PI faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
7 HDD faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW19 0 — — — 0 0 1
1 Fixing temperature selection *13 *13 1 1 1
2 *13 *13 1 1 1
3 *13 *13 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 PK faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 Default resolution of the IP scanner *14 *14 0 0 0
7 *14 *14 0 0 0
DIPSW20 0 Group stapling mode Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with shift *15 Normal * 15 Original priority 0 0 0
function
2 Selection of the stamped page Based on Based on 0 0 0
number original transfer paper
3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW21 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 LCT size setting in the key operator Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
mode
2 Display of the original count Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Selection of the index paper with Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
APS
7 — — — 0 0 0
2-17


DIPSW22 0 IP address setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
1 Number of punch holes *16 *16 0 1 0
2 *16 *16 0 0 1
3 Image reference position for the Based on user Based on APS at 0 0 0
non-standard size original
selection ADF
4 Function of the power save button Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Operation when FNS runs out of Staple supply Selecting 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
staple between staple

request supply or staple
release
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is Enabled Disabled (regis- 0 0 0
unmatched (IP) (counted as the tered in JOB list)
other user)
2 Precision of the color registration *17 Normal *17 Fine 0 0 0
automatic correction (periodical
correction)
3 Control of the color registration *18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 0
automatic correction (periodical
correction)
4 Main scan correction of the color *19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 0
registration automatic correction
(periodic correction)
5 IP gamma correction *20 Enabled *20 Disabled 0 0 0
6 Job memory registration of the Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
special paper setting on the by-
pass tray
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Vs/Vp switch control *21 Disabled *21 Enabled 0 0 0
2 Image stabilization control timing *22 *22 0 0 0
3 *22 *22 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW25 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Color registration correction control *23 *23 0 0 0
4 *23 *23 0 0 0
5 Color registration fine correction Yes No 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 De-humid heater ON OFF 0 0 0
2-18


DIPSW26 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW27 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Toner refresh mode (at job end) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0
4 Printer gamma offset adjustment *25 Only high *25 Whole area 0 0 0
light
5 PK punch mode restriction Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Toner refresh mode switchover *26 Y,M,C,K *26 M,C 1 1 1
(Key operator mode)
DIPSW29 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Include of proof copy to the set Not included Included 0 0 0
copy quantity
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Restriction of the display of the 25 Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0
mode data correction
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
2-19


DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
*1 Print stop method after toner supply or waste *4 Switchover of the rotational speed of the poly-
toner full display gon motor
Mode 1-3 1-2 Mode 2-7 2-6

Stops after ejecting paper 0 0 1/1 speed 0 0
in the machine
1/1 speed 0 1
Stops at a break between 0 1
copy set 2/3 speed 1 0
Stops at the end of the 1 0 1/2 speed 1 1
current job
Does not stop 1 1
5 Message switchover
Mode 9-3 9-2

*2 Print number setting until printing is prohibited
Please insert key counter 0 0
after PM is displayed
Please insert copy card 0 1
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5 Please insert coin 1 0
1,000 prints 0 0 0 Please insert key counter 1 1
2,000 prints 0 0 1
3,000 prints 0 1 0
4,000 prints 1 1 0 *6 Copy quantity limit selection
5,000 prints 0 0 1 Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4

1,000 prints 1 0 1 No limit 0 0 0 0
1,000 prints 0 1 1 1 sheet 0 0 0 1
1,000 prints 1 1 1 3 sheets 0 0 1 0
5 sheets 0 0 1 1
9 sheets 0 1 0 0
*3 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan
10 sheets 0 1 0 1
Mode 2-5 2-4 20 sheets 0 1 1 0
ON for coated paper only 0 0 30 sheets 0 1 1 1
ON for all types of paper 0 1 50 sheets 1 0 0 0
ON for all types of paper 1 0 99 sheets 1 0 0 1
OFF at all times 1 1 No limit 1 0 1 0
No limit 1 0 1 1
No limit 1 1 0 0
No limit 1 1 1 0
No limit 1 1 1 1
2-20

*7 Black text screen with overlay function *11 Summer time setting
When using the overlay of the applied func-
tion, the image creation method of black char- Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
acters is switched between the error diffusion 0 minute 0 0 0 0
and the screen. 10 minutes 0 0 0 1
Mode 12-6 20 minutes 0 0 1 0
Screen 0 30 minutes 0 0 1 1
Error diffusion 1 40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
*8 Size detection switchover 4
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
II ADJUSTMENT
Mode 13-4 13-3 80 minutes 1 0 0 0
A5R 0 0 90 minutes 1 0 0 1
B6R 0 1 100 minutes 1 0 1 0
5.5 x 8.5R 1 0 110 minutes 1 0 1 1
— 1 1 120 minutes 1 1 0 0
130 minutes 1 1 0 1
140 minutes 1 1 1 0
*9 F4 size setting
150 minutes 1 1 1 1
Mode 13-6 13-5
8 x 13 0 0
*12 Density selection when scanning the tabed
8.25 x 13 0 1
paper
8.125 x 13.25 1 0
8.5 x 13 1 1 Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
80 0 0 0
40 (most lighter) 0 0 1
*10 FNS alarm stop method
60 0 1 0
This setting is used to determine when to stop 100 0 1 1
if a FNS full alarm is detected. 120 1 0 0
Functions detected are;
160 1 0 1
Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the
200 1 1 0
FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch 255 (most darker) 1 1 1
scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker
Mode 15-4 15-3

Stops immediately after 0 0
detection
Stops at a break between 0 1
copy set after detection
Does not stop while in 1 0
printing
Does not stop while in 1 1
printing
2-21

*13 Fixing temperature selection *17 Precision of the color registration automatic
Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient correction (periodical correction)
"Fine" is used when the precision of the color
fixing or fixing winding
registration correction that is periodically con-
jam ducted is increased with the amount of error
Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl- reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes
ing or waving longer for correction.
Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1 Mode 23-2

Upper roller, lower roller: - 0 0 0 Normal 0
30°C Fine 1
Upper roller, lower roller: - 0 0 1
II ADJUSTMENT
20°C
Upper roller, lower roller: - 0 1 0 *18 Color registration auto correction control (peri-
10°C odical correction)
Standard 0 1 1 Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced with the color registration correction
Upper roller, lower roller: 1 0 0
+10°C omitted that is periodically performed (color
registration correction at power ON is not
Upper roller: +10°C 1 0 1
Lower roller: +20°C omitted).
Standard 0 1 1 Mode 23-3
— 1 1 1 Enabled 0
Disabled 1
*14 Default resolution of the IP scanner

*19 Main scan correction of the color registration
Mode 19-7 19-6 auto correction (periodical correction)
400dpi 0 0 The color registration corrections, in the main
600 dpi 0 1 scanning direction that are periodically per-
formed can be omitted. This is used temporar-
200 dpi 1 0
ily when there is a registration error along the
300 dpi 1 1 main scan as a result of a trouble around the
transfer belt unit, or when separating faulty
points.
*15 Image scanning area with shift function
Normal: Compare the original size and the Mode 23-4
transfer paper size and the smaller Enabled 0
one is to be the image area. Disabled 1
Original priority:
Original size is to be the image *20 IP gamma correction
area. In order to separate defective items when
there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma
Mode 20-1
correction can be omitted. The gamma correc-
Normal 0 tion table is stored in the IP.
Original priority 1
Mode 23-5
*16 Number of punch holes Enabled 0
Disabled 1
Mode 22-2 22-1
2 holes (for Japan) 0 0
3 holes (for inch area) 0 1
4 holes (for metric area) 1 0
— 1 1
2-22

*21 Vs/Vp switch control *23 Color registration correction control

This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there Correction made:
is an image erasure around a solid image in Correction is performed by sus-
the half-tone section in early stage after the
pending print at specified print.
change of developer.
No correction made:
Mode 24-1 Correction is omitted temporarily to
Disabled 0 reduce down time when the
Enabled 1 machine cannot be used with SC
due to malfunctions around the
*22 Image stabilization control timing color registration sensor.
II ADJUSTMENT
Correction made: No correction while in printing:
Correction is performed by sus- Correction that is performed by sus-
pending print at specified print. pending print at every specified
No correction made: print is performed after the print job
Correction is omitted temporarily to to reduce down time.
reduce down time when the Mode 25-4 25-3
machine cannot be used with SC Correction made 0 0
due to the malfunction of the drum
Correction not made 0 1
potential sensor or gamma sensor.
No correction while in 1 0
No correction while in printing: printing
Correction that is performed by — 1 1
suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job
to reduce down time.
Mode 24-3 24-2

Correction made 0 0
Correction not made 0 1
No correction while in 1 0
printing
— 1 1
2-23

*24 Toner refresh mode (at Job end) *25 Printer gamma offset adjustment
Toner refresh mode (periodical) Change the area in which the printer gamma
When printing coverage is low (5% or less of offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted.
each color), rough image, white spot or toner 0: High light area only
spillage tend to occur due to toner deteriora- 1: Possible in whole area
tion.
The effective measure against these are as Mode 28-4
follows. High light area only 0
•Toner refresh mode in key operator mode
Possible in whole area 1
It is performed by a user's decision when a
problem occurs.
Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3
*26 Toner refresh mode switchover
II ADJUSTMENT
solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K.

(It needs to change setting by DIPSW 28- Switch over the toner refresh mode function in
7) the key operator mode.
•DIPSW 28-2 0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3
For the colors of which print coverage of solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to
the previous job is 5% or less (convert into consume toner.
A4), solid toner of the difference amount
•This setting is effective for rough image,
from the 5% is developed to consume
white spot and toner spillage.
toner.
•This setting is not so effective for white
•PIPSW 28-3
line (paper feeding direction).
Check the average print coverage for each
1: Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets
color at prescribed distance of developing
sleeve drive developes the toner amount A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to
equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color consume toner.
of which the average print coverage is 5% •This setting is effective for white line
or less (convert into A4). (paper feeding direction).
•This setting is effective for rough image,
Mode 28-2
white spot and toner spillage for
Disabled 0 magenta and cyan only. (It has no
Enabled 1 effect for yellow and black.)
Mode 28-7
Y,M,C,K 0
Mode 28-3
M,C 1
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
2-24

6.4 Paper size setting 6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size screen."
of the LCT. To invalidate the setting that you have
The paper size is available in the standard size, changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
non-standard size and wide paper. to "25 mode menu screen."
6.4.1 Standard size setting
A. Procedure 6.4.3 Wide paper setting
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 25 mode. A. Procedure
2. "25 mode menu screen" 1. Enter the 25 mode.

Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
Press the [Standard size] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen"
4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size. Press the [Wide paper] key.
5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu 4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard
screen." size of the wide paper.
To invalidate the setting that you have
5. Press the [Enter size] key.
changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to
"25 mode menu screen." 6. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting
7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
A. Procedure paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
screen."
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
3. "Paper size setting screen" changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
Press the [Non-standard size] key. to "25 mode menu screen."
4. Press the main scan direction key and enter

the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the

paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
2-25

6.5 PM count setting 6.5.2 Change setting
A. Procedure
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM
and set and/or change the PM cycle. 1. Enter the 25 mode.
The selection of the PM cycle is available in the
total count and the distance in operation of the 2. "25 mode menu screen"
developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set. Press the [3. PM count] key.
6.5.1 Count reset 3. "PM count/cycle screen"

Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
1. Enter the 25 mode. Only the upper three digits can be entered.
2. "25 mode menu screen" 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
Press the [3. PM count] key. screen."
3. "PM count/cycle screen" changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return
Press the [Count reset] key.
to "25 mode menu screen."
4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM
count. The PM count is reset and the starting
date of the PM count is automatically entered.
When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is
not reset and return to "PM count/cycle
screen."
2-26

6.6 Data collection B. Data collection confirmation method

(1) Procedure
It is possible to confirm various data held in the
machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the list output and the mail remote notification
system.
Press the [4. Data collection] key.
A. Data that can be confirmed 3. "Data collection menu screen"

1. Total count of each paper size Press the key of a data collection item that you
2. Copy count of each paper size want to confirm.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. Print count of each paper size To select any succeeding key to the key 11,
4. RADF count press the arrow key.
5. Page fill of each section
4. "Individual data confirmation screen"
6. JAM data of time series
Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
•Count of each copy mode (1)
•Count of each copy mode (2)
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section Note:
• The [Count reset] key is shown in the individ-
Note: ual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be count of each section] and the [11. SC count
confirmed. of each section].
When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,
and when pressing the [YES] key, the section
data is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual
data confirmation screen" with the interval
data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM implementa-
tion to confirm the jam or SC occurrence
count after it was visited last time.
2-27

C. Details of the data collection

(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and
printer counts of each paper size
NO For Remark
Japan Inch Metric
1 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used
2 A3 11 x 17 A3
3 B4 8.5 x 14 B4 (8K)
4 A4 8.5 x 11 A4
5 B5 5.5 x 8.5 B5 (16K)
II ADJUSTMENT
6 A5 — A5
7 B6 — F4
8 8.5 x 14 — —
9 8.5 x 11 A4 —
10 Special Special Special
• Maximum count: 99,999,999

• 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless
of the paper size.
• All sheets of paper that do not come under the
size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.
However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same
size.
• The non-standard and the wide paper are
counted as special.
2-28

(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count
NO Item Remark
1 No. of originals fed in ADF mode
2 No. of originals fed in RADF mode
3 No. of originals fed in RDH mode
4 No. of originals fed in RRDH mode
5 No. of originals fed in LDH mode Not used
6 No. of originals fed in CFF mode
7 No. of 1 sided SDF original fed
8 No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode
II ADJUSTMENT
9 No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
10 No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode Not used
11 No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed
12 No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed
13 No. of 2 sided SDF original fed Not used
14 —
(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each sec-

tion
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of
5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of
Y, M, C and K.
This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the
dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and
is different from the print ratio when actually printed.
(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time

series
With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible
to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of
occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size
and magnification.
2-29

(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10. NO Jam code is shown on the Section
JAM count of each section LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
NO Jam code is shown on the Section
33 J72-16
LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 34 J72-17
1 J10-01 35 J72-18
2 J10-02 By-pass 36 J72-19
3 J10-03 37 J72-20
4 J11-01 Tray 1 38 J72-21
5 J12-01 Tray 2 39 J72-22
FNS
II ADJUSTMENT
6 J13-01 Tray 3 40 J72-23

7 J14-01 LCT 41 J72-24
8 J17-01 42 J72-25
9 J17-02 43 J72-26
10 J17-03 44 J72-28
11 J17-04 45 J72-29
12 J17-05 Paper feed 46 J72-30
13 J17-06 47 J72-32
14 J17-07 48 J72-33 TU
15 J17-08 49 J72-34
16 J17-09 50 J72-35 PI
17 J31-02 51 J72-38
18 J32-08 52 J72-39
19 J32-04 53 J72-40 Not used
20 J32-01 Reversed 54 J72-41
21 J32-05 paper exit 55 J72-42
22 J32-07 56 J72-43 PK
23 J32-02 57 J72-44
24 J32-03 58 J72-45
Not used
25 J92-01 59 J72-46
26 J93-01 ADU 60 J72-47
27 J94-02 61 J72-48 FNS
28 J19-01 Vertical 62 J72-49
conveyance 63 J72-50 PI
29 J19-02 LCT 64 J72-51
30 J51-01 Main body 65 J72-60
31 J71-01 FNS 66 J72-61
32 J71-02 TU 67 J72-62 Not used
68 J72-63
69 J72-64
70 J72-80 PK
71 J72-81
72 J72-82
FNS
73 J72-83
74 J72-90
2-30

NO Jam code is shown on the Section

LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
75 J61-01
76 J61-02
77 J61-03
78 J62-01
79 J62-02
DF
80 J62-03
81 J62-04
II ADJUSTMENT
82 J62-05
83 J62-06
84 J62-07
85 J17-10 LCT
86 —
87
88 Not used
89
90
2-31

(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)
NO Item Count conditions

1 1-1 mode
2 1-2 mode
3 2-1 mode
4 2-2 mode
5 ADF 1-1 mode
6 ADF 1-2 mode
7 Mixed original mode
8 Tab original mode
II ADJUSTMENT
9 Z-folded original mode

10 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.)
11 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.)
12 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.)
13 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.)
14 Enhance Mode: text/photo
15 Enhance Mode: Text
16 Enhance Mode: Photo
17 Enhance Mode: Map
18 Non STD size
19 1 oblique staple(Upper left)
20 1 oblique staple(Upper right)
21 2 parallel staples(Left binding)
22 2 parallel staples(Upper binding)
23 Left binding
24 Right binding
25 Upper binding
26 Three-Folding
27 Stapling & Folding
28 Folding
29 Main tray: Group
30 Main tray: Sort
31 Main tray: Non sort
32 Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33 Subtray: Group (FACE UP)
34 Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)
35 Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)
36 Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)
37 Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)
38 Cover sheet
39 Trimmer
40 Real size copy
41 Preset magnification E4
45 Preset magnification R4
2-32


49 User lens mode 1
50 User lens mode 2
51 User lens mode 3
52 Zoom
53 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 Maximum zoom
II ADJUSTMENT
55 Minimum zoom
56 APS
57 AMS
58 AE (AES)
59 User density level 1 (Not used)
60 User density level 2 (Not used)
61 Interrupted copy
62 Auto image rotation cancellation
63 Sheet insertion
64 Chapter control
65 Combination
66 Booklet copy
67 OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)
68 OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)
69 Image insert
70 Book copy
71 Program job
72 Non-image area erase
73 Reverse image
74 Auto repeat
75 Manual repeat
76 STD size repeat
77 Frame erasure
78 Fold erasure
79 Auto layout
80 All-image area (Not used)
81 Image Shift
82 Reduction shift
83 Overlay
84 Water mark
85 Stamp
86 Date/Time
87 Page
88 Numbering
89 Set quantity 1
90 Set quantity 2-5
91 Set quantity 6-10
2-33


92 Set quantity 11 or more
93 Time while power remote 1 is ON Accumulation of time during which the overall
control board is powered
94 Time while power remote 2 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote
power 1 is on (in minutes)
95 Time while power remote 3 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote
power 2 is on (in minutes)
96 Time while power remote 4 is ON Accumulation of time during which the built-in
controller operates (in minutes)
97 Time during Low Power mode Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1
count for each minute)
II ADJUSTMENT
98 Time during warm up time Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes)

99 Time during front door open Accumulation of time during which the front door
is open (in minutes)
100 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Accumulation of time from the start of print to the
end of print (in minutes)
101 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit Down time due to jam omitted
102 Operation time in 2 side print
103 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which ADF oper-
ates (in minutes)
104 Morning Correction count (Not used)
105 Time during APS sensor ON Accumulation of time during which the APS sen-
sor is on (in minutes)
106 N of main tray used jobs
107 N of subtray used jobs
108 N of stapling & folding used jobs
109 N of folding used jobs
110 N of ADF NF occurred
111 N of ADF special error1 occurred Wrong detection of original size
112 N of ADF special error2 occurred Next original information error
113 N of ADF special error3 occurred Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed
114 N of scanner scanned No. of scans in platen mode
115 N of electrode cleaned (Not used)
116 N of memory overflow
117 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)
118 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)
119 N of AGC retry (Not used)
120 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)
121 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)
122 N of distortion adjust error (Not used)
123 N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)
124 Compression memory overflow
125 Page memory overflow (scan)
126 Page memory overflow (print)
127 FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 FNS alarm (staple)
129 —
130 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)
131 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used)
2-34


132 Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan → HDD) (Not
used)
133 Store for PC (SRVmode Scan → PC) (Not used)
134 Store for PC (SRVmode HDD → PC) (Not used)
135 Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)
136 Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)
137 Image edit count by SRV
138 Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)
139 Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
II ADJUSTMENT
140 Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)
141 Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)
142 Wide paper count (Others)
143 Punch
144 Z-Folding (Not used)
145 ADF original-thick
146 MixPlex (1 side)
147 MixPlex (2 side)
148 ADF original-thin
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
2-35

(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)

1 ACS
2 Full color
3 Monochrome
4 Mono color (Y)
5 Mono color (M)
6 Mono color (C)
7 Mono color (R)
8 Mono color (G)
II ADJUSTMENT
9 Mono color (B)

10 DF thick paper
11 DF thin paper
12 Original type: Printed paper
13 Original type: Photo paper
14 Original type: Copied paper
15 Original type: Inkjet paper
16 Original type: Pencil
17 Original type: Newspaper
18 Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone
19 Screen : Line screen/High resolution
20 Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone
21 Screen : Dot screen/High resolution
22 Screen : High compression
23 Gloss mode
24 Density shift
25 Background adjustment
26 Red adjust
27 Green adjust
28 Blue adjust
29 Hue adjustment
30 Saturation adjustment
31 Brightness adjustment
32 Color balance adjustment
33 Sharpness adjustment
34 Contrast adjustment
35 Image judge adjustment
36 Paper Type: Normal paper
37 Paper Type: Recycle paper
38 Paper Type: Color paper
39 Paper Type: High quality paper
40 Paper Type: Coated paper
41 Paper Type: Tab paper
42 Paper Type: Color specific paper
43 Paper Type: Exclusive paper A
44 Paper Type: Exclusive paper B
45 Paper Type: Exclusive paper C
2-36


46 Paper Type: Exclusive paper D
47 Paper Weight: 1
48 Paper Weight: 2
49 Paper Weight: 3
50 Paper Weight: 4
51 Paper Weight: 5
52 Paper Weight: 6
53 Multi page enlargement
54 Main Tray: Face up
II ADJUSTMENT
55 N of no toner stop occurred (Y)
56 N of no toner stop occurred (M)
57 N of no toner stop occurred (C)
58 N of no toner stop occurred (K)
59 N of toner recovery box is full
60 N of color regist. auto. adj. Counts 1 per every correction operation
61 N of auto stability control Counts 1 per every correction operation
62 —
63 —
64 —
65 OFF mode time Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)
66 ON time of heater (Main body) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)
67 ON time of heater (tray 4) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit:
minute)
68 Polygon motor operation time Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit:
minute)
69 Develop motor ope. time (color) Sum of the time the developing motor (color)
operates (unit: minute)
70 Develop motor ope. time (black) Sum of the time the developing motor (black)
operates (unit: minute)
71 ON time of PCL (color) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit:
minute)
72 ON time of PCL (black) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit:
minute)
73 Operation time in Scanner motor Sum of the time the scanner motor operates
(unit: minute)
74 Time while power (ADF) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF
(unit: minute)
75
76
77
78
79
80
2-37

(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/ NO SC code Section

No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count 44 SC29-06 Process abnormality
NO SC code Section 45 SC29-07
1 SC10-10 Communication abnormality 46 SC29-08
2 SC13-01 Paper feed motor abnormality 47 SC29-09
3 SC13-02 48 SC29-10
4 SC18-01 Paper feed tray abnormality 49 SC29-11
5 SC18-02 50 SC29-12
6 SC18-03 51 SC29-13
7 SC18-04 52 SC29-14
II ADJUSTMENT
8 SC18-50 LT abnormality 53 SC29-15

9 SC18-51 54 SC29-16
10 SC18-60 55 SC29-17
11 SC18-61 56 SC29-18
12 SC18-70 57 SC29-19
13 SC18-71 58 SC29-20
15 SC20-11 60 SC29-22
16 SC20-12 61 SC29-23
17 SC21-01 PCL abnormality 62 SC30-01
18 SC21-02 63 SC30-02
19 SC21-03 64 SC30-10 Communication abnormality
20 SC21-04 65 SC32-01 Fan abnormality
21 SC23-01 Developing motor abnormality 66 SC32-02
22 SC23-02 67 SC32-03
23 SC23-03 68 SC32-04
24 SC23-04 69 SC32-05
25 SC23-05 Drum motor 70 SC32-06
abnormality 71 SC33-01 Motor
26 SC23-06
abnormality
27 SC23-07 72 SC33-02
28 SC23-08 73 SC33-03
29 SC23-09 Transfer belt 74 SC33-04
section abnormality 75 SC34-01 High fixing temperature abnor-
30 SC23-10
mality
31 SC23-11 Toner supply abnormality 76 SC34-02
32 SC27-01 L-detection abnormality 77 SC34-03
33 SC27-02 L-detection abnormality 78 SC34-04
34 SC27-03 79 SC34-05
35 SC27-04 80 SC34-06
36 SC28-01 High voltage abnormality 81 SC34-07
37 SC28-02 82 SC34-08
38 SC28-03 83 SC35-01 Low fixing temperature abnor-
mality
39 SC28-04 84 SC35-02
40 SC29-01 85 SC35-03
41 SC29-02 86 SC35-04
42 SC29-03 87 SC35-05
43 SC29-04 88 SC35-06
2-38

NO SC code Section NO SC code Section

89 SC36-02 Fixing sensor abnormality 115 SC45-01 Color registration abnormality
90 SC36-04 116 SC45-03
91 SC36-05 117 SC45-07
92 SC36-06 118 SC45-08
93 SC36-07 119 SC45-09
94 SC36-08 120 SC45-10
95 SC36-09 121 SC45-11
96 SC36-10 122 SC45-12
97 SC36-11 123 SC45-20
II ADJUSTMENT
98 SC36-12 124 SC46-01 Image
99 SC38-02 125 SC46-02 processing abnormality
100 SC38-03 126 SC46-03

101 SC39-01 127 SC46-05
102 SC41-01 Scanner abnormality 128 SC46-06
103 SC41-02 Write 129 SC46-07
104 SC41-03 abnormality 130 SC46-08
105 SC41-04 131 SC46-09
106 SC41-05 132 SC46-11
107 SC41-06 Scanner abnormality 133 SC46-12
108 SC41-07 Write 134 SC46-13
abnormality
109 SC41-08 135 SC46-14
110 SC41-09 136 SC46-15
111 SC41-10 137 SC46-16
112 SC41-11 138 SC46-17
113 SC42-01 Fan abnormality 139 SC46-18
114 SC42-02 140 SC46-19
141 SC46-21
142 SC46-23
143 SC46-24
144 SC46-25
145 SC46-26
146 SC46-31
147 SC46-32
148 SC46-35
149 SC46-40
150 SC46-41
151 SC46-42
152 SC46-43
153 SC46-58
154 SC46-59
155 SC46-62
156 SC46-63
157 SC46-64
158 SC46-66
2-39

NO SC code Section NO SC code Section

159 SC46-80 Image 197 SC77-02 FNS abnormality
processing abnormality
160 SC46-81 198 SC77-03
161 SC46-82 199 SC77-04
162 SC46-83 200 SC77-05
163 SC46-90 201 SC77-06
164 SC46-91 202 SC77-07
165 SC46-98 203 SC77-08
166 SC46-99 204 SC77-11
II ADJUSTMENT
168 SC49-01 206 SC77-13

169 SC49-02 207 SC77-14
170 SC50-01 208 SC77-21
171 SC50-02 209 SC77-22
172 SC50-03 210 SC77-25
173 SC50-04 211 SC77-26
174 SC50-05 212 SC77-31 TU abnormality
175 SC50-10 213 SC77-32
176 SC50-11 214 SC77-33
177 SC52-01 Fan abnormality 215 SC77-34
178 SC52-02 216 SC77-35
179 SC52-03 217 SC77-36
180 SC56-02 Operation board abnormality 218 SC37-37
181 SC56-11 219 SC77-41 PI abnormality
182 SC56-12 220 SC77-42
183 SC56-13 221 SC77-43
184 SC60-01 DF abnormality 222 SC77-44 PK abnormality
185 SC61-01 223 SC77-45 Not used
186 SC61-02 224 SC77-46
187 SC61-03 225 SC77-47 PK abnormality
188 SC61-04 226 SC77-52 Not used
189 SC61-05 227 SC77-53
190 SC61-06 228 SC77-54 PK abnormality
191 SC61-07 229 SC77-55 Not used
192 SC61-08 230 SC77-56
193 SC61-09 231 SC77-57
194 SC61-10 232 SC77-81 FNS abnormality
195 SC70-01 233 SC77-91
196 SC77-01 234 SC77-92
235 SC77-98
236 SC77-99
237 SC80-01 Communication abnormality
238 SC80-02
239 SC80-03
240 SC80-11 ISW abnormality
241 SC80-21
242 SC80-30
2-40

NO SC code Section
243 SC80-31
244 SC80-32
245 SC80-40 Main body abnormality
246 SC89-01
247 SC89-02
248 SC89-03
249 SC89-04
250 —
251 —
II ADJUSTMENT
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
2-41

6.7 Parts counter 6.7.1 Count of special parts
The following are conducted with respect to each When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset
replacement part: display of copy count used, reset- the counter of the part that has been replaced.
ting of count, setting of limit value, and new registra- Display the name, part number and the copy count
tion of replacement parts. of a replacement part that has been registered, and
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced reset the count.
includes the following:
• Count of special parts A. Procedure
• Count of each parts
II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"

Press the [1. Count of special parts] key.
4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen"

Press the arrow key to select a part that you
want to reset.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the part
count. The part count is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter
menu screen" with the part count not reset.
2-42

B. Count of special parts list
NO Parts name Count conditions

1 Toner collection box *1
2 Ozone filter /1 (Right side)
3 Deodorant filter (Rear side)
4 Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side)
5 Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side)
6 Charging dust proof filter
7 Drum cartridge /Y *2
8 Drum /Y
II ADJUSTMENT
9 Drum cleaning blade /Y
10 Lubricant applying unit /Y
11 —
12 Drum cartridge /M
13 Drum /M
14 Drum cleaning blade /M
15 Lubricant applying unit /M
16 —
17 Drum cartridge /C *2
18 Drum /C
19 Drum cleaning blade /C
20 Lubricant applying unit /C
21 —
22 Drum cartridge /K *1
23 Drum /K
24 Drum cleaning blade /K
25 Lubricant applying unit /K
26 —
27 Charging corona /Y *2
28 Charging wire assy /Y
29 Charging grid plate /Y
30 Charging corona /M
31 Charging wire assy /M
32 Charging grid plate /M
33 Charging corona /C
34 Charging wire assy /C
35 Charging grid plate /C
36 Charging corona /K *1
37 Charging wire assy /K
38 Charging grid plate /K
39 Transfer belt unit
40 Transfer belt
41 1st transfer roller /Y *2
42 1st transfer roller /M
43 1st transfer roller /C
2-43


44 1st transfer roller /K *1
45 2nd transfer roller /U
46 Transfer belt separation claw
47 Transfer belt cleaning unit
48 Belt cleaning brush unit
49 Toner collection sheet /1
50 Belt cleaning blade
51 2nd transfer roller /L
52 Separation discharging unit
II ADJUSTMENT
53 Fixing cleaning unit

54 Fixing roller /U
55 Fixing roller /L
56 Developer /Y (Page) *2
57 Developer /Y (Page)
58 Developer /C (Page)
59 Developer /K (Page) *1
60 Developing unit /Y *2
61 Developing unit /M
62 Developing unit /C
63 Developing unit /K *1
64 Developer /Y (Distance) Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
65 Developer /M (Distance)
66 Developer /C (Distance)
67 Developer /K (Distance)
68 — —
69 FNS tray up/down motor 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit
1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode
70 FNS stapler /F 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-
staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
71 FNS stapler /R 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-
staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
72 FNS shift motor 1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the
sort mode
73 FNS exit opening motor 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or
larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit
1 count for starting each of the stitch-and-fold and folding jobs
74 FNS folding knife motor 1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and
folding and the three-folding modes
75 By-pass gate solenoid 1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple
mode
76 Tri-folding gate SD 1 count for each copy exit in the three-folding mode
77 Pl conveyance clutch /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
78 Pl feed roller /A /U
79 Pl feed roller /B /U
80 Pl reverse roller /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
81 Pl torque limiter /U
2-44


82 Pl conveyance clutch /L 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand
83 Pl feed roller /A /L
84 Pl feed roller /B /L
85 Pl reverse roller /L
86 Pl torque limiter /L
87 Trimmer blade 1 count for each cutter operation
88 PK punching unit (2 hole) 1 count for each punch operation
89 PK punching unit (3 hole)
90 PK punching unit (4 hole)
II ADJUSTMENT
91 — —
92 ADF paper feed roller Original passage count in all modes
93 ADF feed roller
94 —
95 ADF feed prevention roller Original passage count in all modes
96 ADF exit solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy
mode and the mixing original mode
97 ADF Dfeed clutch Single side copy mode: 1 count for each original
Double side copy mode: 3 counts for each original
98 ADF reversal solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy
mode and the mixing original mode
99 — —
100 Exposure ON time Accumulation of on-time (in : minute
101 Sub power switch 1 count each time the main switch turns off the power
102 Door SW 1 count each time the front door is opened
103 Toner supply door switch 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened
104 Main power SW 1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power
105 Pl regist clutch 1 count each time PI feeds a sheet
106 Punch motor 1 count for each punch operation
107 — —
108 Paper exit roller /A 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit
109 Intermediate conveyance roller 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitch-
110 Stacking assist roller and-fold, folding and three-folding modes
111 — —
112 Fixing torque limiter *1
113 Registration cleaning sheet 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
2 counts in the double side copy mode
114 Ball bearing /U *1
115 Heat insulating sleeve /U
116 Intermediate convery. clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
117 Intermediate convery. clutch /2
118 Intermediate convery. clutch /3
119 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
122 Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-
pass tray
2-45


123 Registration roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
124 Separation claw solenoid
125 Fixing upper lamp /1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
126 Fixing upper lamp /2 *1
127 Fixing lower lamp
128 Fixing temp. sensor /3
129 Fixing temp. sensor /4
130 Paper feed roller (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
131 Paper feed roller (Tray-2) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2
II ADJUSTMENT
132 Paper feed roller ((Tray-3) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3
133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-
pass tray
134 ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no
count is made in the single side copy mode)
135 ADU conveyance clutch /2
136 ADU pre-registration clutch
137 Ball bearing /L *1
138 Heat insulating sleeve /L
139 Fixing drive gear
140 Decurler roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
141 LCT paper feed roller 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT
142 LCT feed/Dfeed roller
143 LCT feed clutch
144 LCT pre-registration clutch
145 Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
146 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1)
151 Paper feed clutch (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-
pass tray
152 Transfer earth plate unit 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
153 Center fixing temp. sensor/U *1
154 Center fixing temp. sensor/L
*1 Count in all color modes *2 Count only in full color or single color mode
25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit
in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in
the double side copy mode the double side copy mode
= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in
the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the
double side copy mode double side copy mode
2-46

6.7.2 Count of each parts B. Resetting of each replacement part

(1) Procedure
This is used when you want to control the part
counter. 1. Enter the 25 mode.
Set the part name, part number and the limit value,
and display and reset the copy count. 2. "25 mode menu screen"
Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
count is taken for each passage of paper, regard-

less of the paper size. Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
Reference:
II ADJUSTMENT
4. "Count of each part screen"
• When the copy count is in excess of a limit
Press the arrow key to select a number you
value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No.
want to set or change.
A. Setting of each replacement part and dis- 5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
play of the copy count
(1) Procedure 6. "Parts count reset screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting a part
1. Enter the 25 mode. count. This resets the part counter.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of
each part" with the part count not reset.
Press the [5. Parts counter] key.

Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Copy count of each part screen"

Press the arrow key to select a number you
want to set or change.
5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N

setting] and [Limit setting] key.
6. Press an item you want to set or change out of

the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and
[Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alpha-
numeric keys.
• [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits
in alphanumeric)
• [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in
alphanumeric)
• [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric)
7. Press the [OK] key to update the data.

changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
2-47

6.8 Password setting 6.9 Telephone number setting

Set the following passwords. Set the customer support center telephone and
• Key operator password (4 digits): Password used FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a
to enter the key operator mode. service call and shown on the basic screen for help.
• EKC master key code (8 digits): Password
required when entering various EKC setting
modes. A. Procedure
• Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password
required when entering various weekly timer set- 1. Enter the 25 mode.
ting modes.
Note: 2. "25 mode menu screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
•A password can be set only when the setting Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key.
for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in
3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"
the key operator mode.
Press either of the [Service centre Telephone
number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX
A. Procedure
number (16)] keys that you want to set.
4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the
2. "25 mode menu screen" numeric keys.
Press the [6. Password setting] key.
3. "Password setting mode screen" To invalidate the setting that you have
Press the key of an item you want to set. changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
• Key operator password (4 digits)
• EKC master key code (8 digits)
• Weekly timer password (4 digits) Note:
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure
4. Enter a new password through the numeric
keys. to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.

Note:
• Setting "0000" for the key operator password
and the weekly timer password allows you to
use each mode with no password.
2-48

6.10 M/C serial number setting 6.11 Indication of ROM version

Display and set the serial numbers of the main body Display the ROM version of the main body and
and options. options.
A. Procedure A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode. 1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen" 2. "25 mode menu screen"

Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key. Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Serial number setting mode screen" 3. "Indication of ROM version screen"
Press the key of an item you want to set and Each ROM version is displayed.
enter a serial number through the alphanu-
meric keys. 4. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
5. To invalidate the setting that you have

6.12 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
Note:
• The serial number of the main body cannot be
changed.
2-49

6.13 Setting date input 6.14 Board change mode

Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis- When changing any of the following four types of
played on the LCD in the P function. boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main
body in this setting.
A. Procedure • OPERATION (operation board /1)
• OVERALL CB (overall control board)
1. Enter the 25 mode. • NVRAM (memory board)
• PRINTER (printer control board)
Note:
Press the [12.Setting date input] key.
• The number of boards that can be replaced at
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Setting date input screen" the same time is restricted only to two boards.
Enter an installation date through the numeric
keys. A. Procedure
4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 1. Enter the 25 mode.
5. To invalidate the setting that you have 2. "25 mode menu screen"
changed, press the [CANCEL] key. Press the [13. Board change mode] key.
3. "Board change mode screen"

Select a key of the board that you have
replaced a part.
4. "Serial number input screen"

Enter the serial number of the main body
through the alphanumeric keys.

2-50

7. 36 MODE
7.1 Setting method 7.2 Process adjustment
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make Make various adjustments around the process.
various adjustment in this mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF
the main switch (SW2).
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric
buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36 3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen"
For the process adjustment, there are the fol-
mode menu screen" is shown.
lowing items provided:
At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode
[1. High voltage adjustment]
with the normal copy operation unavailable.
[2. Drum peculiarity adjustment]
3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display [3. Sensor output adjustment]
(LCD) to show a setting screen of each item. [4. Exclusive paper setting]
[5. Recall standard data]
4. Confirm the details of input in the setting
screen of each item. 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
from each of the adjustment screen to the
6. New data will be effective after restarting. "Process adjustment menu screen."
2-51

7.2.1 High voltage adjustment (1) Blade setting mode

Perform this adjustment when changing the belt
For the high voltage adjustment, the following items
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode,
are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a
apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the
high voltage adjustment in the field. belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of
[1. 1st transfer manual adj.]
the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
[2. 2nd transfer manual adj.]
[3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)]
a. Procedure
[4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)]
[5. Pre-transfer guide HV check] 1. Enter the 36 mode.
II ADJUSTMENT

7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"
Conduct the blade setting, charging potential cor-
rection, gamma, developer charge, L-detection Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
adjustment and the initial drum rotation.

4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press [1. Blade setting mode] key.
A. Procedure
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
1. Enter the 36 mode. Press the [Start] key. This process completes
2. "36 mode menu screen" in about 15 seconds and complete message is
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. shown on the screen.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen" 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
screen."
For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the follow-
ing items are provided:
[1. Blade setting mode]
[2. Automatic drum potential adj.]
[3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
[4. LD bias adjustment]
[5. Automatic developer charge]
[6. L-detect initial auto. adj.]
[7. Initial drum rotation]
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.

from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.
2-52

(2) Automatic drum potential adjustment (3) Automatic gamma adjustment

Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y, The gamma adjustment is performed automatically.
M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
bias value and the charging voltage. mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
This adjustment is not necessary because of the
automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjust- a. Procedure
ment.
a. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" 3. "Process adjustment menu screen"

Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
key.
Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment] 5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen"
There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0
key.
to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjust-
5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen" ment 0" in the field.
Press the [Start] key. This process completes "Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the
in about 20 seconds and the charging potential Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjust-
is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 ment, automatic drum potential adjustment,
speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, and the gamma adjustment. The developing
C and K) on the screen, with an exit message bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1
shown. speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete mes-
sage.
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
screen." in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias
value is displayed for each line speed (1/1
speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a com-
plete message.

screen."
2-53

(4) LD bias adjustment

6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen"
Perform this adjustment when replacing the write
For the LD bias adjustment, the following items
unit.
are provided. Press the arrow key to select the
Note: color of the write unit you just replaced.
• Do not perform this adjustment except when • "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)"
• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)"
replacing the write unit.
• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)"
• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)"
a. Procedure • "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)"
• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)"
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code • "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)"
II ADJUSTMENT
labeled [1] on the replacing write unit. • "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)"
• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)"
• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)"
7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code

labeled on the replacing write unit through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
Note:
• Be sure to enter the same numeric value in
LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.

[1] 8050fs1025 to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."



Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
2-54

(5) Automatic developer charge

3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the
In this mode, after discharging developer from the
shoulder screws [1] provided above the devel-
developing unit manually, a new developer is auto-
oping unit of a color the developer of which is
matically charged.
changed.
Note:
• Do not open the upper cover of the develop-
ing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit caus- [2]
ing image failure.
II ADJUSTMENT
a. Procedure
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section.

developer charging plate [3] provided inside
the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws
[4] and then remove the developer charging
funnel /L [5].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3] [5] 8050fs1002

[1]
8050fs1003
2-55

4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the 7. "36 mode menu screen"
developer charging plate [1]. Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
Note:
• Be sure to attach the tip of the developer
charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner
supply opening [3].
Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1]
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen"
Press the arrow key to select the color of
II ADJUSTMENT
developer you want to charge.

For the automatic developer charge, the follow-
ing items are provided:
• Automatic developer charge Y
• Automatic developer charge M
• Automatic developer charge C
• Automatic developer charge K
11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new devel-

oper into the developer charging funnel /U.
12. Make sure that the developer has been

[3] [2] 8050fs1004
charged successfully before pressing the
[CANCEL] key.
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] pack-
aged together with developer to the developer 13. When charging another developer, repeat
charging funnel /L [1]. steps 3 to 11.
Note:
• The developer charge funnel /U [2] is pack-
aged together with each developer. So, be
screen."
sure to avoid its reuse.
15. Return the installed parts back to their original
positions.
Note:
• After completion of this adjustment, be sure
to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjust-
ment. If printing is started without perform-
ing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a
proper image density cannot be obtained,
thus resulting in the change of developer
again.
[1] [2] 8050fs1005
2-56

(6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment (7) Initial drum rotation

Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to con-
developer is charged. duct this operation to securely set the drum cou-
pling.
Note:
• Do not print without conducting the L-detect
a. Procedure
initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper
image density cannot be obtained, thus 1. Enter the 36 mode.
resulting in the change of developer again.
II ADJUSTMENT
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen"

Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key.
Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 5. "Initial drum rotation screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" in about 10 seconds and complete message is
Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment] shown on the screen.
key.
5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen" to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
Press the arrow key to select the color of a screen."
developer that has been newly charged, and
then press the [Start] key.
For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following
items are provided:
• L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors
of Y, M,C and K.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M
and C only.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only.
• L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only.
6. A message "Completed" is displayed.

screen."
2-57

7.2.3 Sensor output check

5. For setting, press the key of an item you want
For the sensor output check, the following items are to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for
provided; however, do not conduct them in the field: each exclusive paper A to D.
[1. Surface potential sensor output] • 2nd transfer offset Side 1
• 2nd transfer offset Side 2
[2. Max. density sensor output]
• 2nd separation AC offset Side 1
[3. Gamma sensor output] • 2nd separation AC offset Side 2
• 2nd separation DC offset Side 1
• 2nd separation DC offset Side 2
• Fixing (U) roller temp (idle)
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
• Fixing (U) roller temp (print)
II ADJUSTMENT
• Fixing (L) roller temp (idle)

This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the
• Fixing (L) roller temp (print)
satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing • Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference
with the standard setting due to a special paper • Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
being used. <261mm
• Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A
>=261mm
to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper • Line speed
type/ Special paper size set].
In default, the following paper data is entered for 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
each destination area. to the "User paper setting menu screen."
2
• For Japan: 80 g/m color specified paper
• For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper
• For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper
Note:
• When setting data, be sure to follow the
instructions given by Minolta Technology
Support Center.
A. Procedure


Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key.
4. "User paper setting menu screen"

For the user paper setting menu, the following
items are provided which correspond to the
setting key of the same name in the key opera-
tor mode.
[1. Exclusive paper A setting]
[2. Exclusive paper B setting]
[3. Exclusive paper C setting]
[4. Exclusive paper D setting]
2-58

7.2.5 Recall standard data
Reset the adjusted set values of process adjust-

ment to the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
• Data for automatic drum potential, automatic
gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive
paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to
the standard data.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure


Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment

screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PRE-
VIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
2-59

7.3 Image adjustment 7.3.1 Magnification adjustment
Conduct various image adjustments. Adjust various magnifications.

Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" 3. "Image adjustment menu screen"

For the image adjustment, the following items Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
are provided:
[1. Magnification adjustment] 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
[2. Timing adjustment] For the magnification adjustment, the following

items are provided:
[3. RADF adjustment]
[1. Printer vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Centring adjustment]
[5. Non-image area erase check] [2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.]
[6. Recall standard data] [3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.]

[4. Belt line speed adjustment]
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. [5. Fixing line speed adjustment]
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
"Image adjustment menu screen."
"Magnification adjustment menu screen."
2-60

(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment

6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
tem.
This adjustment changes the line speed of the reg- 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale.
istration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing. • Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator Within ± 1mm against 205.7 mm
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
II ADJUSTMENT
ment, the following two methods are available. 205.7 1
Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
made.
8050fs1006
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to the wear of the regis- 8. When the value is not within the standard,
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of press the C button while pressing the P button.
paper.
9. "Printer vertical magnification adjustment
(2) Belt line speed adjustment
screen"
For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the
been changed due to causes other than
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
the above.
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT]
• In default, the printer vertical magnification
key to select an item you want to adjust.
adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the
image. When adjusting the vertical magnifica- • "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and
tion on side 2, use the memory switch in the side 2 are adjusted at the same time.
key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01%
clock adjustment mode. However, since the • "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment
Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
line speed is switched for each image creation
• "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment
process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
is reduced to about 1/4. • "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment
a. Procedure • "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2
adjustment
1. Enter the 36 mode. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment
2. "36 mode menu screen" Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" keys and press the [SET] key.
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" can be obtained.
Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key.
5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen" to the "Magnification adjustment menu
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. screen."
2-61

(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer
screen"
system.
For the printer horizontal magnification adjust-
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnifica-
ment, the following items are provided. Press
tion in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
a. Procedure
• "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment":
Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same
II ADJUSTMENT
time.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" • "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
• "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2
Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification
adjustment
adjustment] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
• "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment
5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
keys and press the [SET] key.
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a
scale. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) to the "Magnification adjustment menu
Within ± 1 mm against 190 mm screen."
190 8050fs1007
8. When the value is not within the standard,

press the C button while pressing the P button.
2-62

(3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment

8. When the value is not within to the standard,
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner sys-
tem.
This adjustment changes the scan speed. 9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator Enter a numeric value through the numeric
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05%
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. can be obtained.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"

Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key.
5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"

Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a

scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
Within ± 1 mm against 200 mm
200 8050fs1008
2-63


Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
tem.
This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
belt. scale.
• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
Note: Within ± 1 mm against 205.7 mm
• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
ment, the following two methods are available.
Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
II ADJUSTMENT
made.
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment 205.7 1

been changed due to the wear of the regis-
8050fs1006
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of
paper.
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C
button while pressing the P button.
been changed due to causes other than 9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
the above. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
a. Procedure • Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%
1. Enter the 36 mode. 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained.
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."

Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.
5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"

2-64

(5) Fixing line speed adjustment

7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches
When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer
(upper and lower limit samples of density that
belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing
are packed with the "paper for fixing speed
roller line speed.
adjustment") with the cyan density of the out-
When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer
putted paper, and check to see if the cyan den-
belt, this results in an increased vertical magnifica-
sity of the output paper is within the limit of the
tion or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line
fixing density standard patches.
speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in
the trailing edge of the image will be soiled. 8. When it is not within the limit, press the C but-
ton while pressing the P button.
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper 9. "Set the cyan density screen"
for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*). Enter a numeric value through the numeric
Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be keys and press the [SET] key.
accurately adjusted. • Setting range: 0 to 255
a. Procedure 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside

the limit.
11. "Set the cyan density screen"
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen"
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.
13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" set to the by-pass tray, press the START button
Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key. to output a test pattern.
5. "Set the cyan density screen"

Note:
Press the [DENSITY] key.
• Be sure to conduct this operation with the
6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the by- copy count set to 1.
pass tray, press the START button to output a
14. With the image formation line speed variable
test pattern.
automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds,
Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is
8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan half-
output.
tone are output.
Note: 15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on

• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper the output sheets in order of the paper exit
for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it (bottom to top).
cannot be accurately adjusted.
2-65

7.3.2 Timing adjustment

16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet
with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an Adjust various timings.
output sheet in which the distance between the
magenta line at the lead edge and the first A. Procedure
black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals
of 1 mm) gets 1 mm stretched. 1. Enter the 36 mode.

II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"

For the timing adjustment, the following items
are provided:
8050fs1009
[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.]
[2. Printer registration loop adj.]
Note: [3. Printer pre-registration adj.]
• The image does not stretch gradually for [4. Printer erasure amount adj.]
each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.]
certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure [6. RADF registration loop adj.]
each sheet in order of output. [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.]
[8. Auto. color registration adj.]
17. Press the C button while pressing the P button. [9. Color registration manual adj.]
18. "Set the cyan density screen" 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
Enter the number of the output sheet that
stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
press the [SET] key. from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Timing adjustment menu screen."
to the "Magnification adjustment menu
screen."
2-66

(1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment

Note:
Adjust the lead edge timing.
• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
This adjustment changes the paper restart timing
paper feed direction
from the registration roller.
• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
Note:
• Be sure the printer vertical magnification has
been adjusted.
II ADJUSTMENT
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
a. Procedure
8. Set the copy setting according to the item
1. Enter the 36 mode. adjusted and press the START button to output
a test pattern (No. 16).
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale.
• Standard value: 20 mm ± 0.5 mm
20
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"

For the printer lead edge timing adjustment,
the following items are provided. Press the
8050fs1010
[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
• "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)"
• "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)"
• "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)" 11. "Printer lead edge timing screen"
• "Lead edge timing (Bypass)" Enter a numeric value through the numeric
• "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)" keys and press the [SET] key.
• "Lead edge timing (ADU)" • Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1 mm
• "Tray large size normal paper offset"
• "Tray large size thick paper offset"
12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
• "Tray small size normal paper offset"
• "Tray small size thick paper offset" obtained.
• "Bypass large size normal paper offset"
• "Bypass large size thick paper offset" 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
• "Bypass small size normal paper offset" to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
• "Bypass small size thick paper offset"
• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
• "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"
• "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
2-67

(2) Printer registration loop adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration
roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or
paper jamming in the registration section. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. 8. Set the copy according to the item that has
been adjusted and press the START button to
a. Procedure output a test pattern (No. 16).
1. Enter the 36 mode. 9. If the printer registration loop amount is not

appropriate, press the C button while pressing
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" the P button.

10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm
Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key. 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen
(Tray 1)" 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
For the printer registration loop adjustment, the to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
MENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass L)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass S)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)"
• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"
Note:
• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
2-68

(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the
obtained.
ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper
skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-reg- 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
istration section. to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment

a. Procedure
Conduct an erasure amount adjustment.
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 36 mode. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. a. Procedure
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" 1. Enter the 36 mode.

4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.
5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST- Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key.
5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"
adjust.
• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)"
• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)" START button with a test chart set to the origi-
• "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)" nal glass.
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric 7. Check the printer erasure amount.
keys and press the [SET] key. • Standard value: 3mm or less
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard,
START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not keys and press the [SET] key.
appropriate, press the C button while pressing • Setting range: -20 to +40, 1 step = 0.1 mm
the P button.
10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen" obtained.
keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
• Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-69

(5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment (6) RADF registration loop adjustment
Adjust re-start timing of original scanning. Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF regis-
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading tration roller section to remove paper skew and
while in the original scanning mode is adjusted. wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration sec-
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator tion.
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
Note:
• Make sure that the printer timing adjustment a. Procedure
has been completed.
II ADJUSTMENT

a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
2. "36 mode menu screen" 3. "Image adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" 5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. ton with a test chart set to the original glass.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the 7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not
START button with a test chart set to the origi- appropriate, press the C button while pressing
nal glass. the P button.
7. Check the scanner re-start timing. 8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
• Standard value: 3mm or less Enter a numeric value through the numeric
8. When the value is not within the standard, • Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5mm
9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"
obtained.
keys and press the [SET] key. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
• Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1mm to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."

obtained.

to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-70

(7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment registration auto correction in the user mode.
Store a skew correction position data along the So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a
main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in SC45-20 occurs.
the memory board (MB).
The data is updated automatically by the auto. color a. Procedure
registration adjustment.
Note:
• When any of the write units Y, M and C is
replaced, be sure to start the main body in the Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
36 mode for this adjustment.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key.
2. "36 mode menu screen" 5. "Color registration adj. screen"

Press the [Start] key.

6. The color registration adjustment starts and a
message "Complete" is shown in about 2 min-
utes.
When the error message appears, perform an
Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key.
error correction referring to the below.
5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen" • Error 1: It does not converge within the stan-
Press the [Start] key. dard value.
The patch density may be too light.
6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M Check around the drum unit and per-
form the gamma automatic adjustment
and C at the same time, and a message "Com-
(0). Then perform this adjustment.
plete" is shown in about a minute. • Error 2: The difference of the color registration
is too much.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return • Error 3: The other error
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen." SC other than the color registration
automatic adjustment may occur.
Restart the main body in the normal
mode to check for SC code.
(8) Auto. color registration adjustment
Make this adjustment when there is a color registra- 7. "Color registration adj. screen"
tion error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan,
magnification and the skew of color registration sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the
error are automatically adjusted. skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator adjustment are shown.
Note: to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
• This auto. color registration adjustment has a
larger correction area than that of the color
2-71

(9) Color registration manual adjustment (par-

tial horizontal adjustment)
START button to output a test pattern.
With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal
Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely
magnification, partial horizontal magnification, sub-
against the original positioning plate /L [2] and
scan, inclination and the scan inclination, the regis-
the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to
tration error amount of Y, M and C compared based
the original glass, and close the DF or platen
on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial
cover.
horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected
automatically is manually adjusted. Note:
• When setting the test pattern to the original
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
glass, be sure to take check of the setting
• Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal
direction and position.
magnifications have been complete.
• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C,
• Make sure that the auto. color registration
K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36
adjustment has been completed.
mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an
error.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. [3]

[2]


Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.]
key.
5. "Color registration manual adj. screen"

[1] 8050fs1011
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Color registration manual adj. screen"

Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.
9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main

scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnifica-
tion), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnifi-
cation), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline"
(inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline)
of Y, M and C are compared based on K and
result are shown at "Rest" section on the oper-
ation panel (unit is pixel).
2-72

10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the 11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
items. "Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner
When any item is not within the standard, an supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] pro-
error code is displayed for each cause together vided near the developing unit of a color from
with an NG. Make an error correction referring which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the
to the below: adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the
When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", partial horizontal magnification. Moving the
"Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial
the auto. color registration adjustment again. horizontal magnification data (minus) and mov-
II ADJUSTMENT
• Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected. ing the plate downward increases it (plus).
Improper positioning of the chart. • Adjustment target
• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the
upside down.
"Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal mag-
Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. nification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operation
A different type of chart. panel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2]
• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
Software bugged.
• Error 5: Not within the standard value.
Re-adjust it.
• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
Check the installation of memory
board.
• Error 7: Memory other than those specified is
accessed.
Software bugged.
• Error 8: Memory related error.
Software bugged.
• Error 9: Program error.
Software bugged.
• Error 10: The chart is skew.
[2]
• Error 11: Image header information read error.
Software bugged.
• Error 12: An argument set error.
Software bugged.
• Error 13: A measurement error.
Improper positioning of the chart, or a
defective chart.
[1] 8050fs1012

to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
13. Conduct the color registration adjustment

referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjust-
ment.
14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.

to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-73

7.3.3 RADF adjustment

5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x
Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop 11) screen"
position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
the RADF. (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
press the [Start] key.
A. Procedure
6. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"
1. Enter the 36 mode. press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
2. "36 mode menu screen" 7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 8.5R) screen"

With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" 8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. press the [Start] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" 8. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"

For the RADF adjustment, the following items press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
are provided:
[1. RADF original size adjustment] 9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x
[2. RADF orig. stop position adj.] 11R) screen"
[3. RADF sensor adjustment] With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. press the [Start] key.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 10. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"
from each of the adjustment screens to the press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
"RADF adjustment menu screen."
11. Make sure that the RADF original size is prop-
erly detected.
(1) RADF original size adjustment
12. Press the C button while pressing P button.
Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original
size is not properly detected. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
a. Procedure


Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment]
key.
2-74

(2) RADF original stop position adjustment

Conduct the original stop position leading edge tim-
can be obtained.
ing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF.
Note:
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
• Make sure that the printer lead edge timing
adjustment and the scanner re-start timing
adjustment have been completed.
(3) RADF sensor adjustment
a. Procedure Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs
II ADJUSTMENT
in the reflective type sensors.
a. Procedure
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" 2. "36 mode menu screen"

Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key. Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen" 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"

For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the fol- Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key.
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST- 5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen"
MENT] key to select an item you want to Close the RADF and press the [Start] key.
adjust. The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are auto-
[Normal & Thick paper (Front side)] matically adjusted.
[Thin paper (Front side)]
[Normal & Thick paper (Back side)] 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
[Thin paper (Back side)] to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
7. With the original setting set to the copy mode

according to an item you want to adjust, set the
test chart to the RADF. And select the A3
paper and press the START button.
8. Check the RADF leading edge timing.

• Standard value: 3 mm or less


2-75

7.3.4 Centring adjustment

4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"
Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key.
paper feed direction.
5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer centering adjustment, the fol-
A. Procedure
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
1. Enter the 36 mode. ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
2. "36 mode menu screen" adjust.
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. • "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)"
II ADJUSTMENT
• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)"

3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" • "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)"
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. • "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)"
• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)"
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" • "Printer centring adj. (ADU)"
• "Large size offset (Tray 1)"
For the centering adjustment, the following
• "Small size offset (Tray 1)"
items are provided: • "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)"
[1. Printer centring adjustment] • "Large size offset (Tray 2)"
[2. Scanner centring adjustment] • "Small size offset (Tray 2)"
• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)"
[3. RADF centring adjustment]
• "Large size offset (Tray 3)"
• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)"
• "Large size offset (Bypass)"
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return • "Small size offset (Bypass)"
from each of the adjustment screens to the • "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"
"Centring adjustment mode menu screen." • "Large size offset (Tray 4)"
• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
(1) Printer centring adjustment • "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim- • "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
ing. • "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)"
• "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note:
• Large size: 300mm or more in length in the
Note: paper feed direction
• Be sure that the printer horizontal magnifica- • Small size: 300mm or less in length in the
tion has been completed. paper feed direction
• Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more
a. Procedure
7. Select the paper size and the type of paper
2. "36 mode menu screen" according to an item you want to adjust, and
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. press the START button to output a test pattern
(No. 16).
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
2-76

8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
direction and check the amount of error of the START button with a test chart set to the origi-
lines on both sides. nal glass.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
9. When the value is not within the standard, direction and check the amount of error of the
press the C button while pressing the P button. lines on both sides.
keys and press the [SET] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard,
II ADJUSTMENT
• Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.1mm press the C button while pressing the P button.
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
can be obtained. keys and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm
to the "Centring adjustment mode menu 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
screen." obtained.

to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
(2) Scanner centring adjustment
screen."
Adjust the centring when scanning the platen origi-
nal.
This adjustment changes the reading timing of the
CCD.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer centering adjust-
ment has been completed.
a. Procedure


Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment]
key.
5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen"

2-77

(3) RADF centring adjustment

Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF origi-
nal.
nal glass.
This adjustment changes the reading timing of the
CCD. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator direction and check the amount of error of the
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. lines on both sides.
Note:
• Make sure that the printer centering and scan- 8. When the value is not within the standard,
II ADJUSTMENT
ner centring adjustment has been completed. press the C button while pressing the P button.
a. Procedure 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric

1. Enter the 36 mode. • Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm
2. "36 mode menu screen" 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. obtained.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
screen."
4. "Centring adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.
5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"

For the RADF centering adjustment, the follow-
ing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
adjust.
• "RADF centring adjustment (Front)"
• "RADF centring adjustment (Back)"
2-78

7.3.5 Non-image area erase check B. Error message and Handling
When installing the copier or moving its installation If the error is detected while perform the "non-image
location, check to see if the "non-image area erase" area erase check" mode, following error message
function of the copy application functions works sat- will be displayed on the operation panel.
isfactorily.
Preparations made in advance: (1) Error message 1
• Open fully the RADF or platen cover. Adjust for Moderate Brightness.
• There should not be anything on the original The Non-image area erase function may not oper-
glass.
ate correctly with dark (density) originals.
• Clean the original glass.
II ADJUSTMENT
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
A. Procedure of Service manual.
1. Enter the 36 mode. Handling 1

When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, or when copy originals that
have a dark background are not copied very fre-
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" quently in the "non-image area erase," the copier
Press the [5. Non-image area erase check] can be used in the current installation location.
key. However, when copy originals that have a dark
background are frequently copied, install the copier
4. "Non-image area erase check screen" in a location or in a direction where less external
Press the [Start] key. light get in (darker) than the present installation
location, and check the "non-image area erase
5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment
check mode" again.
selected ..." is shown on the operation panel.
When a message "Does not function satisfac-
(2) Error message 2
torily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
and Handling," to conduct the non-image area
In many case, the non-image area erase function
erase check again.
will not operate correctly.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
to the "Image adjustment menu screen." of Service manual.
Handling 2
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, the copier can be used in the
current installation location. However, the outside-
original erasure function is frequently used, install
the copier in a location or in a direction where less
external light get in (darker) than the present instal-
lation location, and check the "non-image area
erase check mode" again. At this time, when there
is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light
installed directly above the copier, reconsider the
installation location or direction, or take some mea-
sures to shield the light source and check the "non-
image area erase check mode" again.
2-79

7.3.6 Recall standard data
Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to

the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
• Data for the printer vertical magnification,
RADF registration loop, auto. color registra-
tion, color registration manual, RADF original
size, RADF original stop position and RADF
II ADJUSTMENT
sensor adjustment cannot be reset to stan-

dard data.
A. Procedure


4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data)

screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
2-80

7.4 Image quality adjustment 7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments. Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usu-
A. Procedure ally conduct the printer gamma correction.
When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1),
original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this
2. "36 mode menu screen" adjustment.
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.

Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" • Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each
For the image quality adjustment, the following machine. Please be noted that the scanner
items are provided: gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if
[1. Scanner gamma adjustment] the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner
[2. Printer gamma adjustment] gamma adjustment screen" is pressed.
[3. Sharpness adjustment]
[4. Contrast adjustment] A. Procedure
[5. Image judge adjustment]
1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the
[6. ACS adjustment]
original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and
[7. Density adjustment]
[8. Tone adjustment] press the START button.
[9. Recall standard data]

2. Check for the foggy background or color bal-
ance.
3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode.
from each of the adjustment screen to the 4. "36 mode menu screen"
"Image quality mode menu screen."
5. "Image quality mode menu screen"

Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key.
6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen"

Press the [Adj. data reset] key.
Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scan-
ner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to
return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment
screen" without rewriting.

to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
2-81

7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment (1) Printer gamma offset adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduc-
When the color reproduction is in poor condition, tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation
conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. in a high light density section and adjust the density
in the background.
A. Procedure
Note:
1. Enter the 36 mode. • For the printer gamma offset adjustment,
adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for
2. "36 mode menu screen" each screen type. It is possible to divide the
II ADJUSTMENT
gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and

adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. section" to "5: High density section."
• In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low
4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the follow- density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to
ing items are provided: 1, adjustment can be made on the entire
[1. Printer gamma offset adj.] ranges of 0 to 5.
[2. Printer gamma sensor adj.]
[3. Printer screen gradation adj.] a. Procedure
5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 2. "36 mode menu screen"
from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
gamma adjustment menu screen."
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
2-82

5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen" 10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen"
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT adjust, enter a numeric value through the
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST- numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
MENT] key to select an item you want to • Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
adjust.
Note:
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)"
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)" • There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)" provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)" the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
II ADJUSTMENT
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)" by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)"
The following shows the copy mode to which keys [1/2] and [1/3].
each adjustment is reflected.

(LS200): Line screen/High resolution obtained.
(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution 12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1]
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray
(ED-8): Text section to be used together with balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
the screens above. the same.
(ED-2): High compression
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. Y

M
7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray C
K
and press the START button to print a test pat-
tern. [1]
[6]
8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted.
• Make sure that the high light density starting
section of C and K is uniform, and even
between the gray reference lines [1].
[5] [4] [2] [3] 8050fs1016
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. When they are not even, press the C button

while pressing the P button.
2-83

(2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment

13. When the gray balance is not the same, press
When a poor color reproduction results even after
the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust,
the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this
enter a numeric value through the numeric
adjustment to correct gradation.
The printer gamma correction that is carried out
• Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
automatically and periodically uses a gamma sen-
Note: sor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is
• There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accu-
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use rately adjusted due to the change in characteristic
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the
II ADJUSTMENT
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate
keys [1/2] and [1/3]. printer gamma adjustment.
• How to match the gray balance mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of
49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M
a. Procedure
gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets
darker as going down from up. However, C is
fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same 1. Enter the 36 mode.
color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned
at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same 2. "36 mode menu screen"
color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches, Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
select a gray of the same gray balance as the
gray [6]. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
more suitable than the patch [5] at the center:
Adjust M and Y in the positive direction. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
When a patch on the upper left side is more
suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
M and Y in the negative direction.
15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray

and press the START button to print a test pat-
tern.
16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satis-

factory result.

to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
2-84

5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen" 8. "Please load output paper ... screen"
For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the After completion of the test pattern output, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT display returns automatically to the adjustment
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST- scren.
MENT] key to select an item you want to The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely
adjust. against the original positioning plate /L [3] and
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)" the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)" original glass.
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)"
Note:
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)"
II ADJUSTMENT
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment Put the green triangular mark [2] on the left
(CONTONE)" side.
• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)"
The following shows the copy mode to which
each adjustment is reflected: [3] [4]
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution
(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
(CONTONE): Text section to be used together [2]
with the screens above.
(ED): High compression
Note:
• A screen in which the screen selection is
turned off by the key operator mode-memory
switch is not displayed. [1] 8050fs1017

9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on
7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover.
(for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass
tray, press the START button to output a test Note:
pattern. • Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise,
the printer gradation cannot be corrected
properly.
10. Press the [Start] key.

Note:
• Start cannot be made when paper is not set
in the by-pass tray.
11. When the chart is scanned with no problem

found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the
printer gamma correction is made and a mes-
sage "Complete" is displayed.
2-85

12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
displayed for each cause. Repair the error to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
referring to the below. screen."
• Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart.
• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
upside down. (3) Printer screen gradation adjustment
Improper positioning of the chart. Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not contin-
• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected.
uous).
A different type of chart.
• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.
Software bugged. a. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
• Error 5: Not within the standard value.

Re-adjust it. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
Check the installation of memory 2. "36 mode menu screen"
board.
• Error 7: Memory other than those specified is
accessed.
3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Software bugged.
• Error 8: Memory related error. Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
Software bugged.
• Error 9: Program error—Software bugged. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
• Error 10: The chart is skew. Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key.
• Error 11: Image header information read error. 5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen"
Software bugged.
For the printer screen gradation adjustment,
• Error 12: RGB data abnormality.
Chart is wrong, or software is bugged. the following items are provided.
• Error 13: Argument set error. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)"
Software bugged. "Printer screen gradation adj. (M)"
• Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust
"Printer screen gradation adj. (C)"
it.
• Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality - "Printer screen gradation adj. (K)"
Re-adjust it.
• Error 52: Array number overflow - Software 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
bugged.
• Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Soft- 7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
ware bugged. and press the START button to output a test
• Error 54: Selected screen information abnor-
pattern.
mality - Software bugged.
• Error 55: Color information abnormality - Soft-
8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically
ware bugged.
outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone
13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" jump found in them.
Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to
9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the
return to the factory default data.
C button while pressing the P button.
Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted
printer gamma sensor data and return to the 10. "Printer screen gradation adj."
factory default data. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in
gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset. which a tone jump has occurred.
2-86

7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment

11. Enter one less numeric value than the current
and press the [SET] key. Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is car-
• Setting range: -3 to +1 ried out when moire reproduced.
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disap-
for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.
pears.
13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return A. Procedure

to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key.
4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen"


nal glass.

keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/
more moire)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.

2-87

7.4.4 Contrast adjustment 7.4.5 Image judge adjustment
Adjust the contrast. Adjust the threshold value of the original image
Use this adjustment for changing the center value judgement.
for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT

3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen" For the image judge adjustment, the following
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. items are provided:
[1. Dot detect adjustment]
[2. Color text adjustment]
START button with a test chart set to the origi- [3. Dot/Text area adjustment]
nal glass.
"Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
• Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5
(contrast reduced)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. (1) Dot detect adjustment

Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the
9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return original image.
a. Procedure


Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key.
5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"

2-88

(2) Color text adjustment

Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value
of the original image.
nal glass.
7. A dot detection pattern is outputted. for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
This output pattern shows how the original
image is discriminated as an image. a. Procedure
• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.
• White section: Discriminated as a picture. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.
II ADJUSTMENT
• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
For the dot detection adjustment, the following
items are provided: 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
[Dot detect adjustment R] Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.
[Dot detect adjustment G]
5. "Color text screen"
[Dot detect adjustment B]
10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary,
keys, and press the [SET] key.
nal glass.
• Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot
area increased) 7. A color text detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original
image is discriminated as an image.
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return • Black section: Discriminated as a black text.
to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu • Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
screen."
9. "Color text screen"

• Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5
(color text area increased)

to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
2-89

(3) Dot/Text area adjustment 7.4.6 ACS adjustment

Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination
Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color
threshold values of the original image.
selection) does not function properly.
for the letter adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure
a. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen"

II ADJUSTMENT

3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key.
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.

4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen"
With an original in which the ACS does not
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
function properly set to the original glass,
Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key.
press the [SCAN] key.
5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown
as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME."
6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted. • Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5
This output pattern shows how the original (COLOR)
image is discriminated as an image.
• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.
• White section: Discriminated as a picture.
• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.
• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen"

• Setting range: -5 (dot area and text area
increased) to +5 (dot area increased and text
area reduced)

to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
2-90

7.4.7 Density adjustment

6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT."
Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the
7. When the adjustment result is other than 0,
background density.
keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the
A. Procedure
adjustment result is 2, input -2).
1. Enter the 36 mode. • Setting range: -5 to +5
2. "36 mode menu screen" 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. becomes 0.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. to the "Density adjustment mode menu
screen."
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
For the density adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. AE (AES) adjustment] (2) Copy density adjustment
[2. Copy density adjustment] Adjust the copy density.
[3. Background adjustment] Use this adjustment for changing the center value
for the density shift function in the user mode.
a. Procedure
from each of the adjustment screens to the 1. Enter the 36 mode.
"Density adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) AE (AES) adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when you want to change
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
the center value selected by the AE (Auto density
selection) in the user mode. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.
a. Procedure
5. "Copy density adjustment screen"
1. Enter the 36 mode. For the copy density adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to
select an item you want to adjust.
• "Text/Photo (Full color)"
• "Photo (Full color)"
• "Text (Full color)"
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. • "Map (Full color)"
• "Text/Photo (Mono color)"
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" • "Photo (Mono color)"
Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key. • "Text (Mono color)"
• "Map (Mono color)"
5. With a chart in which you want to change the • "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
AE density set to the original glass, press the • "Photo (Monochrome)"
• "Text (Monochrome)"
[SCAN] key. • "Map (Monochrome)"
2-91

a. Procedure
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then
select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test 2. "36 mode menu screen"
chart set to the original glass, press the START Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
button.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.

5. "Background adjustment screen"
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. For the background adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to
select an item you want to adjust.
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
• "Text/Photo (Full color)"
screen." • "Photo (Full color)"
• "Text (Full color)"
• "Map (Full color)"
(3) Background adjustment • "Text/Photo (Mono color)"
Adjust the copy background density. • "Photo (Mono color)"
• "Text (Mono color)"
The background adjustment in the user mode only
• "Map (Mono color)"
supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to • "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
adjust the background for each color mode or origi- • "Photo (Monochrome)"
nal mode. • "Text (Monochrome)"
• "Map (Monochrome)"
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then

select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.


to the "Density adjustment mode menu
screen."
2-92

7.4.8 Tone adjustment

Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue. START button with a test chart set to the origi-
Use this adjustment for changing the center value nal glass.
for the tone adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric

II ADJUSTMENT
to the "Image quality adjustment menu
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
screen."
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"
For the tone adjustment, the following items
(2) Green adjustment
are provided:
Adjust the density of green.
[1. Red adjustment]
[2. Green adjustment]
a. Procedure
[3. Blue adjustment]
from each of the adjustment screen to the
"Image quality mode menu screen." 3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
(1) Red adjustment 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"

Adjust the density of red. Press the [2. Green adjustment] key.
This adjustment is not reflected to the IP.
a. Procedure 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the

nal glass.
Press the [1. Red adjustment] key.
2-93

(3) Blue adjustment 7.4.9 Recall standard data

Adjust the density of blue.
Reset the adjustment values of image quality
adjustment to the standard data. (factory default
a. Procedure
data)
Note:
• Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and
the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot
be reset to standard data.
II ADJUSTMENT

A. Procedure
Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 2. "36 mode menu screen"

nal glass.
4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj.
screen"
8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. dard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
• Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) OUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image
quality mode menu screen] without recalling
the standard data.

2-94

7.5 Running test mode 7.5.1 Setting method
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy opera-

A. Procedure
tion.
Select [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu 1. Enter the 36 mode.
screen to show the running mode menu screen.
Press the [4. Running test mode] key.
For this adjustment, the following items can be
selected: 3. "Running test mode menu screen"
A. Intermittent copy mode
Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5.
II ADJUSTMENT
After completion of the copy operation for the set
copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready 4. "Basic screen"
state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the Press the [Start] key.
same operation.
5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press
the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch
B. Paperless running mode
(SW2).
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation. In the same manner as the intermit-
tent copy mode, after completion of the copy opera-
tion for the set copy count, the copier changes into
the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before
resuming the same operation.
C. Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation.
D. Paperless endless mode

The copier operates with the copy count infinitely
set automatically. In the same manner as the paper-
less mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy
operation is made nearly at the same timing as the
normal copy operation.
E. Running mode
The copy operation is made in the paperless end-
less mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the
auto paper feed tray switching.
2-95

7.6 Test pattern output mode

Output various test patterns to separate abnormali-
ties. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36
mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode
screen."
Note:
• As for modes specifically not given in the
SHB, be sure not to output test patterns.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure

Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key.
3. "Test pattern output mode screen"

After entering an output pattern number
through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key.
5. "Basic screen"
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the
START button to output a test pattern.
6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat

steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to

the "36 mode menu screen."
2-96

No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items]
• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit.
• When the density is set to 0 (white)
When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.
II ADJUSTMENT
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact.
• When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K)
When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
8050fs1019
2-97

No.11 Beam check
[Check Items 1]
• For development and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]
• Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-
scanning directions.
II ADJUSTMENT
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit
[Check Items 3]
• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
2-98

No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern
[Check Items]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading
edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible
II ADJUSTMENT
on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 8050fs1021
[1] Edge of paper
2-99

7.7 Test pattern density setting 7.8 Finisher adjustment

Set the density of the test pattern. Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU.
2. "36 mode menu screen" 2. "36 menu screen"

Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key. Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen" 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE- [1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.]
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of [2. Fold stopper adjustment]
the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.]
adjust. [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]
[5. Punch adjustment]
[6. Three-Fold position adj.]
keys and press the [SET] key. [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.]
• Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)
6. "Basic screen"
from each of the adjustment screen to the "Fin-
Select the paper size and press the START
isher adjustment mode menu screen."
button to output a test pattern.
7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat

steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to

the "36 mode menu screen."
2-100

7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only)
only)
Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold folding mode.
mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key.
Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key.
4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button.
and press the START button.
6. Check the paper center and folding position.
6. Check the paper center and stapling position. • Standard value: ± 1mm
• Standard value: ± 1mm
7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"
8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI- OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size.
paper size.
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
keys and press the [SET] key. • Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained.
obtained.
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
screen."
2-101

7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover 7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only)
Inserter D only)
Adjusting the trimming amount.
This adjustment should be performed when the
cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly A. Procedure
and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray
is performed. 1. Enter the 36 mode.

A. Procedure Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.

II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. key.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" 4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF
4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet
tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key.
6. Check the trimming amount.
A complete message appears on the screen.
• Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mm
Note:
[1] •Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or
less may cause a trimming error.

8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
8050fs1022 paper size.

to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."

obtained.

to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode
screen."
2-102

7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) (1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-5
only)
This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch hor- Adjusting the punch vertical position.
izontal positions, and punch registration loop
amount. a. Procedure

A. Procedure

II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
Punch adjustment includes the following items:
Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key.
[1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.]
[2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.] 5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen"
[5. Punch registration loop adj.]
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return and press the START button.
each adjustment screen to the "Finisher 7. Check the punch vertical position.
adjustment mode menu screen."
8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
button while pressing down the P button.
9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen"

OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.

11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appro-

priate.

to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
2-103

(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment (3) Punch registration loop adjustment
(PK-5 only) Adjusting the registration loop amount for the
Adjusting the punch horizontal position. reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight
exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.
a. Procedure
a. Procedure
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 2. "36 mode menu screen"
II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.] 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"
key. Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key.
5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" 5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj.
(PI)] key.
and press the START button. 6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen"
7. Check the position of punch holes.
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to
• Specification (Length between the edge of
be adjusted.
paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm
(2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3 The screen changes as follows; reverse →
holes/inch 2 holes) ADU or upper tray → lower tray.
8. When the value is not within the standard, 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
8. Press the START button to make a copy.
9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
9. Check the punch registration loop amount.
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired 10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
paper size. button while pressing the P button.
10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric 11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen"
keys and press the [SET] key. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm keys and press the [SET] key.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained.
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appro-
priate.
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu
screen."
2-104

7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only)

8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
Adjusting the folding positions during the three- Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
folded copy. OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. keys and press the [SET] key.
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
II ADJUSTMENT
obtained.
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Note:
Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key. • See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust
the folded positions "b" and "c."
4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
6. Check the three-folded position "a."
c
a
b 8050fs1023
Folded Standard value Specification

positions A4R 8.5 x 11R
a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm
b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm

2-105

7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment 7.9 List output mode

Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple. Output a variety of data.

Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. Press the [8. List output mode] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" 3. "List output mode menu screen"
Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key. List output mode items are as follows:
[1. Machine management list 1]
4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" [2. Adjustment data list]
Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. [3. Page fill data list]
[4. Machine management list 2]
and press the START button. [5. Parameter list]
[6. Memory dump list]
6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple. [7. Font pattern]
Note:
• Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine manage-
ment list 2] and later appear.
A 4. Press the key of an item you want to output.
5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the

8050fs1024 START button.

7. When changing the dimension A, press the C
button while pressing the P button. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "36 mode menu screen."
8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
Enter a value with numeric keys and press the
[SET] key.
• Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is

appropriate.

to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
2-106

8. 47 MODE
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting 5. Input check result will appear in the input
method check result display area.
A. 47 Mode 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal

This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/ input check.
output check function) to check and adjust the vari-
ous signals and loads. *1 See "8.5 Input check list".
II ADJUSTMENT
(3) Output check method
B. Operation method for 47 mode
Follow the following procedure.
(1) Starting 47 mode
a. Turn off the main switch (SW2). a. Procedure
b. Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7
of the numeric keys. 1. Enter the 47 mode.
c. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O
check mode" is displayed in the message
Enter the output check code with the numeric
display area at the center of the screen.
keys. *2
"47 mode menu screen" 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2
5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output

check.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output

check.
[2]
[1] [3] [4] 8050fs1001
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-
put check.
[1] Input/Output check code
[2] Multi code *2 See "8.6 Output check list".
[3] Input check
[4] Output check (4) Exiting from the 47 mode
(2) Input check method Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Follow the following procedure.
a. Procedure

Enter the input check code with the numeric
keys. *1
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
2-107

8.2 Adjustment data display 8.3 Hard disk check

Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factory- Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD
set values and current values). total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the
No adjustment value can be changed in this mode. error code related to HDD.

II ADJUSTMENT
Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that
"94-00" appears in the message display area. "99-00" appears in the message display area.
3. Press the [Start] key. 3. Press the P button.
4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner 4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric
of the screen. keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the
input number) appears in the message display
5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the
area.
47 mode. 01: HDD total capacity check
02: HDD remaining capacity check
Note:
03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery
• Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
5. Press the [Start] key.
At checking the total capacity: the total capac-
ity is displayed
At checking the remaining capacity: the
remaining capacity is displayed
At checking and recovering the bad sectors:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded-"OK" appears
The operation failed-"NG" appears
Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad
sectors check and recovery again when "NG"
appears.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output

check.
7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Note:
• The operation can not be canceled during the
HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the
[STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are
disabled).
• The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard
disk when you move the main body.
2-108

8.4 Input check list

Classification Symbol Code Multi Name Display and signal source
code 001 000
High voltage, TEMP/ 00 0 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside 0 to 255
analog signal HUM humidity)
TEMP/ 1 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside
temperature)
HUM
— 2 — — —
TDB 3 Temp detection board 0 to 255
II ADJUSTMENT
TLD Y 01 4 Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Toner No toner
TLD M 5 Remaining toner detection sensor /M
TLD C 6 Remaining toner detection sensor /C
TLD K 7 Remaining toner detection sensor /K
PS53 8 Waste toner door sensor Box No box
PS52 9 Waste toner full sensor FULL EMPTY
HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)
2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y)
5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)
6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more Normal
5 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is
abnormal
6 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)
7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) Abnormal Normal
8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)
9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit/2 (separation)
PS11 05 2 Gamma sensor 0 to 255
6 Gamma sensor
DRPS Y 06 0 Drum potential sensor /Y
DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K
2-109


code 001 000
High voltage, HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) Abnormal Normal
analog signal 5
6
7
HV2 08 0 High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer) Abnormal Normal
1
2
3
II ADJUSTMENT
4
HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) Abnormal Normal
1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)
Paper feed, PS31 11 0 No paper sensor /1 Paper No paper
conveyance PS37 1 No paper sensor /2
PS43 2 No paper sensor /3
PS47 3 No paper sensor /BP
PS108 4 No paper sensor (C-208)
PS32 12 0 Remaining paper sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS38 1 Remaining paper sensor /2
PS44 2 Remaining paper sensor /3
PS102 to 3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (C-208) 0 to 7
105
PS33 13 0 Paper size /S1 Paper No paper
PS34 1 Paper size /L1
PS39 2 Paper size /S2
PS45 4 Paper size /S3
PS48 6 Paper size /SBP
PS49 7 Paper size /LBP
VR1 14 0 Paper sizeVR /1 0 to 255
VR2 1 Paper sizeVR /2
VR3 2 Paper sizeVR /3
VR4 3 Paper sizeVR /BP
PS30 16 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Not at upper
PS36 1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 limit
PS42 2 Tray upper limit sensor /3
PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP
PS109 4 Upper limit sensor (C-208) Upper:1, lower:2,
middle:0
— 17 0 Tray set detection /1 Yes No
— 1 Tray set detection /2
— 2 Tray set detection /3
2-110


code 001 000
Paper feed, PS29 19 0 Pre-registration sensor /1 Paper No paper
conveyance PS35 1 Pre-registration sensor /2
PS41 2 Pre-registration sensor /3
PS26 3 By-pass conveyance sensor
PS106 4 Feed sensor (C-208)
PS107 20 0 Paper feed sensor (C-208) Paper No paper
PS23 1 ADU pre-registration sensor
PS20 2 ADU conveyance sensor
II ADJUSTMENT
PS27 3 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1
PS28 4 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2
— 5 — — —
PS22 6 Registration sensor Paper No paper
PS50 7 Vertical conveyance sensor
PS13 8 Paper exit sensor
PS19 9 Reverse paper exit sensor
PS21 10 ADU paper reverse sensor
PS12 11 Paper exit full sensor Full Other than
full
PS30 23 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP
4
PS101, 5 Lower limit sensor (C-208) Upper limit:1, lower
Upper limit sensor (C-208) limit:2, middle:0
PS109 6
PS24 24 0 2nd transfer HP sensor Home Other than
1 position home posi-
tion
2
PS18 25 0 Front door open/close sensor Open Close
PS51 1 Vertical conveyance door open/close sen-
sor
PS54 2 Toner supply door open/close sensor
PS14 3 Toner supply unit open/close sensor
— 4 Fixing unit set detection Installed Not installed
PS100 5 Top cover open/close sensor1 (C-208) Open Close
PS115 6 Front door open/close sensor (C-208)
SW100 7 Tray down switch (C-208) ON OFF
M41 28 0 Paper feed motor Abnormal Normal
2-111


code 001 000
Light PS1 30 0 Scanner HP sensor Home Other than
position home posi-
tion
PS3 1 APS detection sensor /S Paper No paper
PS4 2 APS detection sensor /L
PS2 3 APS timing sensor OPEN CLOSE
M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y Abnormal Normal
(abnormal rotation detection)
M4 1 Polygon motor /M
II ADJUSTMENT

M5 2 Polygon motor /C
M6 3 Polygon motor /K
M3, M4, 4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K One or more Normal
(abnormal rotation detection) colors are
M5, M6
abnormal
M3 5 Polygon motor /Y Abnormal Normal
(abnormal temperature detection)
M4 6 Polygon motor /M
M5 7 Polygon motor /C
M6 8 Polygon motor /K
M3, M4, 9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K One or more Normal
M5, M6 (abnormal temperature detection) colors are
abnormal
INDX SB 33 0 Index sensor /Y Abnormal Normal
Y
INDX SB 1 Index sensor /M
M
INDX SB 2 Index sensor /C
C
INDX SB 3 Index sensor /K
B
INDX SB 4 Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K One or more Normal
Y, M, C, 5 colors are
abnormal
K
PS5, 35 0 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge Edge
PS6, detected undetected
from one or
PS7
more color
PS5 1 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Edge Edge
PS6 2 Laser correction HP sensor /M detected undetected
PS7 3 Laser correction HP sensor /C
2-112


code 001 000
Light PS5, 35 4 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge Edge
PS6, detected undetected
from one or
PS7
more color
PS5, 8 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge Edge
detected undetected
II ADJUSTMENT
PS6,
from one or
PS7
more color
PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F 0 to 255
PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R
LDB Y 37 1 Laser drive board /Y 0 to 255
LDB M 2 Laser drive board /M
LDB C 3 Laser drive board /C
LDB K 4 Laser drive board /K
PS1 38 5 Scanner HP sensor Home Other than
position home posi-
tion
Main body PS60, 41 0 Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2 Abnormal Normal
PS61 1
2
PS62, 3 Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
PS63 4
5
PS64, 6 Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
PS65 7
8
PS66, 9 Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
PS67 10
11
PS69, 12 Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
PS68 13
14
PS15 15 1st transfer HP sensor Home Other than
tion
17
18
2-113


code 001 000
Main body M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan Abnormal Normal
M42 2 DCPS cooling fan
M10 3 Fixing cooling fan /1
M48 4 Charger intake fan
M47 5 Drum unit fan
M43, 6 Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan
/1, /2
M44,
M45,
II ADJUSTMENT
M46
M24 7 IP cooling fan
M28, 8 Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R
M27,
M26
M12, 9 Drum cooling fan /1, /2
M13
M11 10 Transfer belt cooling fan
M25 11 ICP cooling fan
DCPS1 43 0 DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) Abnormal Normal
DCPS2 1 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
2 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)
C (T) 5 Total counter Yes No
C (K) 6 Checking to see if the key counter- Yes No
equipped machine is provided with a key
counter or not.
TH1 45 0 Fixing temperature sensor /1 0 to 255
TH3 1 Fixing temperature sensor /3
— 7 TH1 correction temperature
M29 47 0 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal
1
2
PS16 3 Fixing pressure release sensor Home Other than
tion
5
M29 9 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal
10
11
2-114


code 001 000
Main body PS15 48 0 1st transfer HP sensor Home Other than
tion
2
3
PRCB 49 Printer control board (drum motor control) Displays abnormal code
Intrinsic M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y Abnormal Normal
functions 1
2
II ADJUSTMENT
M21 3 Developing motor /M
4
5
M22 6 Developing motor /C
7
8
M23 9 Developing motor /K
10
11
TDS Y 12 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
TDS M 13 Toner density sensor /M
TDS C 14 Toner density sensor /C
TDS K 15 Toner density sensor /K
PCL Y 51 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y Abnormal Normal
PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K
TDS Y 54 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
1
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 Connected Uncon-
— 1 C-208 nected
— 2 AFR-20
TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255
2-115


code 001 000
Intrinsic PS17 59 3 Fixing paper exit sensor Paper No paper
functions
AFR-20 PS304 60 1 No paper sensor Paper No paper
PS301 2 Registration sensor
PS302 3 Timing sensor
PS305 4 Reverse sensor
PS306 5 Paper exit sensor
PS303 6 Paper feed cover sensor Open Close
II ADJUSTMENT
PS308 7 Paper feed tray sensor

PS307 8 Paper exit cover sensor
RS1 9 AFR-20 open/close sensor
FN-120, PS701 76 0 Sub-tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
FN-9 PS702 1 Tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS703 2 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS704 3 FNS entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS705 4 Stacker entrance sensor Paper No paper
PS706 5 Main tray paper exit sensor
PS707 6 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than Standby
standby position
position
PS708 7 Alignment HP sensor /U Home Other than
position home posi-
tion
PS709 8 Paper exit belt HP sensor Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
PS713 9 Stapler rotation HP sensor Home Other than
PS711 10 Stapler movement HP sensor position home posi-
tion
PS712 11 Paper exit opening HP sensor Other than Close
close posi- position
tion
PS714 12 Clincher rotation HP sensor Home Other than
position home posi-
tion
PS715 13 Counter reset sensor Paper No paper
PS718 14 Shift HP sensor Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
PS720 15 Stacker no paper sensor Paper No paper
SW702 16 Staple switch /R No staple Staple
PS730 17 Stapler HP sensor /R Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
SW701 18 Cartridge switch /R No cartridge Cartridge
2-116


code 001 000
FN-120, M710 76 19 Clincher motor /R Other than Start
FN-9 start
— 20 — — —
PS732 21 Clincher HP sensor /R Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
PS719 22 Sub-tray full sensor Full Other than
full
MS701 23 FNS interlock switch Front door Front door
II ADJUSTMENT
opened closed
SW704 24 Staple switch /F No staple Staple
PS731 25 Stapler HP sensor /F Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
SW703 26 Cartridge switch /F No cartridge Cartridge
M715 27 Clincher motor /F Other than Start
start
— 28 — — —
PS733 29 Clincher HP sensor /F Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
M707 30 Paper exit roller motor lock detection Other than Control
control speed
speed
— 31 FNS connection detection Connected Uncon-
nected
PS722 32 Folding knife HP sensor Home Other than
PS723 33 Stopper HP sensor position home posi-
tion
PS724 34 Alignment HP sensor /L Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
PS725 35 Folding exit sensor Paper No paper
PS726 36 Folding passage sensor
PS729 37 Folding full sensor Full Other than
full
— 38 — — —
M720 39 Folding conveyance motor Other than Control
control speed
speed
— 40 — — —
— 41 — — —
— 42 — — —
— 43 — — —
2-117


code 001 000
Cover M203 76 44 PI conveyance motor Other than Control
Inserter D control speed
speed
— 45 DIPSW0 Other than Single oper-
single operation
ation
— 46 — — —
— 47 — — —
— 48 — — —
II ADJUSTMENT
— 49 — — —
— 50 — — —
— 51 — — —
PS201 52 PI passage sensor /U Paper No paper
PS206 53 PI passage sensor /L
— 54 — — —
— 55 — — —
— 56 — — —
— 57 — — —
— 58 — — —
FN-120, — 59 Folding connection detection Uncon- Connected
FN-9 nected
— 60 — — —
PS716 61 Gate HP sensor
Cover — 62 — — —
Inserter D — 63 — — —
PS202 64 No sheet sensor /U No paper Paper
PS203 65 Sheet set sensor /U
PS205 66 Tray lower limit sensor /U Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS204 67 Tray upper limit sensor /U Upper limit Other than
upper limit
— 68 Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Switch OFF Switch ON
— 69 Sheet feeder manual punch button switch
— 70 Sheet feeder manual function selection but-
ton switch
MS201 71 PI interlock switch Open Close
PS207 72 No sheet sensor /L No paper Paper
PS208 73 Sheet set sensor /L
PS210 74 Tray lower limit sensor /L Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS209 75 Tray upper limit sensor /L Upper limit Other than
upper limit
— 76 — — —
PS212 77 Sheet size sensor /L
— 78 — — —
2-118


code 001 000
Cover — 76 79 PI connection detection Uncon- Connected
Inserter D nected
— 80 — — —
— 81 — — —
— 82 — — —
PK-5 PS801 83 Punch HP sensor Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
II ADJUSTMENT
— 84 — — —
— 85 — — —
PS802 86 Punch scraps full sensor Other than Full
full
PS804 87 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than
set
— 88 PK rocking End face detection 1 No paper Paper
89 PK rocking End face detection 2
PS803 93 PK rocking Punch movement home posi- Home Other than
tion position home posi-
tion
— 94 PK connection detection Uncon- Connected
nected
— 95 — — —
2-119


code 001 000
TMG-3 PS101 77 0 Cutting entrance detection Paper No paper
PS102 1 Cutting conveyance detection
PS103 2 Cutting end stopper HP detection Home Other than
PS104 3 Cutting clear HP detection position home posi-
tion
PS105 4 Cutting press HP detectin Other than Home
home posi- position
tion
PS106 5 Cutting knife upper limit HP detection Home Other than
II ADJUSTMENT
position home posi-

tion
PS108 6 Cutting booklet discharge Paper No paper
PS110 7 Holder board of upper limit detection Other than Upper limit
upper limit
PS111 8 Holder board of lower limit detection Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS112 9 Pusher HP Home Other than
position home posi-
tion
PS114 10 Cutting stacker cover detection 24 V Open Close
MS2 11 Cutting front door detection 24 V
— 12 Cutting conveyance M lock signal under Locked Unlocked
operation
— 13 — — —
— 14 — — —
— 15 — — —
PS107 16 Cutting end scraps box set detection Not set Other than
set
PS109 17 Cutting end scraps box full detection Other than Full
full
PS113 18 Cutting stucker full detection No paper Paper
— 19 TU connection detection Uncon- Connected
nected
— 20 — — —
— 21 — — —
— 22 — — —
— 23 — — —
2-120

8.5 Output check list • Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be
set or change in the field" column. These
Note: items are only for the developping/manufuct-
• Do not output items which cannot be set or ing process.
changed in the field and codes which are not Outputs of them may damage the machine.
described in the output check list."
Classification Symbol Code Multi Name Cannot be set or

code changed in the field
High voltage, L1 00 0 Exposure lamp
II ADJUSTMENT
analog signal M53, 01 0 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle
MC14 clutch /Y
1 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle
clutch /Y
2 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-
tle clutch /Y
M53, 3 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle
clutch /M
MC15
clutch /M
tle clutch /M
clutch /C
MC16
clutch /C
tle clutch /C
MC17 clutch /K

clutch /K
tle clutch /K
HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) x
1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) x
2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) x
3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) x
4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current x
measurement)
5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current x
measurement)
6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current x
measurement)
7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current x
measurement)
2-121


High voltage, HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) x
analog signal 1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) x
2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) x
3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x
4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K) x
5
6
7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x
II ADJUSTMENT
8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current x

measurement)
9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current x
measurement)
L1 10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current x
measurement)
11 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current x
measurement at color mode)
12 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current x
measurement at color mode)
HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) x
1 High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) x
PS11 06 2 Gamma sensor
6 Gamma sensor (for individual check) x
DRPS Y 0 Drum potential sensor /Y
DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K
HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) x
5 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) x
6 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for x
individual check)
7 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for x
individual check)
08 0 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) x
1 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) x
2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for x
current measurement)
current measurement)
cleaning consideration)*
5 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) x
HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) x
1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) x
2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) x
3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) x
— 15 1 Counter reset
— 2 Job memory clear
— 98 RD mode setup
2-122


Paper feed, SD7 20 0 Pick up solenoid /1
conveyance SD8 1 Pick up solenoid /2
SD9 2 Pick up solenoid /3
SD5 4 Pick up solenoid /BP
SD100 5 Paper feed solenoid (C-208)
MC7 21 0 Paper feed clutch /1
MC9 1 Paper feed clutch /2
MC11 2 Paper feed clutch /3
II ADJUSTMENT
MC6 4 Paper feed clutch /BP
MC101 5 Paper feed clutch (C-208)
MC8 22 0 Pre-registration clutch /1
MC10 1 Pre-registration clutch /2
MC12 2 Pre-registration clutch /3
MC102 5 Pre-registration clutch (C-208)
M40 23 0 Tray up drive motor /1
M39 1 Tray up drive motor /2
M38 2 Tray up drive motor /3
M35 3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down)
4 Tray up drive motor /BP (up)
M100 5 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: down)
6 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: up)
M34 24 0 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous
rotation)
1 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure)
2 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release)
M30 25 0 Registration motor (1/3 speed)
1 Registration motor (1/2 speed)
2 Registration motor (1/1speed)
3 Registration motor (paper feed line speed)
4 Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed)
M31 26 0 Loop roller motor (1/3 speed)
1 Loop roller motor (1/2 speed)
2 Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
M31 3 Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed)
M33 27 0 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed)
1 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed)
2 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed)
3 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times
speed)
4 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/3 speed)
7 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times
speed)
M41 28 0 Paper feed motor
M101 1 Paper feed motor (C-208)
2-123


Paper feed, MC13 29 0 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1
conveyance MC4 1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2
MC5 2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3
SD1 3 Transfer belt separating claw
M136, 5 Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (C-208)
M137
SD6 6 ADU lock solenoid
M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation)
II ADJUSTMENT
M4 1 Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation)

M5 2 Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation)
M6 3 Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation)
M3, M4, 4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation)
M5, M6
M3 5 Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M4 6 Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M5 7 Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M6 8 Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M3, M4, 9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvola-
M5, M6 tile setting)
LDB Y 33 0 Laser drive board /Y

LDB M 1 Laser drive board /M
LDB C 2 Laser drive board /C
LDB K 3 Laser drive board /K
LDB Y, 4 Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
M, C, K
— 34 Shading correction
PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F
PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R
— 37 0 LD alarm level detection all colors
M1 38 0 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continu-
ous)
1 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continu-
ous)
ous)
ous)
ous)
5 Scanner motor (HP search)
6 Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position)
7 Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan
operation: one operation)
Main body ACDB 40 0 AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON)
1 AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, /
2)OFF)
M14 41 0 Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)
2-124


1 Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)
2 Drum motor /Y (1/1speed)
M15 3 Drum motor /M (1/3 speed)
4 Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)
5 Drum motor /M (1/1speed)
M16 6 Drum motor /C (1/3 speed)
7 Drum motor /C (1/2 speed)
8 Drum motor /C (1/1speed)
II ADJUSTMENT
M17 9 Drum motor /K (1/3 speed)
10 Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)
11 Drum motor /K (1/1speed)
M18 12 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed)
13 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed)
14 Transfer belt motor (1/1speed)
15 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measure- x
ment)
M18 41 16 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measure- x
ment)
17 Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measure- x
ment)
M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan
M25 1 IPB cooling fan
M42 2 DCPS cooling fan
M10, 3 Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2
M36,
M37
M48 4 Charger intake fan
M47 5 Drum unit fan
M43, 6 Writing intake fan /1, /2,
Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
M44,
M45,
M46
M24 7 IP cooling fan
M26, 8 Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F
M27,
M28
M12 9 Drum cooling fan /1
M13 10 Drum cooling fan /2
M11 11 Transfer belt cooling fan
T (C) 43 1 Total counter
T (BK) 2 Black counter
T (K) 6 Key counter
Main body DCPS2 44 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking)
L2, L3, 45 0 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2,
Fixing lower lamp
L4 1
2
2-125


3
L2 4 Fixing upper lamp /1
L3 5 Fixing upper lamp /2
L4 6 Fixing lower lamp
L2, L3, 7 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2,
L4 8 Fixing lower lamp
9
10
II ADJUSTMENT
M29 47 0 Fixing motor (1/3 speed)

1 Fixing motor (1/2 speed)
2 Fixing motor (1/1speed)
3 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation
on, full-time rotation)
4 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the
pressure position)
5 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the
release position)
M29 47 9 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3
speed)
10 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2
speed)
11 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1
speed)
M29, L2, 13 Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing
L3, L4 lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater
lamps on)
M54 15 Web motor
M19 48 0 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time
rotation)
1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the
release position)
2 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at
black and white pressure position)
3 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at
color mode pressure position)
M18 49 0 Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive x
material control 1: 1/1 speed)
1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check- x
ing photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed)
Intrinsic M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y (1/1speed)
functions 1 Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed)
2 Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed)
M21 3 Developing motor /M (1/1speed)
2-126


4 Developing motor /M (1/2 speed)
5 Developing motor /M (1/3 speed)
M22 6 Developing motor /C (1/1speed)
7 Developing motor /C (1/2 speed)
8 Developing motor /C (1/3 speed)
M23 9 Developing motor /K (1/1speed)
10 Developing motor /K (1/2 speed)
11 Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)
II ADJUSTMENT
PCL Y 51 0 Pre-charging lamp /Y
PLC M 1 Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C 2 Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K 51 3 Pre-charging lamp /K
PCL Y 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y
(turns on the control signal)
PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp //M
PLC C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K
— 52 0 L detection reference for all colors x
— 1 L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) x
— 2 L detection reference for K x
— 3 L detection reference for Y x
— 4 L detection reference for M x
— 5 L detection reference for C x
M49 54 0 Toner supply motor /Y (high speed)
1 Toner supply motor /Y (low speed)
2 Toner supply motor /Y (setting value)
M50 3 Toner supply motor /M (high speed)
4 Toner supply motor /M (low speed)
5 Toner supply motor /M (setting value)
M51 6 Toner supply motor /C (high speed)
7 Toner supply motor /C (low speed)
8 Toner supply motor /C (setting value)
M52 9 Toner supply motor /K (high speed)
10 Toner supply motor /K (low speed)
11 Toner supply motor /K (setting value)
MC14 12 Toner bottle clutch /Y
MC15 13 Toner bottle clutch /M
MC16 14 Toner bottle clutch /C
MC17 15 Toner bottle clutch /K
Intrinsic SD2 55 0 Color registration shutter solenoid
functions SD3 1 Gamma sensor shutter solenoid
— 56 0 Indicator lamp (PAT1 on)
1 Indicator lamp (PAT2 on)
2-127


— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 connection check
— 1 C-208 connection check
— 2 AFR-20 connection check
TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y
II ADJUSTMENT

AFR-20 M301 60 1 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
2 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)
3 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)
4 Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/
sec)
sec)
sec)
M302 7 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/
sec)
8 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400mm/
sec)
9 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900mm/
sec)
10 Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/
sec)
sec)
sec)
M303 13 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
14 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)
15 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)
16 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)
SD302 19 Reverse solenoid
SD301 20 Paper exit solenoid
MC301 21 Registration clutch
FN-120, FN-9 M701 75 1 FNS conveyance motor
M702 2 Shift motor (HP search)
3 Shift motor (moves to the shift position)
4 Shift motor ( rotation)
2-128


FN-120, FN-9 M703 75 5 Tray up/down motor (HP search)
6 Tray up/down motor (down)
7 Tray up/down motor (up)
M705 8 Alignment motor /U (HP search)
M707 9 Paper exit roller motor (HP search)
10 Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)
M708 11 Paper exit opening motor (HP search)
M708 12 Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening)
II ADJUSTMENT
M709 13 Stapler motor /R (initianl operation)
14 Stapler motor /R (stapling)
M714 15 Stapler motor /F (initianl operation)
16 Stapler motor /F (stapling)
M711 17 Stapler movement motor (HP search)
18 Stapler movement motor (movement by size)
M713 19 Stacker entrance motor
M718 20 Stopper motor (HP search)
M716 21 Alignment motor /L
M719 23 Folding knife motor
M720 24 Folding conveyance motor
SD704 31 Paper exit opening solenoid
SD705 32 By-pass gate solenoid
M705 33 Alignment motor /U (open)
34 Alignment motor /U (close)
35 Alignment motor /U (rocking)
M716 36 Alignment motor /L (open)
37 Alignment motor /L (close)
38 Alignment motor /L (rocking)
M718 39 Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position)
TMG-3 M101 55 Conveyance motor
M102 56 Cutter motor (normal rotation)
57 Cutter motor (reverse rotation)
M103 58 Stopper motor (HP search)
M104 59 Stopper release motor (HP search)
60 Stopper release motor (release)
61 Stopper release motor (set)
M105 62 Press motor (HP search)
63 Press motor (press)
Cover Inserter MC202 75 64 Conveyance clutch /L
D M202 65 Tray up/down motor /L (down)
66 Tray up/down motor /L (up)
SD202 67 Sheet feed solenoid /L
PK-5 M801 78 Punch motor
2-129


M802 79 Punch shift motor (HP search)
Cover Inserter MC201 83 Conveyance clutch /U
D M201 84 Tray up/down motor (down)
85 Tray up/down motor (up)
SD201 86 Sheet feed solenoid /U
M203 87 PI conveyance motor
FN-120, FN-9 M712 88 Gate drive motor (HP search)
89 Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching)
II ADJUSTMENT
90 Gate drive motor (straight direction switching)

M721 91 Sub-tray paper exit motor
M704 92 Clincher rotation motor (HP search)
93 Clincher rotation motor (skew shift)
M706 94 Stapler rotation motor (HP search)
95 Stapler rotation motor (skew shift)
SD706 96 Three-folding gate solenoid
— 99 FNS paperless running mode
ADU SD4 80 Reverse/exit solenoid
MC2 81 0 ADU conveyance clutch /1
MC1 1 ADU conveyance clutch /2
MC3 2 ADU pre-registration clutch
M32 84 0 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation:
1/3 speed)
1 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation:
1/2 speed)
1/1 speed)
3 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed
line speed)
3 times speed)
5 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:
1/3 speed)
1/2 speed)
1/1 speed)
8 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed
line speed)
M32 84 9 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times
speed)
Others — 94 0 Adjustment data display
— 1 Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board
— 2 Message display
— 97 1 E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display
— 98 2 E-RDH (DRAM) check
— 99 3 HDD bad sectors check and recovery
2-130

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:
unplugged from the power outlet
9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pres-

sure adjustment
II ADJUSTMENT
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass
feed.
A. Procedure
2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/
[1] [3] [2]
BP [2] with 2 screws [1].
3. Replace the ADU.
4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed opera-
tion.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
Note:
• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
purchased separately.
• Up to 4 plates can be used at a time.
• Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate
8050fs1050
is added.
2-131

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
9.2 Paper feed height (upper

limit) adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the
fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper.
Note:
• This adjustment affects the pick-up movement
II ADJUSTMENT
amount. When the adjustment is complete,

perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (by-pass)".
A. Procedure
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed
solenoid cover [2]. [1]
[2] [1] 8050fs1051
2-132

3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].
Note:
• Take note of the original scale.
(1) If it is not within the standard value:

Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting
bracket to make the height of the entrance guide
upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface
II ADJUSTMENT
to be within the standard value.
• When raising the height of the up/down plate: [2]
lower the sensor mounting bracket.
• When lowering height of the up/down plate:
lower the sensor mounting bracket.
(2) If any problem occurs:

• When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise [1]
the position of the sensor mounting bracket.
• When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the
position of the sensor mounting bracket. 8050fs1052
• When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the
position of the sensor mounting bracket.
1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.

2. Replace the ADU.
tion.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of
PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
2-133

9.3 Pick-up movement amount

adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment
when a no feed jam occurs frequently.
A. Procedure
solenoid cover [2]. [1]
II ADJUSTMENT
[2] [1] 8050fs1053
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2].
Note:
• Take note of the original scale.
4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.

5. Replace the ADU.
tion.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5 [2]
again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[1]
8050fs1054
2-134

9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-

centering adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering
occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in
the 36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].
II ADJUSTMENT
[1] [2]
3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center posi-
tion.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check

whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of
[2]
image [2] against the center of paper [1] is
within the standard value. [3]
Standard value: ± 3 mm or less
[1]
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering
amount is within the standard value.
8050fs1056
2-135

9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet

feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when
the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the
paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by
the paper type and the operating environment (the
no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environ-
ment and the double feed is likely in the high tem-
perature environment). Excess adjustment may
II ADJUSTMENT
reverse the symptom.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1].
unit cover [3]. [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050fs1057
2-136

3. Unplug the connector [1].

4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side [3]
and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and
remove the paper feed unit [4].
[5]
II ADJUSTMENT
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the

bottom of the paper feed unit.
Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected.
Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected.
7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed
tray. [1]
[2] [3] 8050fs1059
2-137

9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-

pass conveyance guide plate
magnet
A. Procedure
2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the by-
pass conveyance guide plate is in contact with [1]
[5]
the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when [3]
the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance [2]
II ADJUSTMENT
guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3].

If not, perform the following adjustment.
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1].

4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2] [2]
toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4]
[6]
comes into contact with the conveyance guide [5]
plate/L [4].
5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6].
Then, tighten the magnet screw [1]. [1]
6. Close the finisher door. [4]
[3]
8050fs1076
2-138

9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-

pass gate
A. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out
the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
• To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place
a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[2]
[3] 8050fs1077
4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Visually check whether the clearance between [2]
the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass convey-
ance plate [3] is within the standard value when [1]
the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off.
Standard value: A = 3.2 ± 0.5 mm
mm [3]
0.5
3.2
A=
[2]
8050fs1078
2-139


7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control
board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring har- [2] [3]
ness from the clamp [3]. [4]
8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB
[1] with the bracket [5].
[5]
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate sole-

noid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD
[4] A=
705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clear- 3.2
ance between the by-pass gate [3] and the by- 0.5
mm
pass conveyance plate [4] to be within the stan-
[3]
dard value when SD705 [1] is off.
steps in reverse.
[5]
[1] 8050fs1080
2-140

9.8 FNS adjustment of the shift

position
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
• Top cover or optional PI (if installed)
• Top cover/2
2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift
motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3).
3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for
[5]
II ADJUSTMENT
the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at [3]
the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the
HP search (home position) and the shift posi- [4]
tion.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP

sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the
bracket [4] based on the mark [3].
5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjust- [1]
ment is complete. [4]
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
8050fs1082
2-141

9.9 FNS adjustment of the paper

exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure
• Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed)
• Top cover/2
• Rear cover
2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the
paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47
mode (code 75-31).
II ADJUSTMENT
3. Check whether the clearance between the

plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3]
on the bracket is within the standard value when [1]
SD704 [1] is on.
If not, perform the following adjustment. A=6.5 0.5mm
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and

remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 8050fs1084
2-142

5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posi-

tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the [2]
screws.
A=6.5 0.5mm
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the

solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position [1] [5]
where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with
the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide
[4]
stay [3].
[3]
Note:
• There should be the gap of 1 mm or more [2]
between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper
exit guide stay [3].
[3]
steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
2-143

9.10 FNS adjustment of the posi-

tion of paper exit arm
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit
belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks
[5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt [3]
detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole
II ADJUSTMENT
[3] at the rear panel.

If not, perform the adjustment.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note:
[1]
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
place a support under the stacker unit.
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
2-144

4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear

[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci- [1]
fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at
the specified position.
steps in reverse.
[2]
II ADJUSTMENT
8050fs1088
2-145


tion of alignment plate/U
A. Procedure
1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher com-
pletes its initial operation, turn off the main body.
unit.
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment

HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the [1]
home position. [2]
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the align-

ment plate/U [1] is within the standard value. A=340.6 mm
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)

[1] PS708
8050fs1090
2-146

6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the

alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the [4] [1] [2]
center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the
front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be
within the standard value based on the rear
side.
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
[1] [3]
8050fs1091
2-147


tion of alignment plate/L
(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of
FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed.
2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one
of the following codes to drive a motor and turn
off the main body.
II ADJUSTMENT
• Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) home

position search
• Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) home
position search
• Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the
A4R or larger position
unit.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.
5. Remove the stapler unit cover.

6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment
HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home
position.
7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment
HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L
[1] is aligned with the home position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1092
2-148

8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker

section and check the position of the alignment [3]
[1]
plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2]
by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space
A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and
the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the
standard value.
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)
[4] [2]
II ADJUSTMENT
A=340.6 mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of

the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the stan- [2]
dard value.
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
8050fs1094
2-149

9.13 FNS adjustment of the sta-

pling position (flat stapling)
Note:
• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
A. Procedure
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
II ADJUSTMENT
is performed within the standard value.

• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at
rear) [1]: A = 8.5 ± 3mm [1] [2]
• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at A=8.5 3mm
front) [2]: B = 8.5 ± 3mm
• Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5
± 3mm
(In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4]
connecting 2 staples must become parallel)
B=8.5 3mm
unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker [3]
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. C=8.5 3mm
Note:
[4] 8050fs1095
2-150

5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the

clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based
[5]
on the mark [4].
6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
[4]
[4] [3]
8050fs1096
2-151


pling position in a vertical
direction
A. Procedure
Note:
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the

clinch failure.
• Buckled staple-needles [1]
• Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or
less) [1]
• Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value:
L = 0.7mm or less)
If there is a failure, perform the following adjust-
L
ment. [2] L=1mm
Note:
[3]
L
L=0.7mm
• Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced
8050fs1097
or removed.

unit.
Note:
• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.

5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2],
and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding
it.
[1]
[3]
[2] 8050fs1098
2-152

6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-

ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into [1]
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
[5]
[3]
[2]
II ADJUSTMENT
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and

the clincher/R [2]. [2]
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] [3]
8050fs1100
2-153

9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] [2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note:
[1]
• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be
hooked on the clincher.
II ADJUSTMENT
[5] [4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1101
2-154

10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward.

Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the
plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted
into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the
gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate
[2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the
jig into the clincher unit [4].
11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher.
12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the sta- [1]
pler upward.
II ADJUSTMENT
[3]
Note:
• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
[2]
clincher when removing the stapler position- [4]
ing jig.
13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace

the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace
the cartridge.
14. Check the operation of the stapler.
[1] 8050fs1102
2-155


pling position (flat stapling)
(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
Note:
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether

the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 sta- [1]
ples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrep-
ancy L is within the standard value. [2]
Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of [3]
L
FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the
position of alignment plate/L" has been com-
8050fs1103
plete.
unit.
Note:

6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L
[1].
[1]
[2] 8050fs1104
2-156

7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to

make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of
paper to be horizontal.
8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling
operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold
position is within the standard value.
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
[3]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1105
2-157

9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle

of the folding stopper (only
for FN-9)
Note:
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
• Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be
removed.
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure
1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to
check whether the discrepancy at the folding
edge is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
A
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
unit.
Note:
8050fs1107
2-158

5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]

and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].
Note:
• Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be
removed.
6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the fold-

ing to check whether the discrepancy is within
the standard value.
II ADJUSTMENT
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1108
2-159

9.17 FNS adjustment of the fold-

ing force (only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of
the folding roller.
unit.
4. Remove the stacker unit cover.
II ADJUSTMENT
5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure

springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2]. A
B
Note: [3] C
• The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on
the hook holes with same symbol.
B
A
[1]
C C
B B
A A
[3] [2]
8050fs1109
2-160

9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-

holding position (only for
FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the
folding stopper" has been completed.
Folding Standard value Specification

position A4R 8.5 x 11R
II ADJUSTMENT
a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm
b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm c
a
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check
whether the three-folding position is within the
specification. b 8050fs1110
If it is not within the specification, perform the

following adjustment.
3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding
position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjust-
ment" ⇒ "Three-holding position adjustment" in
the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for
confirmation.
4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the
specification, open the finisher door and pull out
the stacker unit.
5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2
three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust
the position of the three-folding stopper [4]
based on the mark [3].
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the three-
folding to check whether the three-folding posi-
tion is within the standard value. [3]
[2]
[4]
[2] [1]
8050fs1111
2-161


pler drive belt position
A. Procedure
Note:
• This adjustment is performed only if the posi-
tion between the drive belt and the gear is dis-
placed during another adjustment by mistake.

II ADJUSTMENT
unit.
Note:

• Rear cover
• Stapler unit cover
4. Insert the stacker unit.
5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide
pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexago-
nal wrench [3].
6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously
toward center until they contacts with the bear-
ing.
Note:
• Make sure to move them simultaneously. The
flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the
metal frame of the stapler if they are moved
individually.
[1] [3]
[2]
8050fs1112
2-162

7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open

the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet
[3] by sliding it.
[1]
[3]
II ADJUSTMENT
[2] 8050fs1113
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-

ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into [1]
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1114
2-163

10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] [2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note: [1]
• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be
hooked on the clincher.
II ADJUSTMENT
[5] [4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward.

Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4]
for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be [3]
inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly.
Then, adjust the horizontal position of the sta- [2]
[4]
pler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear
[1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto
the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into
the clincher unit [4].
Note:
• Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at
this time.
[1] 8050fs1116
• The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be
finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
2-164

12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws
for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side.
13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by
rotating the gear for the stapler upward.
Note:
• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler position-
ing jig.
II ADJUSTMENT
14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and
plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the
step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check fol-
lowing 3 stapling operations.
• 1-staple (at rear)
• 1-staple (at front)
• 2-staple
15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
2-165

9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet

cutting parallelism
A. Procedure
1. Measure the length between the folding face [1]
and trimming surface [2] and calculate the paral- A
lelism. Then, check whether it is within the stan-
dard value.
Standard value: parallelism = A-B = ± 1 mm or
less
II ADJUSTMENT
If not, perform the following adjustment. [1] [2]
B 8050fs1117
2. Open the front door [1].

[2]
3. Push up the pressure release lever [2].
4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the convey-
[1]
ance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4].
5. Tighten the screw [3].
[5]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1118
2-166

9.21 LCT tray mis-centering

adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the positioning cor-
rection cannot be done (the mis-centering amount
exceeds the automatic adjustment range of ± 5mm)
even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the
36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the mis-
centering amount.
2. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
3. Open the top cover [2]. [4] [3] [3] [5]
4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then,
slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide
plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same
amount.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
2-167

5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning

bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the
guide plate in the same direction at the same
amount with step 4
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern
No.16 again.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering
amount becomes within the automatic adjust-
ment range.
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
[1] 8050fs1065
2-168

9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper
skew is different with paper supplied from the other
tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined
surface. However, it has just a little effect because
all paper is corrected at the second paper feed sec-
tion.
A. When all printouts are skewed:
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
2. Open the front door of the LCT.
3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket
[1] at the bottom of the LCT.
4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2].
[1] [2]
8050fs1066
2-169

B. When some printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen [3] [2] [2] [4]
the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4],
and the guide plate/right side [5].
4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each
guide plate is in contact with paper.
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
Reference:
• The size indicator on the guide plate is
approximately 2mm wider than the actual
standard size paper. It may cause the skew for
some paper. The skew amount is reduced if
paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[2]
[5]
8050fs1067
2-170

9.23 LCT paper feed roller pres-

sure adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjust-
ment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper
feed.
Note:
• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
purchased separately.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
2. Remove the spring [2]. [5] [4]
3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed
[2]
roller [3] with 2 screws [5].
4. Replace the spring [2].
5. Close the top cover.
6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper
feed.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues
[1]
to occur at the paper feed. [3]
8050fs1068
2-171

9.24 LCT up/down plate horizon-

tal adjustment
Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjust-
ment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or
the up/down wire is replaced.
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side.

4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate
to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at
the front and rear side.
[5] [1] [3] [4]
[2]
[4] [3] [1] [5]
8050fs1069
2-172

9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure

adjustment
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment
when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at
the paper feed.
The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper
type and the operating environment (the no feed
jam is likely in the low temperature environment and
the double feed is likely in the high temperature
II ADJUSTMENT
environment).
A. Procedure
1. Remove LCT from the main body.
2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from
the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1].
3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending
on the symptom.
• The load of the spring changes approximately
10% for a change in its position.
Note:
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
For example, a no feed jam becomes a double
feed jam.
Weak: Double feed jam is corrected. [2] [1]
Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
8050fs1070
2-173

9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper

limit) adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit)
adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge
of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper. The adjustment is performed by changing
the vertical position of the upper limit sensor
(PS109).
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
2. Open the top cover [2]. [6]
3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper
surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4]
with a scale to check whether it is within the [5]
[3]
standard value.
Standard value: 2 to 5mm [1]
Perform the following adjustment if it is not within [4]
the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is
folded even if it is within the standard value.
Note: [2]
• This adjustment affects the pick-up release
amount.
When the adjustment is complete, perform
"9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjust-
ment".
4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit

[5].
6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8]
toward right.
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
2-174


8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically [1] [2]
to make the height of the entrance guide upper
surface and the up/down plate upper surface to
be within the standard value.
If it is not within the standard value and the
height of the up/down plate has to be raised:
•When paper with a convex curl is fed:
Lower the position of the sensor mounting
bracket
If it is not within the standard value and the
II ADJUSTMENT
height of the up/down plate has to be lowered:
•When the edge of the fed paper is folded:
•When paper with a concave curl is fed:
Raise the position of the sensor mounting 8050fs1072
bracket
9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a
screw [1].
2-175

9.27 LCT pick-up release amount

adjustment
Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjust-
ment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The
adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal
position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100).
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Open the top cover [2]. [4]

3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit
[3].
4. Remove 4 screws [5]. [3]
5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6]
toward right.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
2-176

6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed

solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between
the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of [2] [1]
the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is
within the standard value.
Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm
Perform the following adjustment if it is not
within the standard value.
[3] [4]
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
• Before starting the operation, note the origi-
nal position of the solenoid.
8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] hori-

zontally to make the distance between the paper
feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down
plate to be within the standard value.
9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed sole-
noid.
8050fs1074
2-177

9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the 3. Remove the punch unit cover by removing three
punch hole position screws
A. Preparation Punch unit cover

1. Check the following items:
• The finisher is connected to the main body.
• The main body is loaded with the paper based
on the punch specifications.
2. Check the skew of output paper in advance.
• Slide the side guide plate and the rear guide
plate for the main body's feed tray, and align the
II ADJUSTMENT
paper loaded on the main body's tray.

• Check the skew by using the platen copy or
adjustment mode.
3. To check the tilt of the punch hole position, make
a sample copy in the punch mode.
Screws 7165field135i
4. Make three copies each in single side copy
mode and double side copy mode with the
4. Loosen the four adjustment screws of PK.
punch mode to check the skew.
5. Using the mark scale as a guide, move the
punch unit horizontally by the amount of tilt for
B. Procedure
the punch hole position.
1. Measure the position of the sampled punch
1 scale: 0.5%
holes to check the tilt of the position.
A Adjustment screws
Adjust to the left or right
B Mark
Adjustment screws
2. Open the front cover. 7165field128i
6. Retighten the screws.

7. Reinstall the punch unit cover.
8. Make a sample copy of punch mode and
recheck the tilt of the punch hole position.
2-178

9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for 4. Turn the volume fully clockwise and then turn it
the PK paper edge sensor back counterclockwise until the LED corre-
sponding to each volume lights up
A. Preparation
1. Check that the finisher is connected to the main
body.
Volumes
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
II ADJUSTMENT
ing one screw
Punch drive board cover
Punch drive board (PKDB)
Screw 7165field129i LED

7165field130i
3. Power on the main body.
5. Perform the procedure of step 4 for all five vol-
umes.
6. Power off the main body after completing the
adjustment.
7. Reinstall the punch drive board cover.
8. Close the front door of the finisher.
2-179

9.30 PI Centering Adjustment 2. When adjusting for the lower tray, remove two
screws and slide rightward to remove the side
Note: guide plate (rear)
• PI Centering adjustement must be performed
on the upper tray first, then on the lower tray. Pi-W-2
When it is necessary to slide the side guide

plate (rear) a lot, perform step 11 before step 3
and subsequent procedures.
• When tightening two screws of the side guide
plate (rear), be careful not to tighten them too
Side guide plate
II ADJUSTMENT
much. (Tightening torque: less than 5kg/cm) Screws

(rear)
A. Preparation
1. Check that PK adjusting the punch hole vertical 3. Loosen two adjustment screws securing the
position has been completed. side guide plate (rear), and slide it by the twice
2. Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment. the difference. (ie: If there is 1.5mm difference
3. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch in direction of rear side, slide by 3mm to rear
mode. side.)
4. Check the position of each punch hole on the 1 scale : 2 mm
three sheets.
Side guide plate (rear)
B. Procedure
1. Release the hook and remove the adjustment
cover of the side guide plate (rear)
Adjustment cover
Adjustment
screws
Pi-W-3
4. Fasten the two adjustment screws securely to fix

the side guide plate (rear).
5. In case of the lower tray, install the side guide
Side guide plate Hock
plate (rear).
(rear)
6. Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side guide
plate (rear) to the sheet to check that the side
Pi-W-1
guide plate (rear) is parallel to the sheet.
7. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch
mode.
8. Check the position of each punch hole.
9. Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of the
holes is improved.
10. Install the adjustment cover to the side guide
plate (rear).
11. Set A4R size paper to the tray and perform the
cover sheet tray size adjustment in 36 mode.
2-180

9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when 4. Using the mark as a guide, move the guide plate
PK punch is used) laterally by the amount of tilt in the position of
punch holes.
A. Preparation
1. Check the following items:
• PI is connected to FNS.
• The tray of PI is loaded with paper.
2. Check the tilt of output paper in advance.
• Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch mode
selected to check the tilt of punch holes.
3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
II ADJUSTMENT
B. Procedure
1. Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as illus-
trated below and find out in which direction the
punch holes tilt.) Screw securing
the guide plate
Tilting toward Tilting toward
the right edge the left edge
of the sheet of the sheet
Tilting toward Tilting toward

the right edge the left edge
of the sheet of the sheet
7165field143i
7165field142i
5. Retighten the screw securing the guide plate.
2. Open the FNS front cover. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt in the
3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate. position of punch holes is improved.
2-181

II ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
2-182

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW
III SERVICE TOOL 1.2 Installing the USB driver for

ISWTrns
1. ISW Note:
• It is required to install the USB driver for
1.1 Description of the ISW ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this
machine. See the installation procedure file
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the
attached to ISWTrns for the installation proce-
control program stored in the flash ROM on a vari-
dure.
ety of control boards in Minolta's digital copier with-
• Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
out removing the boards from the main body of the
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
control program without replacing the board or to
press the OK button.
install the latest program when replacing the board.
• Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this
[ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW,
machine.
which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to
the digital copier. The software rewrites the control
program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main
body directly.
III SERVICE TOOL
3-1

ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.3 Setup B. HELP + CHECK mode

The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the
1.3.1 Board used for the ISW main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing
"HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is
ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting designed specifically for ISW to be started when the
the control program in CF5001. overall control program is installed but the operation
• Overall control board (OACB) board control program is not installed because the
• Printer controller board (PRCB) 25 mode cannot be started in such case.
• Operation board/1 (OB1)
• RADF control board (DFCB) C. 25 mode
• FNS control board (FNSCB) The 25 mode is available only if both the overall
• See IP SHB for the printer controller. control program and the operation board control
ROM replacement is needed for boards other than program are installed.
the above.
1.3.2 Data flow
The following shows the ISW data flow.

III SERVICE TOOL
PC OACB OB1
PRCB DFCB
FNSCB
Note:
• The control program on other boards cannot
be written until that for the overall control
board (OACB) is written.
1.3.3 ISW transfer type
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as

follows.
A. Power ON mode
The power ON mode is used if no program is
installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is
faulty.
If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB pro-
gram becomes possible to be written at power ON.
No display appears on the operation panel and the
timer LED flashes even if the operation board con-
trol program is installed because the OACB controls
the power for the operation board.
3-2

1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer
A. When writing a new program (because

replacing a board or failed to rewrite the
program)
Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition
Overall control Flashing timer LED Power ON mode Overall control program is not installed
board No display on the or faulty
operation panel
Operation board /1 Error code display HELP + CHECK The overall control program is installed
mode but the operation board program is not
installed or faulty
Others Error code display 25 mode Both the overall control program and
the operation board program is
installed
B. When updating the version of the program

Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition
Overall control Normal 25 mode All program has been installed
III SERVICE TOOL

board
Operation board /1 Normal 25 mode
Others Normal 25 mode
3-3

1.3.5 Setup procedure B. Power on mode

a. Procedure
A. Connecting a PC
1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2).
a. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side 2. Check the timer LED is flushing.
cover/2 [2]. The control program becomes possible to be

written in this state.
3. Execute the operation according to the proce-

dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
Note:
• Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the
ISW data is being rewritten.
4. The operation screen appears if it is completed

successfully.
[1]
If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The rela-
III SERVICE TOOL
[2] tionship between ISW resulting operation and

the operational LEDs."
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB

(Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
C. HELP + CHECK mode
a. Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and

"CHECK button."
2. "ISW write mode select menu screen"

Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1]
[2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 9.EXIT
Note:
3-4

3. "ISW device select menu screen" 6. "ISW executing screen"

Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the Execute the operation according to the proce-
numeric keys. dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 ISW Trns."
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen. "Result screen" appears once ISW is com-
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU [MODE:PC] plete.
1. GRAPHIC CONTROL
2. PRINTER CONTROL
3. OPERATION CONTROL
4. ADF EXECUTING
5. VIF
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
Note:
• Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATION
CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this 7. "Result screen"
mode does not support them. • The operation is completed successfully
"NORMAL END" appears.
III SERVICE TOOL

4. "Operation control - item select menu screen"
Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individu-
ally or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a *** NORMAL END ***
time.
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]
1. 01 PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT

2. 02
3. 03
• The operation is terminated abnormally
4. 04
5. 05 "ABNORMAL END" appears.
Check the error code on the screen if the
6. ALL
rewriting is terminated abnormally.
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
*** ABNORMAL END ***
INPUT DEVICE ERROR
5. "ISW start screen" (ERROR CODE : XX)
Select 1 (YES) to start ISW.

Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT
ISW START OK ?
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or

select 9 (EXIT) to exit.
"PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 1. YES 2. NO appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the
main switch (SW2).
3-5

b. Error code
Error code Causes No. of resulting

operation
01 Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit (1)
1F Program error (1)
41 Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
42 Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
43 Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)
81 Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation (3)
board program)
C1 Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)
C2 Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)
C3 ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) (8)
C4 Output device error such as the input time out (6)
E1 Erase error (9)
E2 Write error (9)
E3 Communication error (4)
E9 I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board (4)
III SERVICE TOOL
and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
EA I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the (4)
operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
EB I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and (4)
the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
F0 Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F1 Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F2 Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F3 Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)
F8 I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the (7)
F9 I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the (7)
FA I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the opera- (7)
tion board (at ISW for the operation board program)
FB I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the oper- (7)
ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
FC I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the oper- (4)
ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
• Resulting operations
(1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again. the flash ROM on the overall control board may
(2) Check the ISW transfer data file. be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace
(3) Check the connection of the communication the overall control board.
cable from the input device (PC). (6) An error is detected from the board on which
(4) Check I/F between the overall control board you want to rewrite the program. Check the
and the operation board. board on which you want to execute ISW.
(5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is
faulty.
3-6

(7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is D. 25 mode

faulty.
a. Procedure
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be 1. Enter the 25 mode.
faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace
the operation board/1. 2. "25 mode menu screen"
(8) The checksum calculated after the program is Press the [11 ISW] key.
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the 3. "ISW mode menu screen"
Select a program for which ISW is executed.
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly. 4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to
(9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which be data waiting condition.
ISW is executed.
Note:
The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached
• See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since select-
its life. Replace the object board. ing "Operation panel" switches to the HELP
The checksum calculated after the program is + CHECK mode.
written does not become equal to the ROM
5. Execute the operation according to the proce-
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
III SERVICE TOOL

same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
ISW Trns."
may not be downloaded properly.
Note:
• Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting
Note:
the ISW data is being written.
• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-
gram on the overall control board, the opera-
tion panel cannot be displayed even if the
main switch is ON because the program con-
trolling the whole components has been lost.
Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is
the case.
• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-
gram on the operation board/1, it cannot be
started in the 25 mode because the error code
is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP +
CHECK mode if such is the case.
3-7

E. The relationship between ISW operation and

the operational LEDs
The following shows the display of the operation
panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed.
No. Operation Timer LED Power save LED

1 CPU initialization OFF OFF
2 During memory check OFF OFF
3 Memory check error (waiting data from PC) Blink OFF
4 ISW processing (receiving data) OFF Blink
5 ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) OFF Blink
6 Transfer data error Blink Blink
7 Flash ROM write error Blink Steady lit
8 Memory check successful and reboot OFF OFF
III SERVICE TOOL
3-8

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns 2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns

When the ISW Trns program has been installed
2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the
transfer file (update data) is stored. When this
Note:
setting completes, the ISW Trns program is
• The explanation screen here is used based on
ready to run.
another model. Therefore, there is a thing dif-
ferent from an actual screen.
Step Procedure
2.1.1 Installing the application program 1 Boot the PC.
Install the ISW Trns on the PC. 2 [Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu to
run the ISW Trns program.
Step Procedure 3 [ISW Trns dialog box]
1 Boot the PC.
2 Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and double-
click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the
installer.
If an old version ISW Trns program is
present, uninstall it first, then start the
III SERVICE TOOL

setup operation. Click OK to set up a folder in which the
transfer file (update data) is stored.
3 [ISW Trns setup window] This dialog box will not appear when ISW
Confirm the installation folder as instructed Trns is run next time.
by on-screen guidance and click Next.
By default, the program installs in 4 [Option window]
[C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for
Minolta].
To change the installation folder, click
Browse and type a new folder name.
4 [Program folder confirmation window]
Confirm the ISW Trns program installation
folder as instructed by on-screen guidance
and click Next.
By default, the ISW Trns program installs
in [ISW Trns for Minolta]. Set up a folder in which the transfer file
To change the installation folder, either (update data) is stored and click Make
type a new folder name or select one from Folder.
the list of existing folders on display. By default, the folder in which the ISW Trns
5 [Next disk insertion request window] program has installed
Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by on- (C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for
screen guidance and click OK. Minolta) has been set up as a storage
folder (data folder).
6 [Information dialog box] To change the storage folder, click Browse
Click OK as instructed by on-screen guid- and select a new folder or type its full-path
ance. name in directly the edit box.
This procedure will add an ISW Trns icon
to the Start menu.
7 [Setup completion window]
Click Complete as instructed by on-screen
guidance.
8 The ISW Trns install exits automatically.
3-9

UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Step Procedure
Note:
• Clicking Make Folder will create the fol-
lowing hierarchy of folders branching
off from the new storage folder:
ISWTrns for Minolta
CF5001
Adf
Graphic control
Euro
Japan
Usa
Printer
Vif
Operation
Fns
III SERVICE TOOL
5 [Option window]
Click OK.
Note:
• This procedure will save the data fold-
ers created in Step 4 to the INI file for
the ISW Trns program.
6 [ISW Trns main window]
The ISW Trns main window opens.
3-10

2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview

The ISW Trns program, when run, comes up
with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns
main window lets you select, verify, and trans-
fer a transfer file (update data) and display
information in it.
A detailed description of its functions follows:
50img_dc0001 CF5001
2003/ 9/15
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001
III SERVICE TOOL

50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
* Sample display : Display information may be different from what you actually will see on your machine.
1 A Select Type frame 3 Send file information frame

Select conditions for a transfer file (update List the files that are transferred actually on the
data). When you select all the four combo basis of the information specified in frames 1
boxes, folder 5 is set up on the basis of the and 2 . Click File Check to view a checksum
information set in the INI file. of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??).
The settings of the combo boxes selected are
saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click 4 File Status frame
File Send. The ISW Trns program comes up View detailed information about the version file
as it is selected in 6 .
with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with
The table below presents differences in the
these combo box settings when runs next time.
ways transfer files are displayed according to
their data distribution types.
2 Version selection frame
This frame lets you select which version of a
transfer file you want transmitted when more
than one version is stored in a single folder.
3-11

Data sources appearing in the detailed file informa-

tion list
Display title ORIGINAL (Batch data) DIVIDE (Divided data)

File Name File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file
File Date Date of the version selection file Date of the version selection file
File Time Time of the version selection file Time of the version selection file
File size File size of the version selection file File size of the version selection file
ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)
SP ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)
Message Conversion For development use For development use
Machine Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Country Combo box display Combo box display
Board Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Data Format Header information (Binary) Header information (Binary)
III SERVICE TOOL
5 Version Folder edit box 7 Browse Version File button

When Select Type frame 1 is established, the Click Browse button to open the folder selection
full-path folder name is displayed to reflect the window and select a folder for 5 .
data folder and the INI file information set up in
the option window. If the transfer file exists in a 8 Send file information display list
folder different from the data folder, change the List the names of files that are actually trans-
folder name to that folder by using Browse 7
mitted when a version file is selected in 6 . A
or rewriting the folder name directly.
count of the number of files that are actually
transmitted is indicated in a checksum file
Those transfer files in the folder that meet the attached to each transfer file (write data). If not
INI file conditions are listed in File list box 6 .
all the transfer files are stored in folder 5 or if
extra files are included in it, the error message
6 Version File selection list box “Send files not found or invalid file name in the
Lists those display files existing in the folder set folder” is displayed. This check is not made.
in 5 . Clicking the File Check button in 9 calculates
a checksum of the display files as a whole and
Display Files are marked by a wildcard name compares it with the checksum stored in the
(such as 85img*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. If checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the transfer
multiple versions of a file exist in the folder, file (write data), displaying the result of that
therefore, multiple versions would appear in comparison.
this list box accordingly.
Example: 50img_dc0001AAA.bol
50img_dc002AAA.bol
The files in this list are sorted by name. When

the list opens, the last display item in the list is
preselected. Change the choice to establish
the version of transfer files to transmit.
3-12

9 File Check button 2.1.4 Parallel port setup

Click this button when send files are listed in If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with
the Send File Info list in 8 , and a file check- the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting
sum of the transfer files displayed (file check- of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW
sum) is calculated and attached to each file. Trns does not support parallel data transfers. If
Further, the calculated checksum is compared a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC
with the checksum storage file (*.SUM) set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted
attached to the transfer file (write data) to dis- by an error occurring in between. It would be
play the result of the comparison in the follow- necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode
ing format: before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP set-
ting.
[OK] = Matched
[NG] = Unmatched Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are
[??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found given below.
10 File Send Button

Step Procedure
Perform transmission of transfer files
1 Boot the PC.
2 Open the System icon in the Control Panel
III SERVICE TOOL

and click the Device Manager tab. Then,
search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/LPT1).
Note:
• If LPT1 appears as “ECP Printer Port
(LPT1),” then it is an ECP port.
• If LPT1 appears as “Printer Port
(LPT1),” then it is a regular parallel port.
3 With an ECP printer port, change the
BIOS setting of the PC to disable the ECP
port.
Note:
• Because the BIOS setting depends on
the PC, check with your system admin-
istrator on how to disable ECP mode.
4 When the BIOS change is complete, open
the System icon in the Control panel and
change the parallel port driver.
5 Run a send test to verify the successful
operation.
Note:
• If a transfer succeeds on one copier
model, then transfers would be suc-
cessful on all models.
3-13

2.2 Copying Transfer Data 8 Click Copy to copy the selected transfer
(Update Data) files (update data) to the folder created at
ISW Trns setup.
Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer Note:
data (update data) to the PC. • To copy all the files (update data) dis-
played in the Original Files field, click
Copy All, instead of Copy.
Step Procedure • The folder name created at ISW Trns
1 Boot the PC. setup is displayed above the Copied
File field.
2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to
• The transfer files that have been copied
successfully so far are listed in full-
3 Click the Option menu. path name in the lower part of the Cop-
ied File list view.
4 [Option window]
The transfer files that have not been
copied successfully are listed in the
Failed to Copy Files list view.
Causes of copy errors:
1. A file with the same name existed and
the O/W (overwrite) check box was not
checked.
III SERVICE TOOL
2. The storage destination folder could

not be found.
Click Data Copy. 3. Attempted to overwrite an overwrite
protected file.
5 [File Copy window]
• To update existing transfer files (update
data), check the O/W (overwrite) check
box.
9 When the copying completes, click
Refresh.
10 If more update disks are involved, repeat
Steps 5 to 9.
Mount an update disk on the PC and click 11 Click Cancel to return to the option win-
Browse. dow.
6 Select the folder on drive A that contains 12 [Option window]
the transfer file (update data) as a source Click OK.
file.
Note:
• The selected folder is displayed in the
upper section in the Original Files field.
• The transfer files (update data) that are
stored in the selected folder are dis-
played in the lower section in the Origi-
nal Files field.
7 Select the transfer files (update data) you
want copied from the lower section in the
Original Files field.
Note:
• You can select multiple transfer files
(update data).
• To copy all the files (update data) dis-
played, skip this step to go to Step 8
directly.
3-14

2.3 Connecting the CF5001 2.4 Updating

The ISW connector is hidden under the drum 2.4.1 Update operation overview
cover. Detach this cover to run ISW. Follow the steps below to update the ROM data
on each control board using ISW Trns. For
A. Procedure
more operational details, see the relevant parts
(1) Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/
of this section.
2 [2]
Step Procedure
1 Check the ROM version of the copier before
proceeding with updating.
(See 2.4.2 “Checking the ROM version of
the copier (before updating).”)
2 Run the ISW Trns program.
(See 2.4.4 ”Running ISW Trns.”).
3 Set the copier in ISW receive mode.
(See 2.4.3 “Preparing the copier to trans-
[1] fer.”)
4 Select conditions for transfer files (update
III SERVICE TOOL

[2] data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.5 “Selecting
transfer file (update data) conditions.”)
(2) Connect the PC port and the copier ISW con- 5 Select a version of transfer files (update
nector with interface cable. data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.6 “Selecting a
version of transfer files (update data).”)
IEEE1284 port 6 Verify the transfer files (update data)

selected with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.7“Verify-
ing transfer files (update data).”
PC
7 Transmit the transfer files (update data) with
IWS Trns. (See 2.4.8 “Transmitting transfer
files (update data).”)
8 To update ROM data on more control
boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7.
9 Exit the ISW Trns program.
(See 2.4.9 “Exiting ISW Trns.”)
10 Verify the ROM version of the copier after
updating. (See 2.4.10 “Verifying the ROM
version of the copier (after updating).”)
USB (TypeB) port
Interface cable
Note:
3-15

2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier 2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data)
(before updating) conditions
Before updating ROM data, check the ROM Select various conditions for selecting the
version of the existing control program in the 25 transfer files (update data) in the ISW Trns
mode. main window. Conditions to select are:
• (Machine) The name of the model on which

Step Procedure
ROM data is updated.
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch. • (Country) The destination of the transfer files
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold- (update data)
ing down the copy count setup buttons 2 • (Board) The name of the board on which ROM
and 5, to enable 25 mode.
data is updated
3 [25 mode menu window] • (Divide) The type of the transfer files (update
Check the ROM version by following the
data)
copier-specific procedure.
Note:
• For operating instructions, refer to the Step Procedure
Adjustment section of the service man-
ual supplied for the copier.
In the ISW Trns main window, click in
III SERVICE TOOL
the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and

2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer. select the name of the model on which to
Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put update ROM data from the pulldown
the copier into ISW transfer wait state. menu.
CF5001
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-
ing down the copy count setup buttons 2
and 5, to enable 25 mode.
2 In the ISW Trns main window, click in
3 [25 mode menu window] the [Country] field in [Select Type] and
Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state select the destination of the transfer files
by following the copier-specific procedure. (update data) from the pulldown menu.
Note:
•“ ISW transfer wait state” is the state of CF5001
the copier with the “START” key being Euro
shown in the display area. Japan
• For operating instructions, refer to the USA
2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.

Run the ISW Trns program.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and
3-16

2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files

Step Procedure (update data)
3 In the ISW Trns main window, click in When a transfer file (update data) has been
the [Board] field in [Select Type] and select chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may
the name of the board on which to update be available in multiple versions. Here, select a
ROM from the pulldown menu.
particular version of a transfer file (update data)
for use in the actual data transfer.
CF5001
USA
Step Procedure
In the ISW Trns main window, select a
transfer file (update data) of the version
that is used in the actual data transfer from
among the files listed in the [File] field in
[Version].
4 In the ISW Trns main window, click in 50img_dc0001

CF5001
the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and select 2003/ 8/15
50img_dc000.b01
a method of dividing the transfer files

(update data) from the pulldown menu. CF5001
III SERVICE TOOL

50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
CF5001
USA Note:
C1/C4(ALL) • The version of a transfer file (update
data) can be determined from its file
ORIGINAL
DIVIDED name.
Example:
Note: 50img_DC001AAA.b01 .. Version 1
• Normally, select ORIGINAL as the 50img_DC002AAA.b01 .. Version 2
method of division. 2 The target file (update data) may not be
• Select DIVIDED for large ROM data (e.g. shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it
for Main Control Unit), that is divided exists in a folder different from the data
into several files (extension .001.b01, folders set in the Option screen. Click
etc.) to be stored to several floppy Browse and find the appropriate file to
disks for distribution. select.
CF5001
Di850
Note:
• Clicking Browse will open the Select
File window.
3-17

2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data) 2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data)
Once a particular version of a transfer file When transfer files (update data) are estab-
(update data) is selected, the transfer files lished, run a data transfer to the copier.
(update data) that are transmitted actually are
listed in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main Step Procedure
window. Verify the validity of the transfer files
1 Press the “START” key on the copier while
(data) for transfer. it is in ISW transfer wait state.
Note:
Step Procedure • The “START” key is displayed in the
display area on the copier.
In the ISW Trns main window, click File 2 [ISW Trns main window]
Check in [Send File Infor].. Click File Send in [Send File Infor] in the
ISW Trns main window.
50img_dc0001
2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
50img_dc0001
2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001
50img_dc0001.b01
CF5001
50img_dc0001.b00
50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
III SERVICE TOOL
2 Check to see if OK appears in the [File

Sum] field in [Send File Infor] in the ISW 3 Transfer files (update data) are transmitted to
Trns main window. the copier.
Note: Note7: While data is being transferred to a
• A file that is labeled NG is inappropriate copier, an LED or indicator flashes
as a transfer file (update data). Try to to indicate a data transfer in
copy the file again. If you can not suc- progress. The mode of such indica-
ceed to copy it again, the original file tion varies from one copier to
may be corrupted. another.
Note8: ISW Trns produces an indication to
• Transfer files (update data) may be
designate a data transfer in
marked ?? when enough information is
progress.
not available to verify their validity.
Note9: If a data transfer is aborted due to
When a transfer file is labeled, check if
any trouble occurring with the copier
the checksum file (*.sum) was copied
or ISW Trns, turn the copier main
correctly.
switch OFF, then ON to retry the
data transfer by ISW Trns. In this
case, a condition indication and
necessary operation vary depend-
ing on each model. Please refer to
service manual for the copier.
4 To update ROM data on more control boards,
repeat the step in 2.4.5 “Selecting transfer file
(update data) conditions,” to 2.4.8 “Transmit-
ting transfer files (update data).”
3-18

2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns. 2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier
When the update of the ROM data on the con- (after updating)
trol boards completes, exit the ISW Trns pro- When the update of the ROM data completes,
gram. verify the ROM version of the control program
in the 25 mode.
Step Procedure
1 Exit the ISW Trns program. Step Procedure
2 Turn OFF the PC. 1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
3 Turn OFF the copier main switch. 2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-
4 Disconnect the parallel interface cable ing down the copy count setup buttons 2
from the PC and the copier. and 5, to enable 25 mode.
Note: 3 [25 mode menu window]
• Turn OFF the PC and copier before dis- Check the ROM version by following the
connecting the parallel interface cable copier-specific procedure.
from them. Note:
• For operating instructions, refer to the
III SERVICE TOOL
3-19

2.5 ISW Trns Messages

The ISW Trns program displays dialogue messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Def-
initions of these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status.
Message Display status

Cannot open a checksum file Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes
include a corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot read a checksum file Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible
causes include a shortage of memory and an OS prob-
lem.
Cannot open a file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a
corrupted file and a file in use.
File transmission complete File transfer completed.
Cannot open the LPT port Opening of the LPT port failed.
Communications port setup acquisition A call to GetCommSate failed.
error
Communications port setup error A call to GetCommSate failed.
III SERVICE TOOL
Cannot open a send file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a
corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot send a Term Test file Transmission of a communications test block failed.
1. The copier is not ready to receive.
2. The cable is out of position.
3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted.
Unsuccessful file transmission The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes
include a cable out of position.
Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a
cable out of position.
Starting file transmission. OK? A message seeking confirmation at the start of file
transmission.
Send file not selected No files exist on the send file list.
Canceled Transmission of a file in progress was canceled. CAN-
CEL is normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with
the INI file.
Default data folder created A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder.
Invalid folder name An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name
with a drive name, such as C:\.
Default data folder not set. A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is
Set a folder. displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time.
Unsuccessful thread creation The creation of a thread failed.
Copying the selected file. OK? File copy start message
Copying all files to the default data folder. File copy start message
OK?
No send file available No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.
3-20

Message Display status

Unable to copy several files 1. The destination folder does not exist.
2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an
attempt is made to copy to a file having the same file
name.
3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file
4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another
application or OS problem)
File copying end File copying completed.
Send file not found, or invalid file name in The number of divisions of a send file recorded in the
the folder. Check. folder. Check. checksum file and the number of files
actually existing do not
match.
1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data
folder. Delete possibly invalid file names from the
folder list.
2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Iden-
tify the wanting files in the folder list and recopy them.
III SERVICE TOOL
3-21

2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns 2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer

A. “Cannot open a file” error
If errors occur while running the ISW Trns pro- • The file is used by any other program or by the
gram, take the actions suggested below to cor- system.
rect them. → Close that other program. If the file transfer.
still fails, reboot Windows.
2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns
• Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file
B. “Cannot send a Term Test file” error
→ Set up again.
• The cable is not in firm position.
• The setup disk is corrupted. → Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm
→ Verify the setup disk and then set up again. position or if the cable is not impaired.
• The copier is not ready to receive.
2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a
combo box item is selected → Check to see if the copier is ready to receive.
• The send file is not stored in the folder.
C. “Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT
→ Check to see if the send file is stored in the folder port” error
appearing in the [Folder] text box in [Versions]. • The cable is not in firm position.
Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage
→ Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm.
location is unknown.
position or if the cable is not impaired.
III SERVICE TOOL
• Check to see if the base data folder setting in the • Invalid data has been transmitted.
option window is not wrong. → Check to from the file information window to see
→ Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File Copy]
if the receive mode (receiving board type) of the
function if the file storage location is unknown.
copier and the send file on the PC match.
• Invalid file name (altered) → If the file is transmitted for the first time,
→ The file name of a file must be used exactly as it check with its vendor.
is delivered. If a file is renamed, it cannot be
• The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode.
displayed or selected. If a file name has been
→ Consulting the manual, free the parallel port from
altered, return it to its original file name. ECP mode.
• Invalid folder name (altered) • Compatibility between the PC parallel port and
→ If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the
the copier port.
option window is renamed, it cannot be located.
→ Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans
Restore the original folder name and check. mission performance.
• Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.
2.6.3 NG produced by a file check
• Corrupted send file
→ Copy the file again and recheck. If NG recurs, 2.7 Connecting to the ISW con-
check with the vendor of that file. nector
2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check The ISW connector is at the right side of the
• With any other model, the checksum file (*.SUM) copier.
had not been copied when the send file was cop-
ied to the PC. 2.7.1 Procedure
• Connect the PC port and the copier ISW port
→ Copy the checksum to the same folder as the file
with a interface cable.
is copied. It would be copied automatically if the
[File Copy] function is used. • Connect port is correct.
→ Use the USB port or Parallel port.
3-22

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW
3 INTERNET ISW
3.1 What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or
browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own
program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2 Operating environment

To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the
Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1
B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
(1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF.
(2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF.
III SERVICE TOOL

(3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function.
*1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.
Note:
• The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above condi-
tions are released.
However, the mails are able to have period of validity.
• The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the
low power mode.
3.3 Main features

With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.
A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2

By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3
(1) Overall control board (I)
(2) Printer control board (C)
(3) Operation board /1 (O)
(4) RADF control board (F)
(5) FNS control board (N)
*
2 To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.
*
3 The available boards are different depending on the copier models.
B. Internet ISW using Web utility

By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten
automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4
*
4 In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.
3-23

INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3.4 Initial setting

To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall
address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.
Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as
account registration must be set on the mail server separately.
For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system".
3.4.1 Setting on Control panel
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go
to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser".
a. Procedure
1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel.
2. Select "[1] System initial setting".
3. Select "[3] IP address setting".
4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5
III SERVICE TOOL
5. Reboot the copier.

*
5 Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.
3.4.2 Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked
PC *6.
*
6 Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.
(Considerations)
• In any setting item, space cannot be set.
• If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error mes-
sage displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
• Web's layout may change without prior notice.
3-24

a. Procedure
1. Start the Web browser. *7
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel".
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.
*
7 If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer
or Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
III SERVICE TOOL

Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page
3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
3-25

4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key
operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension
for maintenance].
Environment setup screen

III SERVICE TOOL
5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode
change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet
ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance Extension for maintenance screen
3-26

6. Click [Initial Setting].
III SERVICE TOOL

Internet ISW main screen
7. Set proxy server.

When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
3-27

Enableproxy Select [no] if you do not use proxy

Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy
Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8 If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
from the following.
Type1 [USER USER@HOST]
Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]
Type3 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→SITE HOSTNAME]
Type4 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→USER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP Address If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Port Number If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.
User name on the proxy If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account
server name for the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password
for the proxy server.
*
8 Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.
III SERVICE TOOL
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
3-28

Program server address Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter
the following address in the test box at the right.
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program Enter the account name of the program server.
server
Password for the program Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-
out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
III SERVICE TOOL

9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Select a protocol to receive programs.

Program server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are
stored.
Target directory For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the rela-
tive path from the home directory.
Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program Enter the account name of the program server.
server
Password for the Program Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-
out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
3-29

If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
10. Perform the download test.

This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items
have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the
error message.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
III SERVICE TOOL
3-30

If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be
input errors. Check the initial setting again.
III SERVICE TOOL
3-31

3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

3.5.1 Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the
mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program.
This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [E-
Mail remote notification system].
A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows.
(1) Overall control board: I0
(2) Printer control board: C0
(3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5
(4) RADF control board: F0
(5) FNS control board: N0
B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten.
C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail.
To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword
III SERVICE TOOL
(command) description. The following are the commands and the options.
Command Option Description

ISW Subject board name Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered)
The specifiable boards are as follows.
[I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0]
The available boards are different depending on mod-
els. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject
board name=File name].
Timeout Specifies period of validity of mail.
(From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is
specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.)
When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail
reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is
not performed due to expiration.
ISWHELP — Returns a help mail with the above command use
descriptions.
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set
beforehand.
I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin

O1 bootO1.bin
O2 bootO2.bin
O3 bootO3.bin
O4 bootO4.bin
O5 bootO5.bin
3-32

3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier.
You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9
When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following.
• The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of
the copier *10 accurately.
• One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described,
the second and later ones are ignored.
• Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
• With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode.
(Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.)
• Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described
in mails.
• Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other
characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned.
• Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored.
• Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers.
Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to
III SERVICE TOOL

receive.
• Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail
software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be
returned from the copier.
*
9 Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing.
*
10 Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting].
*
11 Linefeed is not available.
*
12 Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
(1) Transmitting ISW command

The transmission mail must have the following descriptions.
• In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting.
For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system".
• In To, type mail address of a copier.
• In Body, type a command.
3-33

An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
Password for authentication

aaaaa.com
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13

When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the
III SERVICE TOOL
operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following
is returned from the copier.
*
13 The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation
panel display.
*
14 During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
3-34

An example of return mail (ISW complete)

When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
III SERVICE TOOL

However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted.
When specifying a file name

When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name.
In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Inter-
net ISW setting.
Transmission mail
ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30
When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity

On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If
period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period,
ISW is not performed by that mail.
3-35

Transmission mail
aaaaa.com
5 minutes is set for timeout

III SERVICE TOOL
Return mail
aaaaa.com
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
3-36

(2) Transmitting ISWHELP command

Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail.
It is useful if you forget how to use command and options.
Transmission mail
ISWHelp
Return mail
III SERVICE TOOL
3-37

3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility

3.6.1 Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail
remote notification system].
*
15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.
3.6.2 How to use
A. Going to Internet ISW page

The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
aaaaa.com
III SERVICE TOOL
Internet ISW main screen
Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
3-38

B. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to down-
load, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are
acquired from the program server address set beforehand.
I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin

O1 bootO1.bin
O2 bootO2.bin
O3 bootO3.bin
O4 bootO4.bin
O5 bootO5.bin
When the above input completes, click [ISW].
C. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
according to the message in red.
III SERVICE TOOL
ISW execution screen
When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.

If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.
If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
3-39

D. Checking ISW status

III SERVICE TOOL
ISW status check screen
This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
• ISW is downloading
• ISW is writing
• Finished *16
• ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem
• ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime
• ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory
*
16 Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
E. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet
ISW main screen].
3-40

3.7 Precautions for use

3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her
agreement beforehand.
Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.
If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.
3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if
the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors
occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program
using the ISWTrns.
<How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW.
III SERVICE TOOL

Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK
button and then perform ISW.
For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"
*
17 Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute.
*
18 No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.
3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by
one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19
Priority 1 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N)

Priority 2 Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O)
Priority 3 Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
*
19 In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted
ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensur-
ing reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal
mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
3-41

3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

3.8.1 What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the
client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled.
3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type:

All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW.
3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used.
A. Type 1: USER user@host

This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy.
III SERVICE TOOL
In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the
proxy server, this type may be used.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description

USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program
server's address
PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host

It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1.
Command

OPEN host ftp expanded Sends program server's address
function:
Defined by
each server
USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever
3-42

C. Type 3: FW user → FW password → SITE host

This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the
proxy sever (firmware).
In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy
sever, this type may be used.
Command

USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name
SITE host ftp expanded Sends program server's address
function:
Defined by
each server
USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever
III SERVICE TOOL

D. FW user name → FW password → USER user@host
It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3.
Command

USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name
USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program
server's address
3.8.4 Remarks
• For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used.
• Type 1 is used in many proxy servers.
If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use
Type 1 in the meantime.
3-43

MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting
customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
4.2 Operation environment

Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function
works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does
not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine
operation is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
III SERVICE TOOL
(1) Main power switch is OFF.

(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*
1 Popper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine
to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".
*2 Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving
server.
4.3 Initial setting

In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
A. Setting on operation panel

In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on opera-
tion panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.
a. Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*
1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask sys-
tem administrator for details.
3-44

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in
order to use Web browser.
*
2 Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.
Note:
• No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the
E-mail address.
()<> ;:¥"[]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the
message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
• Web design is subject to change without notice.
(1) How to set

a. Procedure
1. Start up Web browser *1.
2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].
When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
III SERVICE TOOL

*
1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system
administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do
not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copier Web utilities main page
3-45

3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
Environment setup log in page
4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
III SERVICE TOOL
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page
3-46

5. Set the transmission setting.

In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine
administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1 To specify E-mail address of machine manager.

The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.
DNS Server IP Address Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.
Time difference *1 The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.
Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (-
12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is
input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 The IP address of SMTP sever.
Condition Informing Address *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
E-Mail Transmission *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
III SERVICE TOOL

*1 The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
Web.
*2 Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page
3-47

6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.

III SERVICE TOOL
3-48

(2) Test mail sending

Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager
address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-con-
firm the setting following to error message.
a. Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change
the mode then click the initial setting.
Use the password for changing modes.
III SERVICE TOOL

Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)
3-49

The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
there are some restrictions.
III SERVICE TOOL
E-Mail reception setting page
3-50

2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.
Enable E-mail notification Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.
Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier.
The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.
Receiving mail server The IP address of receiving mail server.
Kind of mail spool Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].
User name on the server *1 The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.
Password *2 The password for the above user name.
E-Mail Address of this copy E-mail address of the copier.
machine Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].
Nickname *3 The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.
It can be blank.
CE Password *2 Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.
The copier uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)
- No Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)
III SERVICE TOOL

- Only illegal mails Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the
- All mails mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or
the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger.
Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
Administrator E-Mail address Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails]
is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission
*4 and copier reception on the mail.
Default is [No].
Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP)
server attests.
Default is [Yes].
*
1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.
*
2 No echo back from the password.
*
3 Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
*4 Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].
3. Click "Apply" to finish input.
3-51

4. Test mail sending and receiving.

Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one
transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test]
to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.

Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on
Step2.
Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.
Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set
on Step2.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.

III SERVICE TOOL
3-52

4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system

A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
• JOB memory list

• User management list
• Font pattern list
• Machine management list 1
• Adjustment data list
• Parameter list
• E.K.C. management list
• Machine management list 2
• Counter list
• Pixel ratio data list
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
III SERVICE TOOL

Command Options Explanation Mini-
mum
GETLOG [List output] The [List output] specified by the following is returned by G
mail.
JOB [JOB memory list] J
USER [User management list] U
FONT [Font pattern list] F
MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 1] M
ADJUSTMENT [Adjustment data list] A
PARAMETER [Parameter list] P
EKC [EKC management list] E
2MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 2] 2
COUNTER [Counter list] C
PIXEL [Pixel ratio data list] PI
ALL All of above list data. AL
Not specified Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.
CHPASS [OldPasswd] [New- To change the password used to certify mail. C
Passwd]
[OldPasswd] Specify current password
[NewPasswd] Specify new password
HELP Not specified Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H
3-53

B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on
the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accord-
ingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above
table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
• Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-
ence.
• When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
• As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128
and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
• Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
• Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-
wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.
III SERVICE TOOL
• Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is
ignored.
• Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
• Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
• Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
• While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
• The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the
mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*
1 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.
*
2 Return cannot be used.
3-54

(1) Send GETLOG command

Following should be described in the sending mail.
• Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.
• To: Input E-mail address of the copier.
• Body: Input command.
a. Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address
of the copier
CE password
III SERVICE TOOL

Command
3-55

b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1
Serial number
of copier
Mail address of
the sender
Nickname of
the copier
III SERVICE TOOL
Requested
counter list
*
1 Language of the returned mail is English only.
3-56

c. When option is not specified

GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.
Sending mail [GetLog]
Example of returned mail
III SERVICE TOOL
3-57

d. To receive multiple data list

Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the
same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail
are returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored
and only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
e. When unrecognizable option is specified.

Sending mail
[GetLog Log]
Returned mail
[Option Not Found → GetLog Log]
III SERVICE TOOL
(2) Send CHPASS command

The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less let-
ters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.
Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE pass-
word] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.
a. Example of correct password change

In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully. → New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [Old-
Passwd], it is treated as illegal mail.
b. Example of invalid password change

Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Returned mail
[Old Password is Invalid. → ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password. → ChPass Sitios]
When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
3-58

(3) Send HELP command

The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you
forget how to use command and option.
Sending mail [Help]
Returned mail
III SERVICE TOOL
4.5 Disabling system

In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable
E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
3-59

III SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
3-60

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1 Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)
x 10,000 copies Service

Service item
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
Maintenance
Main 49
Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
body times
copies
Periodic check (1)
24
Every 200,000 z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (2)
12
Every 400,000 z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (3)
8
times
copies
Periodic check (4)
4
Every 1,000,000 z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (5)
3
Every 1,500,000 z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (6)
IV SERVICE
2
Every 2,000,000 z z
times
copies
Periodic check (7)
1
Every 2,500,000 z
time
copies
Periodic check (8)
1
Every 4,000,000 z
time
copies
Maintenance
49
AFR-20 *1 Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (1) *1
2
Every 1,800,000 z z
times
copies
*1 Perform the periodic check (1) for the AFR-20 at 2 times (1,800,000 copies and 3,600,000 copies).
4-1

SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
x 10,000 copies Service

Service item
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
Maintenance
49
C-208 Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (1)
8
Every 600,000 z z
times
copies
Periodic check (2)
1
Every 2,500,000 z
time
copies
Maintenance
49
Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (1)
24
Every 200,000 z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (2)
FN-120/ 12
FN-9 times
copies
Periodic check (3)
4
Every 1,000,000 z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (4)
1
Every 2,500,000 z
time
copies
Cover Maintenance
49
Inserter Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
D copies
Periodic check (1)
9
Every 500,000 z z z z z
IV SERVICE
times
copies
Periodic check (2)
4
Every 1,000,000 z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (3)
1
Every 3,000,000 z
time
copies
Maintenance
49
PK-5 Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Maintenance
49
TMG-3 Every 100,000 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
times
copies
Periodic check (1)
1
Every 4,000,000 z
time
copies
4-2

1.2 Maintenance items

A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
Implementation classification
Classifica- Materials•
No. Service item Quantity Clean- Lubri- Replac
tion Check Tools used
ing cation ement
Prepara- (1) Image check
1 z
tions
2 Drum (1) Drum cartridge 4 z Setting powder
(2) Drum unit cleaning Hydro wipe
z (cleaning pad is
not available)
Charging (1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M,
3 4 z
corona /C, /K
(2) Changing grid plate /Y, /M, Blower brush
z
/C, /K
(3) Charging corona dust-
1 (z) z
proof filter
4 Developer (1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) 4 z
(2) Developer unit cleaning Hydro wipe
(cleaning pad
z
is not availa-
ble)
Transfer (1) Belt cleaning blade
5 1 z
belt
6 ADU (1) Separation corona unit 1 z
(2) Paper feed roller /BP z
(3) Feed roller /BP z
(4) Double feed
z
IV SERVICE
prevention roller /BP
(5) Registration roller cleaning Hydro wipe/
z
drum cleaner
(6) Conveyance roller section Hydro wipe/
z
cleaning drum cleaner
(7) ADU paper through sen- Blower brush
z
sor cleaning
7 Exterior (1) Ozone filter /1 1 z
(2) Dust proof filter /1 2 z
(3) Dust proof filter /2 1 z
Fixing (1) Fixing roller /U *2 Multemp FF-RM
8 1 z
(or Solvest 240)
(2) Fixing roller /L *2 Multemp FF-RM
1 z
(or Solvest 240)
(3) Cleaning roller z Roller cleaner
Reverse/ (1) Decurler roller *1
9 1 z
exit 25 mode count reset
*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when
replacing the decurler roller.
*2 When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve
/U or /L, respectively.
4-3

ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/
10 z
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/
z
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention Hydro wipe/
z
roller /1, /2, /3 drum cleaner
Vertical (1) Conveyance roller, sensor Hydro wipe/
11 convey- z drum cleaner/
blower brush
ance
Scanner (1) Original glass, exposure Hydro wipe/
12 lamp, reflector, lens, mir- z drum cleaner/
ror, sensor blower brush
Write unit (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C, Hydro wipe
13 z
K)
Toner (1) Toner supply unit cleaning Hydro wipe
14 z
supply
Toner (1) Toner collection box Hydro wipe
15 z (z)
collection replacing/cleaning
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check z
(2) Exterior cleaning Hydro wipe/
z
drum cleaner
(3) Image and paper through
z
check
(4) PM counter resetting (25
z
mode)
IV SERVICE
B. AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Prepara- (1) Paper through check
z
tions
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/
1 z
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed Cleaning pad/
z
prevention roller drum cleaner
(4) Pre-separation rubber Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
(5) Rubber roller z Blower brush
(6) Reflective sensor z Blower brush
(7) Conveyance belt Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
2 z
drum cleaner
3 Final check (1) Paper through check z
4-4

C. C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
1 z
tions
Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/
2 z
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed Cleaning pad/
z
prevention roller drum cleaner
(4) Paper dust removing z
(5) Sensor z Blower brush
(6) Gear Plus guard
z (z)
No.2 *1
Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
3 z
drum cleaner
D. FN-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

ing cation ement
1 z
tions
Convey- (1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/
2 z drum cleaner
ance
IV SERVICE
Drive (1) Main drive unit Plus guard
3 z (z)
No.2 *1
(2) Tray up/down drive unit Plus guard
z (z)
No.2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit Plus guard
z (z)
No.2 *1
(4) Paper exit drive section Plus guard
z (z)
No.2 *1
(5) Staple unit Plus guard
z (z)
No.2 *1
Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable
4 z z
count: 5,000
5 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning z
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
4-5

E. FN-9 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
1 z
tions
2 z drum cleaner
ance
Drive (1) Main drive unit Plus guard No.2
3 z (z)
*1
(2) Tray up/down drive unit Plus guard No.2
z (z)
*1
(3) Shift drive unit Plus guard No.2
z (z)
*1
(4) Paper exit drive section Plus guard No.2
z (z)
*1
(5) Staple unit Plus guard No.2
z (z)
*1
(6) Folding unit z (z)
4 Folding (1) Folding roller z
Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable
5 z z
count: 5,000
6 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning z
Final check (1) Paper through check Stapler
7 z
positioning jig
F. Cover Inserter D (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

IV SERVICE
ing cation ement
1 z drum cleaner
ance
Paper feed (1) Feed roller Cleaning pad/
2 z
drum cleaner
(2) Paper feed conveyance Cleaning pad/
z
roller drum cleaner
(3) Double feed prevention Cleaning pad/
z
roller drum cleaner
(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
4-6

G. PK-5 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
1 Punch unit (1) Punch die z Blower brush
2 Punch (1) Punch scraps dump z
scraps (2) Punch scraps full sensor Blower brush
section z
(2) Interior cleaning Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
H. TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
1 z drum cleaner
ance
(2) Conveyance belt z
Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U Cleaning pad/
2 z
drum cleaner
(2) Trimmer blade /L z
(3) Trimming box and its
z z
periphery
Stacker (1) Pusher section Plus guard No.2
3 z (z)
*1
(2) Stacker section Plus guard No.2
z (z)
*1
IV SERVICE
4 Drive (1) Conveyance drive section z
(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/
z
drum cleaner
4-7

1.3 Periodic check items (main body)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Charging (1) Changing grid plate
1 4 z
corona
(2) Changing grid spring 8 z
Transfer (1) 1st transfer roller /K *1
2 1 z
belt 25 mode count reset
(2) 1st transfer roller /C 1
3 z
25 mode count reset
(3) 2nd transfer roller /U 1 z
(4) Belt drive roller cleaning Hydro wipe/
z
drum cleaner
(5) Transfer belt 1 z
(6) Toner collection sheet /1 1 z
2nd trans- (1) 2nd transfer roller /L
3 1 z
fer
Fixing (1) Fixing cleaning unit *2
4 1 z
25 mode count reset
*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25
mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.
*2 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing clean-
ing unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service."
appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
IV SERVICE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed rubber Actual durable
3 z
(tray/1, /2, /3) count: 125,000
1
(2) Double feed prevention Actual durable
3 z
rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) count: 125,000
4-8

C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Charging (1) Charging corona dust-
1 1 z
corona proof filter
Developer (1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /
2 4 z
K
Transfer (1) Transfer belt separation
3 3 z
belt claw
(2) Belt cleaning brush unit 1 z
Registra- (1) Registration cleaning
4 sheet 1 z
tion
5 Fixing (1) Ball bearing /U 2 z
(2) Ball bearing /L 2 z
(3) Heat insulating sleeve /U Multemp FF-
2 z RM (or Solvest
240)
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /L Multemp FF-
2 z RM (or Solvest
240)
(5) Fixing torque limiter 1 z
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

Quantity Implementation classification
No. Service item Clean- Lubri- Replac
ing cation ement
Fixing (1) Fixing drive gear Multemp FF-
z z
IV SERVICE
1 1 RM (or Solvest
240)
2nd trans- (1) Transfer ground plate unit
2 1 z
fer
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Registra- (1) Registration roller
1 1 z
tion
Transfer (1) Separation claw solenoid
2 1 z
belt
ADU (1) Feed rubber /BP Actual durable
3 1 z
count: 125,000
1 z
rubber /BP count: 125,000
4-9

F. Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Vertical (1) Intermediate conveyance Actual durable
1 convey- clutch /1 1 z count:
ance 2,000,000
ADU (1) Intermediate conveyance Actual durable
2 clutch /2 1 z count:
2,000,000
(2) Intermediate conveyance Actual durable
clutch /3 1 z count:
2,000,000
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

ing cation ement
1 Fixing (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 1 z
(2) Fixing upper lamp /2 1 z
(3) Fixing lower lamp 1 z
(4) Fixing temperature sensor
1 z
/3
(5) Fixing temperature sensor
1 z
/4
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller Actual durable
2 3 z
(tray/1, /2, /3) count: 800,000
IV SERVICE
4-10

H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch Actual durable
1 (tray/1, /2, /3) 3 z count:
2,000,000
(2) Pre-registration clutch Actual durable
(tray/1, /2, /3) 3 z count:
2,000,000
ADU (1) ADU conveyance clutch /1 Actual durable
2 1 z count:
2,000,000
(2) ADU conveyance clutch /2 Actual durable
1 z count:
2,000,000
(3) ADU pre-registration Actual durable
clutch 1 z count:
2,000,000
(4) Paper feed roller /BP Actual durable
1 z
count: 800,000
(5) Paper feed clutch /BP Actual durable
1 z count:
2,000,000
1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints)
IV SERVICE
ing cation ement
1 1 z
count: 625,000
(2) Feed roller Actual durable
1 z
count: 625,000
1 z
roller count: 625,000
4-11

1.5 Periodic check items (C-208)

ing cation ement
1 1 z
count: 500,000
(2) Feed roller Actual durable
1 z
count: 500,000
1 z
roller count: 500,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch Actual durable
1 1 z count:
2,000,000
(2) Pre-registration clutch Actual durable
1 z count:
2,000,000
IV SERVICE
4-12

1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9)

ing cation ement
Convey- (1) Paper exit roller /A Actual durable
1 (sponge roller) 10 z count: 200,000
ance
(2) Intermediate conveyance Actual durable
4 z
roller /4 (sponge roller) count: 200,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Convey- (1) Stack assist roller (sponge
1 roller) 1 z
ance
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

ing cation ement
Stapler (1) Stapler unit Stapler
positioning jig
1 2 z
Actual durable
count: 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
IV SERVICE
ing cation ement
Drive (1) FNS up/down motor Actual durable
1 1 z count:
2,500,000
4-13

1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D)

ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B Actual durable
1 2 z
count: 100,000
2 z
roller assembly count: 100,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A Actual durable
1 2 z
count: 200,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0
Materials•
No. Classification Service item Quantity Clean- Lubri- Replac
Check Tools used
ing cation ement
Paper feed (1) Torque limiter Actual durable
1 2 z
count: 600,000
1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3)

IV SERVICE
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)
Materials•
No. Classification Service item Quantity Clean- Lubri- Replac
Check Tools used
ing cation ement
Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U Actual durable
1 1 z
count: 500,000
(2) Trimmer blade /L Actual durable
1 z
count: 500,000
4-14

1.9 Replacement parts list
Note:
• No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25
mode.
Actual durable
No. Unit Parts name Quantity
count
001 Toner correction Toner collection box 1 50,000
002 Main body Ozone filter /1 1 100,000
004 Dust proof filter /1 2 100,000
005 Dust proof filter /2 1 100,000
006 Charging corona Charging corona dust-proof filter 1 600,000
007 Drum Drum cartridge /Y 1 100,000
012 Drum cartridge /M 1 100,000
017 Drum cartridge /C 1 100,000
022 Drum cartridge /K 1 100,000
028 Charging corona Charging wire assy /Y 1 100,000
029 Charging grid plate /Y 1 200,000
031 Charging wire assy /M 1 100,000
032 Charging grid plate /M 1 200,000
034 Charging wire assy /C 1 100,000
034 Charging grid plate /C 1 200,000
037 Charging wire assy /K 1 100,000
038 Charging grid plate /K 1 200,000
— Charging grid spring 8 200,000
040 Transfer belt Transfer belt 1 200,000
IV SERVICE
041 1st transfer roller /Y 1 200,000
042 1st transfer roller /M 1 200,000
043 1st transfer roller /C 1 200,000
044 1st transfer roller /K 1 200,000
045 2nd transfer roller /U 1 200,000
046 Transfer belt separation claw 3 600,000
048 Belt cleaning brush unit 1 600,000
049 Toner collection sheet /1 1 200,000
050 Belt cleaning blade 1 100,000
051 2nd transfer 2nd transfer roller /L 1 200,000
052 ADU Separation Discharging board unit 1 100,000
053 Fixing Fixing cleaning unit 1 200,000
054 Fixing roller /U 1 100,000
055 Fixing roller /L 1 100,000
4-15

Actual durable
count
056 Developing Developer /Y 1 100,000
057 Developer /M 1 100,000
058 Developer /C 1 100,000
059 Developer /K 1 100,000
060 Developing unit /Y (color label included) 1 600,000
061 Developing unit /M (color label included) 1 600,000
062 Developing unit /C (color label included) 1 600,000
063 Developing unit /K (color label included) 1 600,000
069 FN-120/FN-9 FNS up/down unit 1 2,500,000
070 Stapler unit 1 200,000
071 Stapler unit 1 200,000
— Staple 1 5000
— Staple 1 5000
108 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 10 200,000
109 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) 4 200,000
110 Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) 1 400,000
078 Cover Inserter D Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000
079 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000
080 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000
081 Torque limiter 1 600,000
083 Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000
084 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000
085 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000
086 Torque limiter 1 600,000
087 TMG-3 Trimmer blade /U 1 500,000
087 Trimmer blade /L 1 500,000
IV SERVICE
092 AFR-20 Paper feed roller 1 625,000

093 Feed roller 1 625,000
095 Double feed prevention roller 1 625,000
113 Registration Registration cleaning sheet 1 600,000
112 Fixing unit Fixing torque limiter 1 600,000
114 Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000
115 Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000
116 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000
117 ADU Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000
118 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1 2,000,000
4-16

Actual durable
count
119 Main body paper feed Paper feed rubber /1 1 125,000
119 Double feed prevention rubber /1 1 125,000
120 Paper feed rubber /2 1 125,000
121 Paper feed rubber /3 1 125,000
122 Paper feed rubber /BP 1 125,000
122 Double feed prevention rubber /BP 1 125,000
130 Paper feed roller /1 1 800,000
133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 800,000
123 Registration Registration roller 1 1,500,000
124 Transfer belt Separation claw solenoid 1 1,500,000
125 Fixing Fixing upper lamp /1 1 2,500,000
126 Fixing upper lamp /2 1 2,500,000
127 Fixing lower lamp 1 2,500,000
128 Fixing temperature sensor /3 1 2,500,000
129 Fixing temperature sensor /4 1 2,500,000
134 ADU ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000
135 ADU conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000
136 ADU pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000
137 Fixing Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) 2 600,000
138 Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) 2 600,000
139 Fixing drive gear 1 1,000,000
140 Reverse/exit unit Decurler roller 1 100,000
IV SERVICE
141 C-208 Paper feed roller 1 500,000
Feed roller 1 500,000
142
Double feed prevention roller 1 500,000
143 Paper feed clutch 1 2,000,000
144 Pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000
145 Main body paper feed Paper feed clutch /1 1 2,000,000
146 Pre-registration clutch /1 1 2,000,000
147 Paper feed clutch /2 1 2,000,000
149 Paper feed clutch /3 1 2,000,000
151 Paper feed clutch /BP 1 2,000,000
152 2nd transfer Transfer ground plate unit 1 1,000,000
4-17

1.10 Important maintenance parts

• The important parts specified by Minolta in order
to maintain safety of the products are referred to
as "important maintenance parts". The important
maintenance parts for this machine are as
described below:
1 Fixing unit Thermostat /1 1
2 Fixing unit Thermostat /L 1
IV SERVICE
4-18

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1 Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2 Materials
A. Single unit supply
Drum
Toner black
Toner yellow
Toner magenta
Toner cyan
B. Kit
a Developer black set
Developer black
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
b Developer yellow set
Developer yellow
IV SERVICE
c Developer magenta set
Developer magenta
d Developer cyan set
Developer cyan
4-19

COPY MATERIAL CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2.3 PM parts kit

A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total)
Quantity
Name
North America Europe
Toner collecting box assy 2 1
Ozone filter /1 1 1
Dust proof filter /1 2 2
Dust proof filter /2 1 1
Belt cleaning blade 1 1
Separation corona unit 1 1
Fixing roller /U 1 1
Fixing roller /L 1 1
Decurler roller 1 1
Charging wire assy 4 4
Paper for fixing speed adjustment
1 1
(16 sheets/A3)
Dust bag (rubber band) - 1
Hand case for collection - 1
Cotton swab (x4) - 1
Hydro wipe (x10) - 1
B. 200,000 copies/1set (total)
Quantity
Name
*All area
Transfer belt 1
1st transfer roller /K 1
IV SERVICE
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C 3

Toner collection sheet /1 1
2nd transfer roller /U 1
2nd transfer roller /L 1
Fixing cleaning unit 1
Changing grid plate 4
Changing grid spring 8
4-20

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. Name Shape Remark
4014-5007-01 Setting powder
25g
Multemp grease
FF-RM 25g
Solvest 240 Multemp FF-RM is

recommended
Plasguard No.2
IV SERVICE
4-21

CE TOOLS LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No. Name Shape Quantity Remark
4969-1885-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig
(for upper roller) 1
4969-1886-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig

(for lower roller) 1
4014-5005-01 Mirror positioning jig

2
4014-5006-01 Door switch jig

1
4969-1887-01 Color chart (metric)

1
4969-1888-01 Color chart (inch)

1
4024-2153-01 New Pyramid chart

1
4014-5010-01 Adjustment chart

1
IV SERVICE
4014-5009-01 Stapler positioning jig For adjusting

1 FN-120/FN-9
4-22

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST
Classifi- Jam Causes Resulting Correction

cation code operation
By- J10-01 After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is If copy is pro- Remove the paper
pass During operation turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor gressing when from the by-pass feed
feed (PS26) is not turned ON within the jam arises, main tray once and remove
specified time. body stops after jammed paper, if any.
J10-02 After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is completion of Remove paper from
turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP paper exit. the by-pass feed tray
(M35) is not turned ON within specified once, decrease the
time. stacked sheets and
J10-03 After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35) set again.
is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /
BP (PS25) is not turned ON within
specified time.
J10-11 By-pass feed conveyance sensor — Remove the paper
When idling During operation When idling
(PS26) was turned ON in the idling con- from the by-pass feed
dition. tray once and remove
jammed paper, if any.
Paper J11-01 After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is If copy is pro- Pull out the paper feed
feed turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 gressing when tray /1 and remove
tray /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the jam arises, main jammed paper, if any.
specified time. body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
J11-11 Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was —
turned ON in the idling condition.
Paper J12-01 After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is If copy is pro- Pull out the paper feed
During operation
tray /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within speci- jam arises, main jammed paper, if any.
fied time. body stops after
completion of V CODE LIST
paper exit.
When idling
5-1

JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

Paper J13-01 After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is If copy is pro- Pull out the paper feed
During operation
tray /3 (PS41) is not turned ON. jam arises, main jammed paper, if any.
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
During operation When idling
C-208 J14-01 After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) If copy is pro- Open the LCT top
is turned ON, paper feed sensor gressing when cover and remove
(PS107) is not turned ON within speci- jam arises, main jammed paper, if any.
fied time. body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
J14-11 Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in —
During operation When idling
the idling condition.
Paper J17-01 After the loop roller motor (M31) is If copy is pro- Pull out ADU and
feed turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) gressing when remove jammed
is not turned ON within specified time. jam arises, main paper, if any.
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
J17-02 After the ADU pre-registration clutch Printer section
(MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor stops immedi-
(PS22) is not turned ON within the ately.
specified time.
J17-03 After the pre-registration clutch /3 If copy is pro- Open the vertical con-
(MC12) is turned ON, vertical convey- gressing when veyance door and
ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON jam arises, main remove jammed
within specified time. body stops after paper, if any.
J17-04 After the pre-registration clutch /2 completion of Pull out the paper feed
(MC10) is turned ON, vertical convey- paper exit. tray /2 and remove
V CODE LIST
ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON jammed paper, if any.

within specified time.
5-2


Paper J17-05 After the intermediate conveyance If copy is pro- Open the vertical con-
During operation
feed clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, interme- gressing when veyance door and
diate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is jam arises, main remove jammed
not turned ON within the specified time. body stops after paper, if any.
J17-06 After the pre-registration clutch /1 completion of
(MC7) is turned ON, intermediate con- paper exit.
veyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned
ON within the specified time.
J17-07 After the pre-registration clutch Open the LCT front
(MC102) is turned ON, intermediate door and remove
conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not jammed paper, if any.
turned ON within the specified time.
J17-08 After the intermediate conveyance sen- Pull out ADU and
sor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermedi- remove jammed
ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not paper, if any.
turned ON within specified time.
J17-09 After the by-pass feed conveyance sen- Remove paper from
sor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermedi- the by-pass feed tray
ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not and remove jammed
turned ON within the specified time. paper, if any.
C-208 J17-10 After the pre-registration clutch Open the LCT top
(MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sen- cover and remove
sor (PS107) is not turned ON within the jammed paper, if any.
specified time.
Paper J17-11 Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was — Open the vertical con-
When idling
feed turned ON in the idling condition. veyance door and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J17-12 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Pull out ADU and
(PS27) was turned ON in the idling con- remove jammed
dition. paper, if any.
J17-13 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2
(PS28) was turned ON in the idling con-
dition.
J17-14 Registration sensor (OS22) was turned
in the idling condition.
C-208 J17-15 Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned Open the LCT front
ON in the idling condition. door and remove V CODE LIST
5-3


Others J19-01 Vertical conveyance door open jam. If copy is pro- Close the vertical con-
During operation
Vertical conveyance door sensor gressing when veyance door.
(PS51) was turned OFF when copying / jam arises, main
printing. body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
Others J19-02 LCT top cover open jam or LCT front In case of LCT Close the LCT top
C-208 door open jam. Top cover open/close paper feed, main cover or LCT front
sensor (PS100) or front door open/ body stops after door.
close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF completion of
when copying/printing. paper exit. In
case of paper
feed other than
LCT, main body
does not stop.
Paper J31-02 After the registration roller motor (M30) Printer section Pull out ADU and
exit is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor stops immedi- remove jammed
(PS17) is not turned ON. ately. paper, if any.
J32-01 After the fixing paper exit sensor
(PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor
(PS13) is not turned ON within the
specified time.
(PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit
sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within
the specified time.
J32-03 In the reverse paper exit mode, after
the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is
not turned ON within the specified time.
(PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned
OFF within the specified time.
J32-05 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is
turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time (in straight paper exit
mode).
J32-07 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is
V CODE LIST

the specified time (in reverse paper exit
mode).
J32-08 When the registration roller motor
(M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor
(PS17) is ON.
Paper J32-11 Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the — Pull out ADU and
When idling
exit idling condition. remove jammed

J32-12 Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is paper, if any.
J32-13 Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
ON in the idling condition.
5-4


Others J51-01 Front door open jam. Front door open/ Printer section Close the front door.
During operation
close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF stops immedi-
while copying/printing. ately.
AFR-20 J61-01 Paper feed section cover open jam. RADF stops Close the paper feed
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was immediately. section cover.
turned OFF when copying. If there is paper
J61-02 Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/ in or after trans- Close the paper feed
close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF fer process, tray.
when copying. main body stops
after paper exit.
J61-03 Paper exit section cover open jam. Close the paper exit
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was section cover.
turned OFF when copying.
J62-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is not Open the paper feed
turned OFF within specified time after section cover and
paper feed is started. remove jammed
J62-02 After reversal of paper feed motor paper, if any.
(M301) is started, timing sensor Remove jammed
(PS302) is not turned ON within the paper in the main
specified time. body conveyance sec-
J62-03 After the timing sensor (PS302) is tion, if any.
the specified time.
J62-04 After the reverse/paper exit motor Open the paper exit
(M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor section cover and
(PS305) is not turned ON within the remove jammed
specified time. paper, if any.
J62-05 After the reverse sensor (PS305) is Remove jammed
turned ON, it is not turned OFF within paper in the main
the specified time. body conveyance sec-
J62-06 In the one-sided original exit mode, tion, if any.
paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned
ON within the specified time after the
start of paper exit.
In the double-sided original exit mode,
original exit sensor (PS306) is not
turned ON within the specified time
after the reverse sensor (PS305) is
turned ON. V CODE LIST
5-5


AFR-20 J62-07 After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is RADF stops Open the paper exit
During operation
turned ON, it is not turned OFF within immediately. section cover and
the specified time. If there is paper remove jammed
in or after trans- paper, if any.
fer process, Remove jammed
main body stops paper in the main
after paper exit. body conveyance sec-
tion, if any.
J65-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in — Open the paper feed
When idling
the idling condition. section cover and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-02 Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the Open the paper exit

idling condition. section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-03 Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the Open the paper feed
remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the Open the paper exit
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Others J71-01 FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock Printer section Close the FNS front
During operation
FN-120 switch (MS701) was turned OFF when stops immedi- door.
FN-9 copying/printing. ately.
Others J71-02 TU front door open jam. Front door Close the TU front
TMG-3 MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when door.
copying/printing.
FN-120 J72-16 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is FNS/main body Remove jammed
FN-9 turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is stop immedi- paper in the FNS/main
not turned ON within the specified time. ately. body, if any.
J72-17 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is

turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor
V CODE LIST
specified time.
turned ON, stacker inlet sensor
specified time (when stapling).
5-6


FN-120 J72-19 After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is FNS/main body Remove jammed
During operation
FN-9 turned ON, stacker inlet sensor stop immedi- paper in the FNS/main
(PS705) is not turned ON within the ately. body, if any.
specified time.
J72-20 After paper exit operation is started,
main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is
not turned ON within the specified time
(when stapling).
J72-21 After the main tray paper exit sensor
OFF within the specified time (in the
large-size staple mode).
turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor
specified time within the specified time
(in the sub-tray paper exit mode).
J72-23 After the sub-tray paper exit sensor
large-size staple mode).
J72-24 After completion of stapling, folding
passage sensor (PS726) is not turned
ON.
J72-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is
turned ON, folding paper exit sensor
specified time.
J72-26 After the folding paper exit sensor
J72-28 After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705)
is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time.
non-staple mode). V CODE LIST
small-size staple mode).
5-7


TMG-3 J72-32 After the folding paper exit sensor TU/FNS/main Remove jammed
During operation
(PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor body stop imme- paper in TU/FNS/main
(PS101) is not turned ON within the diately. body, if any.
specified time.
J72-33 After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned
ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned
J72-34 After the conveyance motor (M101) is
turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108)
is not turned OFF within the specified
time.
Cover J72-35 After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) FNS/main body Remove jammed
Inserter is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L stop immedi- paper in the FNS/main
D (PS206) is not turned ON within speci- ately. body, if any.
fied time.
PK-5 J72-43 After the punch motor (M801) is turned
ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not
FN-120 J72-48 After the folding passage sensor
FN-9 (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned
Cover J72-49 After the conveyance clutch /U
Inserter (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sen-
D sor (PS201) is not turned ON within the
specified time.
J72-50 After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is
turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is
J72-51 After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206)
is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704)
is not turned ON within the specified
time.
FN-120 J72-81 After the stapler motor /F (M714) and
FN-9 clincher motor /F (M715) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and
clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not
turned ON within specified time.
V CODE LIST
J72-82 After the stapler motor /R (M709) and

clincher motor /R (M710) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and
clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not
5-8


FN-120 J72-83 After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), FNS/main body Remove jammed
During operation
FN-9 M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, stop immedi- paper in the FNS/main
M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sen- ately. body, if any.
sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher
HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are
J72-90 After operation stop signal is transmit-
ted from the main body to FNS, FNS
does not stop within the specified time.
J73-01 Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is — Open the FNS front
When idling
ON in the idling condition. door and remove

J73-02 Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in jammed paper, if any.
J73-05 FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the

idling condition.
J73-07 Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is Remove jammed
ON in the idling condition. paper in the sub-tray, if
any.
J73-08 Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is Open the FNS front
ON in the idling condition. door and remove
J73-09 Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON jammed paper, if any.
J73-10 Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is
TMG-3 J73-11 Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling Open the TU front
condition. door and remove
J73-12 Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in jammed paper, if any.
J73-13 Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the
idling condition.
Cover J73-14 PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in Remove paper from
Inserter the idling condition. the cover sheet feeder
D /L and remove
J73-17 PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in Remove paper in the
the idling condition. cover sheet feeder /U
once and remove V CODE LIST
ADU J92-01 After the reverse paper exit sensor Printer section Pull out ADU and
When idling During operation
(PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedi- remove jammed
sor (PS21) is not turned ON within the ately. paper, if any.
specified time.
ADU J92-11 ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in — Pull out ADU and
the idling condition. remove jammed
paper, if any.
5-9


J93-01 After reversal of ADU reverse motor Printer section
During operation
(M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance stops immedi-
sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within ately.
the specified time.
J93-11 ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON —

When idling
J94-02 After the ADU conveyance sensor Printer section

During operation
(PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registra- stops immedi-

tion sensor (PS23) is not turned ON ately.
within the specified time.
J94-11 ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is —

When idling

V CODE LIST
5-10

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST
2. ERROR CODE LIST

Note:
• In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E
code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indi-
cations are SC codes.
Classification Abnor- Causes Resulting Estimated abnormal parts

mality operation
code
Commu- F10-10 Communication abnormality Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
nication between printer control board stops imme- LT drive board (LTDB)
abnor- (PRCB) and LT drive board diately and
mality (LTDB) main relay
Paper F13-01 M41 abnormality detection sig- (RL1) is Printer control board (PRCB)
feed nal was continuoudly detected turned OFF. Paper feed motor (M41)
motor for the specified time when the
abnor- paper feed motor (M41) was
mality ON.
LT paper F13-02 M101 abnormality detection LT drive motor (LTDB)
C-208
feed signal was continuously Paper feed motor (M101)

motor detected for the specified time
abnor- when the paper feed motor
mality (M101) was ON.
Paper F18-01 After the tray up/down motor /l Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
feed tray (M40) is turned ON, tray upper Tray up/down motor /1 (M40)
abnor- limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not Tray upper limit sensor /1
mality turned ON. (PS30)
F18-02 After the tray up/down motor /2 Printer control board (PRCB)
(M39) is turned ON, tray upper Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39)
limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not Tray upper limit sensor /2
turned ON. (PS38)
F18-03 After the tray up/down motor /3 Printer control board (PRCB)
(M38) is turned ON, tray upper Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38)
limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not Tray upper limit sensor /3
turned ON. (PS42)
F18-04 After the tray up/down motor / Conveyance drive board
BP (M35) is turned ON, the (CVDB)
tray upper limit sensor /BP Tray up/down motor /BP (M35) V CODE LIST
(PS25) is not turned ON within Tray upper limit sensor /BP
the specified time. (PS25)
LT up/ F18-50 When the up/down motor Main body LT drive board (LTDB)
C-208
down (M100) was ON, M100 abnor- stops imme- UP/DOWN motor (M100)
motor mality detection signal was diately and
abnor- continuously detected for the main relay
mality specified time. (RL1) is
turned OFF.
5-11

ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

mality operation
code
LT up/ F18-51 When the upper limit sensor Main body LT drive board (LTDB)
C-208
down (PS109) or lower limit sensor stops imme- UP/DOWN motor (M100)
motor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or diately and Upper limit sensor (PS109)
abnor- PS109 is not turned ON within main relay Lower limit sensor (PS101)
mality the specified time after the up/ (RL1) is
down motor (M100) is turned turned OFF.
ON.
LT paper F18-60 When the paper feed assist fan LT drive board (LTDB)
feed /R (M137) was ON, M137 Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
assist fan abnormality detection signal
abnor- was continuously detected for
mality the specified time.
F18-61 When the paper feed assist fan LT drive board (LTDB)
/F (M136) was ON, M136 Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
abnormality detection signal
was continuously detected for
the specified time.
LT power F18-70 24VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)
abnor- LT drive board (LTDB)
mality F18-71 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
LT drive board (LTDB)
Commu- F20-10 Communication abnormality Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
nication between printer control board Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)
abnor- (PRCB) and drum drive board / Drum drive board /M (DRDB /
mality Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive M)
board /M (DRDB /M).
F20-11 Communication abnormality Printer control board (PRCB)
between printer control board Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
(PRCB) and drum drive board / Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
C (DRDB /C) or drum drive
board /K (DRDB /K).
F20-12 Communication abnormality Printer control board (PRCB)
between printer control board Transfer belt motor (M18)
(PRCB) and transfer belt motor
(M18)
V CODE LIST
5-12


mality operation
code
Pre- F21-01 Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
charging (PCL Y) set cannot be stops imme- Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y

exposure detected. diately and (PCL Y)
lamp main relay
abnor- (RL1) is
mality turned OFF.
F21-02 Pre-charging exposure lamp / Printer control board (PRCB)
M (PCL M) set cannot be Pre-charging exposure lamp /M
detected. (PCL M)
F21-03 Pre-charging exposure lamp /C Printer control board (PRCB)
(PCL C) set cannot be Pre-charging exposure lamp /C
detected. (PCL C)
F21-04 Pre-charging exposure lamp /K Printer control board (PRCB)
(PCL K) set cannot be Pre-charging exposure lamp /K
detected. (PCL K)
Develop- F23-01 When the developing motor /Y Printer control board (PRCB)
ing motor (M20) was ON, M20 abnormal- Developing motor /Y (M20)
abnor- ity detection signal was contin-
mality uously detected for the
specified time.
F23-02 When the developing motor /M Printer control board (PRCB)
(M21) was ON, M21 abnormal- Developing motor /M (M21)
ity detection signal was contin-
uously detected for the
specified time.
F23-03 When developing motor /C Printer control board (PRCB)
(M22) was ON, M22 abnormal- Developing motor /C (M22)
specified time.
F23-04 When the developing motor /K Printer control board (PRCB)
(M23) was ON, M23 abnormal- Developing motor /K (M23)
specified time.
Drum F23-05 When the drum motor /Y (M14) Printer control board (PRCB)
motor was ON, M14 abnormality Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) V CODE LIST
abnor- detection signal was continu- Drum motor /Y (M14)
mality ously detected for the specified
time.
F23-06 When the drum motor /M Printer control board (PRCB)
(M15) was ON, M15 abnormal- Drum drive board /M (DRDB /
ity detection signal was contin- M)
uously detected for the Drum motor /M (M15)
specified time.
5-13


mality operation
code
Drum F23-07 When the drum motor /C (M16) Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
motor was ON, M16 abnormality stops imme- Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
abnor- detection signal was continu- diately and Drum motor /C (M16)
mality ously detected for the specified main relay
time. (RL1) is
turned OFF.
F23-08 When drum motor /K (M17) Printer control board (PRCB)
was ON, M17 abnormality Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
detection signal was continu- Drum motor /K (M17)
ously detected for the specified
time.
Transfer F23-09 When the transfer belt motor Printer control board (PRCB)
belt unit (M18) was ON, M18 abnormal- Transfer belt motor (M18)
abnor- ity detection signal was contin-
mality uously detected for the
specified time.
F23-10 When the 1st transfer HP sen- Printer control board (PRCB)
sor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not 1st transfer pressing/releasing
turned OFF within the speci- motor (M19)
fied time after the 1st transfer 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
pressing/releasing motor
(M19) is turned ON.
When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is
not turned ON within the speci-
fied time after M19 is turned
ON.
Toner F23-11 When either of the toner sup- Printer control board (PRCB)
supply ply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, Toner supply drive board
abnor- M50, M51, or M52), toner bot- (TSDB)
mality tle motor (M53), or toner bottle Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, Toner supply motor /M (M50)
MC15, MC16, or MC17) was Toner supply motor /C (M51)
ON, either abnormality detec- Toner supply motor /K (M52)
tion signal was continuously Toner bottle motor (M53)
detected for the specified time. Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)
Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)
V CODE LIST
Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)

L detec- F27-01 Output of toner density sensor Printer control board (PRCB)
tion /Y (TDS Y) cannot be con- Toner density sensor /Y (TDS
abnor- trolled. Y)
mality
F27-02 Output of toner density sensor Printer control board (PRCB)
/M (TDS M) cannot be con- Toner density sensor /M (TDS
trolled. M)
F27-03 Output of toner density sensor Printer control board (PRCB)
/C (TDS C) cannot be con- Toner density sensor /C (TDS
trolled. C)
5-14


mality operation
code
L detec- F27-04 Output of toner density sensor Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
tion /K (TDS K) cannot be con- stops imme- Toner density sensor /K (TDS
abnor- trolled. diately and K)
mality main relay
(RL1) is
High F28-01 When the charging /Y was ON, High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
turned OFF.
pressure charging /Y abnormality detec-
unit tion signal was continuously
abnor- detected for the specified time.
mality F28-02 When charging /M was ON,
charging /M abnormality detec-
tion signal was continuously
detected for the specified time.
F28-03 When charging /C is ON,
charging /C abnormality detec-
F28-04 When charging /K was ON,
charging /K abnormality detec-
F29-01 When the primary transfer Y High pressure unit /2 (HV2)
was ON, primary transfer Y 1st transfer roller
the specified time.
F29-02 When the primary transfer M
was ON, primary transfer M
the specified time.
F29-03 When the primary transfer C
was ON, primary transfer C
the specified time.
F29-04 When the primary transfer K
was ON, primary transfer K V CODE LIST
the specified time.
5-15


mality operation
code
Process F29-06 Gamma sensor (PS11) Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
abnor- improperly adjusted while in stops imme- Gamma sensor (PS11)

mality the Dmax control. diately and
main relay
(RL1) is
F29-07 Dmax control /Y resulted in an Printer control board (PRCB)
turned OFF.
abnormality. Developing unit /Y
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-08 Dmax control /M resulted in an Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality. Developing unit /M
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-09 Dmax control /C resulted in an Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality. Developing unit /C
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-10 Dmax control /K resulted in an Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality. Developing unit /K
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-11 In charging potential control, Printer control board (PRCB)
drum surface potential /Y was Drum potential sensor board /Y
out of specification. (DRPSB Y)
Drum potential sensor /Y
(DRPS Y)
drum surface potential /M was Drum potential sensor board /M
out of specification. (DRPSB M)
Drum potential sensor /M
(DRPS M)
drum surface potential /C was Drum potential sensor board /C
out of specification. (DRPSB C)
Drum potential sensor /C
(DRPS C)
drum surface potential /K was Drum potential sensor board /K
out of specification. (DRPSB K)
Drum potential sensor /K
(DRPS K)
V CODE LIST
F29-15 Charging potential control /Y Printer control board (PRCB)

resulted in an abnormality. Drum potential sensor board /Y
(DRPSB Y)
(DRPS Y)
F29-16 Charging potential control /M Printer control board (PRCB)
resulted in an abnormality. Drum potential sensor board /M
(DRPSB M)
(DRPS M)
5-16


mality operation
code
Process F29-17 Charging potential control /C Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
abnor- resulted in an abnormality. stops imme- Drum potential sensor board /C

mality diately and (DRPSB C)
main relay Drum potential sensor /C
(RL1) is (DRPS C)
F29-18 Charging potential control /K turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB)
resulted in an abnormality. Drum potential sensor board /K
(DRPSB K)
(DRPS K)
F29-19 Dot diameter adjustment con- Printer control board (PRCB)
trol /Y resulted in an abnormal- Drum potential sensor board /Y
ity. (DRPSB Y)
(DRPS Y)
trol /M resulted in an abnormal- Drum potential sensor board /M
ity. (DRPSB M)
(DRPS M)
trol /C resulted in an abnormal- Drum potential sensor board /C
ity. (DRPSB C)
Drum potential sensor /C
(DRPS C)
trol /K resulted in an abnormal- Drum potential sensor board /K
ity. (DRPSB K)
(DRPS K)
F29-23 Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB)
improperly adjusted while in Gamma sensor (PS11)
the gamma correction control
F30-01 2nd transfer abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
F30-02 Separation abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
Motor F30-10 ADU conveyance drive board Conveyance drive board
abnor- communication abnormality (CVDB) V CODE LIST
mality Printer control board (PRCB)
Fan F32-01 When the fixing cooling fan /1 Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10)
mality ON, abnormality detection sig- Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)
nal of either of them was con- Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
tinuously detected for the
specified time.
F32-02 When the drum unit fan /3 Printer control board (PRCB)
(M47) was ON, M36 abnormal- Drum unit fan /3 (M47)
ity detection signal was contin- Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
specified time.
5-17


mality operation
code
Fan F32-03 When the paper exit fan /F, /M, Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
abnor- and /R (M28, M27, and M26) stops imme- Paper exit fan /F (M28)
mality were ON, abnormality detec- diately and Paper exit fan /M (M27)
tion signal of either of them main relay Paper exit fan /R (M26)
was continuously detected for (RL1) is
the specified time. turned OFF.
F32-04 When charging air intake fan Toner supply drive board
(M48) was ON, M48 abnormal- (TSDB)
ity detection signal was contin- Charging air suction fan (M48)
specified time.
F32-05 When the drum cooling fan /1 Printer control board (PRCB)
and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)
abnormality detection signal of Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
either of them was continu-
time.
F32-06 When the transfer belt cooling Printer control board (PRCB)
fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnor- Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
mality detection signal was
continuoudly detected for the
specified time.
Motor F33-01 When the fixing motor (M29) Conveyance drive motor
abnor- was ON, M29 abnormality (CVDB)
mality detection signal was continu- Fixing motor (M29)
time.
F33-02 When the pressure release Conveyance drive motor
sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is (CVDB)
not turned OFF within the Fixing motor (M29)
specified time after the fixing Fixing pressure release sensor
motor (M29) is turned ON. (PS16)
When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is
fied time after M29 is turned
ON.
F33-03 After the 2nd transfer pressing/ Conveyance drive motor
V CODE LIST
releasing motor (M34) is (CVDB)

turned ON, it is not turned OFF 2nd transfer pressing/releasing
within the specified time. motor (M34)
F33-04 Abnormality of Web motor Conveyance drive motor
(M54) or circuit was detected. (CVDB)
Web motor (M54)
5-18


mality operation
code
Fixing F34-01 Fixing high temperature abnor- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
high tem- mality (TH1) stops imme- AC drive board (ACDB)

perature Fixing temperature sensor /1 diately and Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
abnor- (TH1) detection temperature main relay Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)
mality over 250°C was continuously (RL1) is Fixing lower lamp (L4)
detected for the specified time. turned OFF. Fixing temperature sensor /1
F34-02 Fixing high temperature abnor- (TH1)
mality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2
Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
(TH2) detection temperature Fixing temperature sensor /3
over 250°C was continuously (TH3)
detected for the specified time. Fixing temperature sensor /4
F34-03 Fixing high temperature abnor- (TH4)
mality (TH3)
Fixing temperature sensor /3
(TH3) detection temperature WARNING
over 250°C was continuously • When F34-**, F35-** or
detected for the specified time. F36-** (fixing tempera-
ture related abnormality)
F34-04 Fixing high temperature abnor-
occurs, be sure to repair
mality (TH4)
a defective part before
setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1
(TH4) detection temperature
to 0.
over 250°C was continuously
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
to 0 without repairing a
F34-05 Fixing compensation high tem-
defective part, this may
perature abnormality (TH1)
cause a fire.
F34-08 Fixing roller paper seizure V CODE LIST
abnormality
J31-02 occurred 4 continuous
times.
5-19


mality operation
code
Fixing low F35-01 Fixing low temperature abnor- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
tempera- mality (TH1) stops imme- AC drive board (ACDB)

ture Fixing temperature sensor /1 diately and Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
abnor- (TH1) detection temperature main relay Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)
mality under 150°C was continuously (RL1) is Fixing lower lamp (L4)
detected. turned OFF. Fixing temperature sensor /1
F35-02 Fixing low temperature abnor- (TH1)
mality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2
(TH2) detection temperature Fixing temperature sensor /3
under 150°C was continuously (TH3)
detected for the specified time. Fixing temperature sensor /4
F35-03 Fixing low temperature abnor- (TH4)
mality (TH3)
(TH3) detection temperature WARNING
under 150°C was continuously • When F34-**, F35-** or
detected for the specified time. F36-** (fixing tempera-
ture related abnormality)
F35-04 Fixing low temperature abnor-
occurs, be sure to repair
mality (TH4)
a defective part before
to 0.
under 150°C was continuously
F35-05 Fixing compensation low tem-
cause a fire.
V CODE LIST
5-20


mality operation
code
Fixing F36-02 Fixing high temperature hard- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
sensor ware detection abnormality stops imme- AC drive board (ACDB)

abnor- (TH2) diately and Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
mality Fixing temperature sensor /2 main relay Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)
(TH2) detected abnormality (RL1) is Fixing lower lamp (L4)
signal continuously for the turned OFF. Fixing temperature sensor /1
specified time. (TH1)
F36-04 Fixing high temperature hard- Fixing temperature sensor /2
ware detection abnormality (TH2)
(TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /3
(TH4) detected abnormality Fixing temperature sensor /4
signal continuously for the (TH4)
specified time.
F36-05 Fixing low temperature hard- WARNING
ware detection abnormality • When F34-**, F35-** or
(TH1) F36-** (fixing tempera-
Fixing temperature sensor /1 ture related abnormality)
(TH1) detected abnormality occurs, be sure to repair
signal continuously for the a defective part before
specified time. setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1
to 0.
F36-06 Fixing low temperature hard-
ware abnormality (TH2)
(TH2) detected abnormality
cause a fire.
signal continuously for the
specified time.
ware detection abnormality
(TH3)
specified time.
ware detection abnormality
(TH4)
V CODE LIST
specified time.
perature hardware detection
abnormality (TH1)
specified time.
5-21


mality operation
code
Fixing F36-10 Fixing compensation low tem- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
sensor perature hardware detection stops imme- AC drive board (ACDB)

abnor- abnormality (TH1) diately and Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
mality Fixing temperature sensor /1 main relay Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)
(TH1) detected abnormality (RL1) is Fixing lower lamp (L4)
signal continuously for the turned OFF. Fixing temperature sensor /1
specified time. (TH1)
Fixing F36-11 Fixing compensation high tem- Fixing temperature sensor /2
sensor perature hardware detection (TH2)
abnor- abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3
mality Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
(TH3) detected abnormality Fixing temperature sensor /4
signal continuously for the (TH4)
specified time.
perature hardware detection WARNING
abnormality (TH3) • When F34-**, F35-** or
Fixing temperature sensor /3 F36-** (fixing tempera-
(TH3) detected abnormality ture related abnormality)
signal continuously for the occurs, be sure to repair
specified time. a defective part before
F38-02 After the main switch (SW2) is
to 0.
turned ON, fixing temperature
sensor /1 (TH1) detection tem-
perature does not reach 150°C
cause a fire.
F38-03 After the main switch (SW2) is
turned ON, fixing temperature
sensor /3 (TH3) detection tem-
perature does not reach 150°C
F39-01 Fixing section has not been
set.
Scanner F41-01 At the home position search, Scanner drive board (SCDB)
abnor- scanner HP sensor (PS1) is Scanner motor (M1)
mality not turned on within the speci- Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
fied time after the scanner
V CODE LIST
motor (M1) is turned ON.

Motor F41-02 When the polygon motor /Y Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- (M3) is started or when the Polygon motor /Y (M3)
mality speed is switched, M3 lock sig-
nal is not detected within the
specified time.
F41-03 When the polygon motor (M4) Printer control board (PRCB)
is started or the speed is Polygon motor /M (M4)
switched, M4 lock signal is not
detected within the specified
time.
5-22


mality operation
code
Motor F41-04 When the polygon motor /C Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
abnor- (M5) is started or the speed is stops imme- Polygon motor /C (M5)
mality switched, M5 lock signal is not diately and
detected within the specified main relay
time. (RL1) is
F41-05 When the polygon motor /K turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB)
(M6) is started or the speed is Polygon motor /K (M6)
switched, M6 lock signal is not
time.
Scanner F41-06 When the optical scanning Scanner drive board (SCDB)
abnor- returns, scanner HP sensor Scanner motor (M1)
mality (PS1) is not turned ON within Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
the specified time after the
scanner motor (M1) is turned
ON.
Motor F41-07 Abnormal temperature of poly- Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- gon motor /Y (M3) was Polygon motor /Y (M3)
mality detected.
F41-08 Abnormal temperature of poly- Printer control board (PRCB)
gon motor /M (M4) was Polygon motor /M (M4)
detected.
F41-09 Abnormal polygon motor /C Printer control board (PRCB)
(M5) was detected. Polygon motor /C (M5)
F41-10 Abnormal temperature of poly- Printer control board (PRCB)
gon motor /K (M6) was Polygon motor /K (M6)
detected.
F41-11 Temperature detection board Printer control board (PRCB)
(TDB) detected temperature Temperature detection board
abnormality in writing unit /K. (TDB)
Fan F42-01 When the write intake fan /1, /2 Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- (M43, M44), and write exhaust Writing suction fan /1 (M43)
mality fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, Writing suction fan /2 (M44)
abnormality detection signal of Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)
either of them was continu- Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
time. V CODE LIST
F42-02 When scanner cooling fan (M2) Scanner drive board (SCDB)
was ON, M2 abnormality Scanner cooling fan (M2)
detection signal was continu-
time.
5-23


mality operation
code
Color reg- F45-01 Color registration base line Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
istration correction /F resulted in abnor- stops imme- Color registration sensor /F

abnormality. diately and (PS8)
mality F45-03 Color registration base line main relay Printer control board (PRCB)
correction /R results in abnor- (RL1) is Color registration sensor /R
mality. turned OFF. (PS9)
F45-07 When laser correction motor /Y Printer control board (PRCB)
(M7) was ON, laser correction Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
HP sensor /Y (PS5) was Laser correction HP sensor /Y
turned OFF. (PS5)
F45-08 When the laser correction Printer control board (PRCB)
motor /M (M8) was ON, laser Laser correction motor /M (M8)
correction HP sensor /M (PS6) Laser correction HP sensor /M
was turned OFF, (PS6)
F45-09 When the laser correction Printer control board (PRCB)
motor /C (M9) was ON, laser Laser correction motor /C (M9)
correction HP sensor /C (PS7) Laser correction HP sensor /C
was turned OFF. (PS7)
F45-10 After the laser correction motor Printer control board (PRCB)
/Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
turned OFF within the speci- Laser correction HP sensor /Y
fied time. Or, laser correction (PS5)
HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing
position is abnormal.
F45-11 Laser correction motor /M (MB) Printer control board (PRCB)
is not turned OFF within the Laser correction motor /M (M8)
specified time after it is turned Laser correction HP sensor /M
ON. Or, laser correction HP (PS6)
sensor /M (PS6) installing posi-
tion is abnormal.
F45-12 Laser correction motor /C (M9) Printer control board (PRCB)
is not turned OFF within the Laser correction motor /C (M9)
specified time after it is turned Laser correction HP sensor /C
ON. Or, the laser correction HP (PS7)
sensor /C (PS7) installing posi-
tion is abnormal.
F45-20 Color registration correction Printer control board (PRCB)
V CODE LIST
results in abnormality. Color registration sensor /F

(PS8)
Color registration sensor /R
(PS9)
5-24


mality operation
code
Image E46-01 When scanning the image, Main body Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
Main body
process- sub-scan beam correction APC stops imme- Image processing board (IPB)
ing cannot be applied. Laser does diately and
abnor- not light up because 12VDC main relay
mality power to drive the beam is not (RL1) is
supplied, MPC is not correct, turned OFF.
or because of fault laser.
E46-02 Address abnormality of FIFO Image processing board (IPB)
for scanner. When scanning Printer control board (PRCB)
the image, compression of
scanned image data is not nor-
mally completed.
E46-03 Address abnormality of FIFO
for printer. Expansion of
scanned image data is not nor-
mally completed.
E46-05 FIFO interrupt error of com- Image processing board (IPB)
pression/expansion chip
occurred.
E46-06 Image data expansion abnor- Image processing board (IPB)
mality Expansion memory
E46-07 Connection abnormality Image processing board (IPB)
between A/D conversion board Overall control board (OACB)
(ADB) and image processing A/D conversion board (ADB)
board (IPB) CCD wiring harness
E46-08 Index sensor output does not Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
change by the execution of Image processing board (IPB)
APC. Index sensor cannot Printer control board (PRCB)
decect the laser because the
polygon mirror does not rotate,
or because of the index sensor
out of position or defective
index sensor
E46-09 Connection abnormality Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
between index sensor /Y, /M, / Image processing board (IPB)
C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or
laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, V CODE LIST
K) and image processing
board (IPB)
5-25


mality operation
code
Image E46-12 After negation of SVV, com- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
process- pression of scanned image stops imme- Overall control board (OACB)
ing and evolution to page memory diately and Image processing board (IPB)
abnor- are not completed. main relay
mality (RL1) is
E46-13 When scanning the image, Printer control board (PRCB)
turned OFF.
compression process from Overall control board (OACB)
scanner to memory is not com- Image processing board (IPB)
pleted within the specified
time. Evolution from scanner to
page memory is not completed
within the specified time. SVV
is not detected within the spec-
ified time.
expansion process from mem- Overall control board (OACB)
ory to printer is not completed Image processing board (IPB)
within the specified time. Out- Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
put from page memory to
printer is not completed within
the specified time. PVV is not
time.
E46-15 When scanning the image, Image processing board (IPB)
access to expansion device or Program of overall control
some other improper process board (OACB)
took place even though there
was no resource.
E46-16 When scanning the image,
access to compression device
or some other improper pro-
cess took place even though
there was no resource.
E46-17 When processing the image,
filter coefficient cannot be
properly prepared.
E46-19 When accessing the memory
device, software fault was
V CODE LIST
detected.
5-26


mality operation
code
Image E46-21 Expansion process from mem- Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
process- ory to page memory is not stops imme- Image processing board (IPB)
ing completed within the specified diately and Program of overall control
abnor- time. main relay board (OACB)
mality Compression process from (RL1) is
page memory to memory is not turned OFF.
completed within the specified
time.
Evolution from memory to
page memory is not completed
Compressed data transfer from
memory to memory is not com-
pleted within the specified
time.
SVV is not turned OFF within Image processing board (IPB)
the specified time and there- Overall control board (OACB)
fore scanning of next page
cannot be started.
E46-24 Shading correction abnormal- Image processing board (IPB)
ity Program of image processing
(GA abnormality) board (IPB)
E46-25 AOC/AGC adjustment abnor- A/D conversion board (ADB)
mality Exposure lamp (L1)
• Blocking cover and lens cover Image processing board (IPB)
of scanner section are out of Printer control board (PRCB)
place. Overall control board (OACB)
• A/D conversion board (ADB) Scanner drive board (SCDB)
connector is disconnected. L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
• ADB power cable is discon-
nected.
• ADB IC protector is broken.
• Quantity of light of exposure
lamp (L1) is excess.
• L1 does not light up.
V CODE LIST
5-27


mality operation
code
Image E46-26 There is no correction data Abnormality Image processing board (IPB)
Main body
process- which has been reserved by detection Program of overall control

ing resolution. process is board (OACB)
abnor- performed
mality but no abnor-
mality code
is indicated
on the opera-
tion board
and main
body contin-
ues opera-
tion.
Abnormality
code is indi-
cated only for
data collec-
tion, list out-
put and
KRDS.
E46-31 Before completion of MPC, Main body Image processing board (IPB)
APC initial sampling was stops imme- ICP program
attempted. diately and
E46-32 Execution of MPC was main relay
attempted during execution of (RL1) is
APC. turned OFF.
E46-35 Continuous page imaging
range abnormality.
Image cannot be evolved on
memory due to abnormal
image range on memory.
E46-36 When starting APC, PVV was
ON (APC was executed during
print)
E46-40 Hard disk initialization abnor- Image processing board (IPB)
mality. Hard disk (HDD-7)
Hard disk failure or improper HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
V CODE LIST
connector connection.
E46-41 JOB information could not be
stored in the hard disk.
E46-42 At the time of automatic hard
disk job deletion, route could
not be opened.
E46-43 Hard disk access error.
Hard disk failure or improper
connector connection.
5-28


mality operation
code
Image E46-58 Software failure. Main body Image processing board (IPB)
Main body
process- CCD board was replaced but stops imme- ICP program
ing I1ROM version is not compli- diately and CCP wiring harness of A/D
abnor- ant. main relay conversion board (ADB)
mality (RL1) is
E46-59 A/D conversion board (ADB)
turned OFF.
bunch or connector is dam-
aged.
F46-62 Before completion of paper Abnormality Printer control board (PRCB)

mis-centering correction, scan- detection Image processing board (IPB)
ning was started (mis-center- process is LCT drive board (LTDB)
ing correction cannot be conducted
completed). but no code
F46-63 Since the quantity of light of is indicated Exposure lamp (L1)
exposure lamp (L1) decreased, on the opera- Overall control board (OACB)
AGC was retried, though no tion board CCD board (CCDB)
error occurred. and main
F46-64 PWM gammer curve was not body contin- Toner density sensor /Y (TDS
properly prepared. ues opera- Y)
tion. Toner density sensor /M (TDS
Abnormality M)
code is indi- Toner density sensor /C (TDS
cated only for C)
data collec- Toner density sensor /K (TDS
tion, list out- K)
put and Printer control board (PRCB)
KRDS. Image processing board (IPB)
E46-66 Shift failure at repeat. Image processing board (IPB)
Overall control board (OACB)
E46-80 Message cue was not enough Main body Image processing board (IPB)
or destructed. stops imme- Program of overall control
E46-81 Parameter value exceeds diately and board (OACB)
allowable range. main relay
E46-82 Message cue sender task has (RL1) is
an undefined ID. turned OFF.
E46-83 Message receiving event is
undefined. V CODE LIST
E46-90 Abnormal access to memory Image processing board (IPB)
E46-91 Header address scanning Overall control board (OACB)
abnormality Expansion memory
E46-98 Page memory cannot be
secured for printing.
E46-99 Memory initialization abnor-
mality.
Memory may not be correctly
connected.
5-29


mality operation
code
Commu- E50-01 12VDC abnormality. Main body DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
Main body
nication Abnormality signal was contin- stops imme-

abnor- uously detected for the speci- diately and
mality fied time. main relay
(RL1) is
E50-02 24VDC abnormality. DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)
turned OFF.
Abnormality signal was contin-
uously detected for the speci-
fied time after the specified
time from REN /2 ON.
E50-03 Conveyance drive board DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)
(CVDB) 24VDC abnormality. Conveyance drive motor
Abnormality signal of 24VDC (CVDB)
for CVDB was detected after
specified time from REN /2
ON.
E50-04 Laser correction motor 5VDC DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
abnormality.
Abnormal 5VDC for laser cor-
rection motor /Y, /M, and /C
(M7, M8, and M9) was
detected.
E50-05 Conveyance drive board DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
(CVDB) 12VDC abnormality. Conveyance drive motor
Abnormality signal of 12VDC (CVDB)
for CVDB was detected.
E50-10 Line status error and check Overall control board (OACB)
sum error was detected Image processing board (IPB)
between the overall control
board (OACB) and image pro-
cessing board (IPB) and
demand for re-transmission
was sent but recovery could
not be attained.
Re-transmission was
demanded and answered but
recovery could not be attained.
Space is not obtained in the
V CODE LIST
transmission ring buffer within

the specified time.
E50-11 Communication with the coin Printer control board (PRCB)
vendor cannot be performed. Coin vendor
5-30


mality operation
code
Fan F52-01 When the DCPS cooling fan Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
abnor- (M42) was ON, M42 abnormal- stops imme- DCPS cooling fan (M42)
mality ity detection signal was contin- diately and
uously detected for the main relay
specified time. (RL1) is
turned OFF.
F52-02 When the IP cooling fan (M24) Printer control board (PRCB)
was ON, M24 abnormality IP cooling fan (M24)
detection signal was continu-
time.
F52-03 When the IPB cooling fan Printer control board (PRCB)
(M25) was ON, M25 abnormal- IPB cooling fan (M25)
specified time.
Opera- E56-02 After the main switch (SW2) is Printer control board (PRCB)
tion board turned ON, communication Overall control board (OACB)
abnor- between the printer control Operation board /1 (OB1)
mality board (PRCB), overall control
board (OACB), and operation
board /1 (OB1) is not started.
E56-11 When the main switch (SW2) Operation board /1 (OB1)
was turned ON, unwritten con-
trol program 01 of operation
board /1 (OB1) was detected.
AFR-20 E60-01 Communication error. RADF control board (DFCB)
AFR-20
abnor- Printer control board (PRCB)

mality F61-01 Registration sensor (PS301) RADF control board (DFCB) V CODE LIST
error. Registration sensor (PS301)
F61-02 Timing sensor (PS302) error. RADF control board (DFCB)
Timing sensor (PS302)
F61-03 Reverse sensor (PS305) error. RADF control board (DFCB)
Reverse sensor (PS305)
F61-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) RADF control board (DFCB)
error. Paper exit sensor (PS306)
5-31


mality operation
code
AFR-20 F61-05 Size VR (VR301) error. Main body RADF control board (DFCB)
AFR-20
abnor- stops imme- Size VR (VR301)

mality F61-06 Non-volatile memory error. diately and RADF control board (DFCB)
F61-07 When the main switch (SW2) main relay
was ON, unwritten control pro- (RL1) is
gram of RADF control board turned OFF.
(DFCB) was detected.
F61-08 Paper feed motor (M301) error. RADF control board (DFCB)
Paper feed motor (M301)
F61-09 Conveyance motor (M302) RADF control board (DFCB)
error. Conveyance motor (M302)
F61-10 Reverse paper exit motor RADF control board (DFCB)
(M303) error. Reverse paper exit motor
(M303)
FN-120 E70-01 Communication error. Main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FN-120, FN-9
and FN-9 and FNS Printer control board (PRCB)

abnor- F77-01 Shift unit does not reach the stop opera- FNS control board (FNSCB)
mality shifting position or home position immedi- Shift motor (M702)
tion within the specified time. ately and Shift HP sensor (PS718)
F77-02 After the tray up/down motor main relay FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M703) was turned ON, tray (RL1) is Tray up/down motor (M703)
upper limit sensor (PS702) is turned OFF. Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
fied time.
F77-03 After the alignment motor /U FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M705) was turned ON, the Alignment motor /U (M705)
alignment HP sensor /U Alignment HP sensor /U
(PS708) is not turned ON or (PS708)
F77-04 After the paper exit roller motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M707) was turned ON, speed Paper exit roller motor (M707)
does not reach the specified
level within the specified time.
F77-05 After the paper exit motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M708) is turned ON, paper Paper exit opening motor
exit opening HP sensor (M708)
V CODE LIST
(PS712) is not turned ON or Paper exit opening sensor

OFF within the specified time. (PS712)
F77-06 After the stapler moving motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M711) is turned ON, stapler Stapler movement motor
moving HP sensor (PS711) is (M711)
not turned ON or OFF within Stapler movement HP sensor
the specified time. (PS711)
5-32


mality operation
code
FN-120 F77-07 After the clincher rotating Main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FN-120, FN-9
and FN-9 motor (M704) is turned ON, and FNS Clincher rotation motor (M704)
abnor- clincher rotating HP sensor stop opera- Clincher rotation HP sensor
mality (PS714) is not turned ON or tion immedi- (PS714)
OFF within the specified time. ately and
F77-08 After the stapler rotating motor main relay FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M706) is turned ON, stapler (RL1) is Stapler rotation motor (M706)
rotating HP sensor (PS713) is turned OFF. Stapler rotation HP sensor
not turned ON or OFF within (PS713)
the specified time.
F77-11 After the stapler motor /F FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M714) is turned ON, stapler Stapler motor /F (M714)
HP sensor /F (PS731) is not Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
turned ON within the specified
time.
F77-12 After the stapler motor /R FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M709) is turned ON, stapler Stapler motor /R (M709)
HP sensor /R (PS730) is not Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
time.
F77-13 After the clincher motor /F FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M715) is turned ON, clincher Clincher motor /F (M715)
HP sensor /F (PS733) is not Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)
time.
F77-14 After clincher motor /R (M710) FNS control board (FNSCB)
is turned ON, clincher HP sen- Clincher motor /R (M710
sor /R (PS732) is not turned Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732)
F77-21 After the stopper motor (M718) FNS control board (FNSCB)
is turned ON, stopper HP sen- Stopper motor (M718)
sor (PS723) is not turned ON Stopper HP sensor (PS723)
F77-22 After the alignment motor /L FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M716) is turned ON, align- Alignment motor /L (M716)
ment HP sensor /L (PS724) is Alignment HP sensor /L
not turned ON within the speci- (PS724) V CODE LIST
fied time.
F77-25 After the folding knife motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M719) is turned ON, folding Folding knife motor (M719)
knife HP sensor (PS722) is not Folding knife HP sensor
turned ON within the specified (PS722)
time.
5-33


mality operation
code
abnor- F77-26 After the folding conveyance Main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FN-120, FN-9
mality motor (M720) is turned ON, and FNS Folding conveyance motor
speed does not reach the stop opera- (M720)
specified level within the speci- tion immedi-
fied time. ately and
main relay
abnor- F77-31 After the conveyance motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
TMG-3
(RL1) is
mality (M101) is turned ON, speed TU drive board (TUDB)
turned OFF.
does not reach the specified Conveyance motor (M101)
F77-32 After the cutter motor (M102) is FNS control board (FNSCB)
turned ON, cutter HP sensor TU drive board (TUDB)
(PS106) is not turned ON Cutter motor (M102)
within the specified time. Cutter HP sensor (PS106)
F77-33 After the stopper motor (M103) FNS control board (FNSCB)
is turned ON, stopper HP sen- TU drive board (TUDB)
sor (PS103) is not turned ON Stopper motor (M103)
within the specified time. Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
F77-34 After the stopper release motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M104) is turned ON, stopper TU drive board (TUDB)
release HP sensor (PS104) is Stopper release motor (M104)
not turned ON within the speci- Stopper release HP sensor
fied time. (PS104)
F77-35 After the press motor (M105) is FNS control board (FNSCB)
turned ON, press HP sensor TU drive board (TUDB)
(PS105) is not turned ON Press motor (M105)
within the specified time. Press HP sensor (PS105)
F77-36 After the pressure motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M107) is turned ON, pressure TU drive board (TUDB)
HP sensor (PS112) is not Pusher motor (M107)
turned ON within the specified Pusher HP sensor (PS112)
time.
F77-37 After the holder motor (M106) FNS control board (FNSCB)
is turned ON, upper limit PS TU drive board (TUDB)
sensor (PS110) is not turned Holder motor (M106)
ON. Upper limit PS sensor (PS110)
abnor- F77-41 After the tray up/down motor /L FNS control board (FNSCB)
Cover Inserter D
V CODE LIST
mality (M202) is turned ON, tray PI drive board (PIDB)

upper limit sensor /L (PS209) Tray up/down motor /L (M202)
or tray lower limit sensor /L Tray upper limit sensor /L
(PS210) is not turned ON (PS209)
within the specified time. Tray lower limit sensor /L
(PS210)
5-34


mality operation
code
abnor- F77-42 After the tray up/down motor /U Main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
Cover Inserter D
mality (M201) is turned ON, tray and FNS PI drive board (PIDB)
upper limit sensor /U (PS204) stop opera- Tray up/down motor /U (M201)
or tray lower limit sensor /U tion immedi- Tray upper limit sensor /U
(PS205) is not turned ON ately and (PS204)
within the specified time. main relay Tray lower limit sensor /U
(RL1) is (PS205)
turned OFF.
F77-43 After the PI conveyance motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M203) is turned ON, speed PI drive board (PIDB)
does not reach the specified PI Conveyance motor (M203)
PK-5 F77-44 After the punch shift motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
PK-5
abnor- (M802) is turned ON, punch Punch drive board (PKDB)

mality shift HP sensor (PS803) is not Punch shift motor (M802)
turned ON within the specified Punch shift HP sensor (PS803)
time.
F77-47 Communication abnormality FNS control board (FNSCB)
between FNS control board Punch drive board (PKDB)
(FNSCB) and punch drive
board (PKDB)
F77-54 After punch motor (M801) is FNS control board (FNSCB)
turned ON, punch HP sensor Punch drive board (PKDB)
(PS801) is not turned ON Punch motor (M801)
within the specified time. Punch HP sensor (PS801)
FN-120, F77-81 After the gate drive motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
FN-120, FN-9
FN-9 (M712) is turned ON, gate HP Gate drive motor (M712)

abnor- sensor (PS716) is not turned Gate HP sensor (PS716)
mality ON within the specified time.
F77-91 Communication abnormality FNS control board (FNSCB)
when sub-CPU in FNS control Printer control board (PRCB)
board (FNSCB) receives data
F77-92 Communication abnormality
when the main CPU in FNS
control board (FNSCB)
receives data.
F77-98 When the main switch (SW2) V CODE LIST
trol program of FNS control
Board (FNSCB) was detected.
F77-99 Abnormality other than those
known to control program of
FNS control board (FNSCB)
was detected.
5-35


mality operation
code
Commu- E80-01 When the main switch (SW2) is Main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
nication ON, no response is received stops imme-

abnor- from the printer control board diately and
mality (PRCB) within the specified main relay
time. (RL1) is
E80-02 Printer control board (PRCB) turned OFF.
communication abnormality
E80-03 Operation board communica- Operation board /1 (OB1)
tion abnormality
ISW E80-11 When the main switch (SW2) Printer control program
abnor- was ON, unwritten range of
mality ISW was detected in the
printer control program.
E80-21 When the main switch (SW2) VIF control program
was ON, unwritten range of
ISW was detected in the GIF
control program.
E80-30 In the data transfer by ISW, Printer cable
regular header information USB cable
cannot be received within the PC parallel port
specified time. PC USB port
E80-31 In the data transfer by ISW, Printer cable
check sum error or header USB cable
error was detected in the Program file abnormality
downloaded data.
E80-32 When transferring data by ISW, Printer cable
data cannot be correctly writ- USB cable
ten to flash ROM. Program transferred board
E80-40 Engine continued operation Printer control program
without preparing image or
process patch for the specified
time.
V CODE LIST
5-36

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be tempo-
rarily operated.
If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary
power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can
be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and
the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code Error Unit to be cut off Remarks

18-01 Error in paper feed tray /1 up Paper feed tray /1 Tray can not be selected.
18-05 Error in LT tray up LT tray Tray can not be selected.
13-02 LT paper feed motor abnormality
46-40 to 43 HDD abnormality HDD HDD can not be used.
77-22, 25, 26 Folding drive abnormality Folding machine Folding mode, stitch-and-
77-31, 37 Cutting drive abnormality TMG-3 fold mode, and cutting
mode can not be selected.
77-41, 42, 43 CF tray drive abnormality Cover Inserter D Cover sheet mode can not
be selected.
77-44, 47, 55 Punch rocking motor abnormality PK-5 Punch mode can not be
selected.
V CODE LIST
5-37

ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Blank page
V CODE LIST
5-38

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors
(1) Rear of the main body
[11] [12]
[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6600
[1] Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) [7] Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65)
[2] Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) [8] Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67)
[3] Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) [9] Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[4] Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) [10] Waste toner door sensor (PS53)
[5] Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) [11] Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68)
[6] Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63) [12] Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-1

PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
(2) Top of the main body
[5] [6]
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 8050fs6601
[1] DF reset switch (RS1) [4] APS sensor /S (PS3)

[2] Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) [5] Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
[3] APS sensor /L (PS4) [6] AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
(3) Front of the main body
[3] [4]
[2] [1] 8050fs6602

VI DIAGRAMS
[1] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) [3] Main switch (SW2)
[2] Front door interlock switch (MS1) [4] Reset switch (SW1)
6-2

(4) Right side of the main body
[1] 8050fs6603
[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
(5) Front side of the main body
[1] 8050fs6604
[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)

VI DIAGRAMS
6-3

(6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6605
[1] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) [5] Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)*
[2] Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) [6] Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)*
[3] Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) [7] Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
[4] Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K)
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K.
(7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6606
[1] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) [3] Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
[2] Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [4] Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-4

(8) Developing unit
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6607
[1] Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) [3] Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)
[2] Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) [4] Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
(9) Image correction unit
[2] [3]
[1] 8050fs6608
[1] Gamma sensor (PS11) [3] Color registration sensor /R (PS9)

[2] Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-5

(10) Toner supply unit
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] 8050fs6609
[1] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) [4] Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[2] Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) [5] Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M)
[3] Toner supply interlock switch (MS2) [6] Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7]

[3] [2] [1]
[18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 8050fs6630
[1] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) [10] Paper size VR/1 (VR1)

[4] No paper sensor /1 (PS31) [13] Paper size /S1 (PS33)
VI DIAGRAMS
[7] Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) [16] Paper size /L1 (PS34)
6-6

(12) By-pass feed unit
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6610
[1] Paper size /LBP (PS49) [3] Paper size VR/BP (VR4)
[2] No paper sensor /BP (PS47) [4] Paper size /SBP (PS48)
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2] [1]
8050fs6631
[1] Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) [2] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-7

(14) ADU
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6611
[1] Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) [7] ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)
[2] Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) [8] ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
[3] ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) [9] Registration sensor (PS22)
[4] 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) [10] By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26)
[5] Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) [11] Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)
[6] Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2] [1]
8050fs6612
[1] Paper exit sensor (PS13) [2] Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-8

(16) Fixing unit
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6632
[1] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) [5] Thermostat /2 (TS2)

[2] Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) [6] Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
[3] Thermostat /1 (TS1) [7] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)
[4] Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [8] Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-9

B. Loads
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6] 8050fs6613
[1] 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) [13] DCPS cooling fan (M42)
[2] Drum motor /Y (M14) [14] Developing motor /K (M23)
[3] Drum motor /M (M15) [15] Developing motor /C (M22)
[4] Drum motor /C (M16) [16] Developing motor /M (M21)
[5] Drum motor /K (M17) [17] Scanner motor (M1)
[6] Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) [18] Developing motor /Y (M20)
[7] IP cooling fan (M24) [19] Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
[8] IPB cooling fan (M25) [20] Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)
[9] Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) [21] Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
[10] Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) [22] Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)
[11] Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) [23] Transfer belt motor (M18)
[12] Paper feed motor (M41)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-10

[1]
[2] 8050fs6614
[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)
[1] 8050fs6615
[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)

VI DIAGRAMS
6-11

(4) Right side of the main body
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[3] [2] [1] 8050fs6616
[1] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) [5] Writing intake fan /1 (M43)
[2] Heater /1 (HTR1) [6] Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)
[3] Heater /2 (HTR2) [7] Drum unit fan (M47)
[4] Writing intake fan /2 (M44)
(5) Left side of the main body
[3] [2] [1] 8050fs6617
[1] Paper exit fan /F (M28) [3] Paper exit fan /R (M26)
[2] Paper exit fan /M (M27)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-12

(6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6618
[1] Polygon motor /Y (M3) [5] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)*

[2] Polygon motor /M (M4) [6] Laser correction motor /M (M8)*
[3] Polygon motor /C (M5) [7] Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
[4] Polygon motor /K (M6)
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K.
(7) Process unit
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6619
[1] Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) [4] Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K)

[2] Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) [5] Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
[3] Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-13

(8) Image correction unit
[2] [1] 8050fs6620
[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2] Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
(9) Toner supply unit
[9] [10]
[1]
[2]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] 8050fs6621
[1] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) [6] Toner supply motor /C (M51)
[2] Toner bottle motor (M53) [7] Toner supply motor /M (M50)
[3] Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) [8] Charger intake fan (M48)
[4] Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) [9] Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
[5] Toner supply motor /K (M52) [10] Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-14

(10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4]

[3] [2] [1]
8050fs6633
[1] Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) [6] Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11)

[2] Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) [7] Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
[3] Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) [8] Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10)
[4] Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) [9] Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)
[5] Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1] 8050fs6634
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)

VI DIAGRAMS
6-15

(12) ADU
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6622
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [9] ADU reverse motor (M32)
[2] Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [10] 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
[3] ADU lock solenoid (SD6) [11] Registration motor (M30)
[4] ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [12] Loop roller motor (M31)
[5] ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [13] Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5)
[6] Reverse/exit motor (M33) [14] Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)
[7] ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [15] Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
[8] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-16

(13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6635
[1] Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) [4] Fixing motor (M29)

[2] Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) [5] Fixing lower lamp (L4)
[3] Web motor (M54)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-17

C. PCBs and others

[17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[24]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[16] [15] [14] [13] 8050fs6623
[1] AC drive board (ACDB) [13] HDD: option (HDD-7)

[2] Noise filter (NF) [14] HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)
[3] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) [15] Extended memory: option
[4] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) [16] Memory board (MB)
[5] Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) [17] High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
[6] Transformer /main body (TRNS1) [18] Overall control board (OACB)
[7] DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) [19] Image processing board (IPB)
[8] DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) [20] Scanner drive board (SCDB)
[9] Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) [21] DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4)
[10] Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) [22] High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
[11] Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) [23] Printer control board (PRCB)
[12] Drum drive board /K (DRDB K) [24] Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-18

[3] [2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1] CCD board (CCDB) [3] L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)

[2] Key counter (C (K))
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[2] [1] 8050fs6625
[1] Black counter (C (BK)) [5] OB inverter board (OB INVB)

[2] Total counter (C (T)) [6] LCD board (LCDB)
[3] Operation board /2 (OB2) [7] Touch panel board
VI DIAGRAMS
[4] Operation board /3 (OB3) [8] Operation board /1 (OB1)
6-19

(4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] 8050fs6626
[1] Temp detection board (TDB) [3] Laser drive board /M (LDB M)
(attached to write unit /K only) [4] Laser drive board /C (LDB C)
[2] Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [5] Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
(5) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6627
[1] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) [3] Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M)
[2] Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C) [4] Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-20

(6) Toner supply section
[1] 8050fs6628
[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
(7) ADU
[1] 8050fs6629
[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-21

1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing
[18] [3] [11] [10]

[2] [9]
[7]
[15]
[1]
[16]
[5] [14]
[6] [13]
[8] [17] [4] [12] 8050fs6031
[1] Paper feed motor (M301) [11] Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)
[2] Conveyance motor (M302) [12] Tray open/close sensor (PS308)
[3] Reverse/exit motor (M303) [13] Size sensor /S (PS309)
[4] Registration clutch (MC301) [14] Size sensor /L (PS310)
[5] Registration sensor (PS301) [15] Paper exit solenoid (SD301)
[6] Timing sensor (PS302) [16] Reverse solenoid (SD302)
[7] Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) [17] Size VR (VR301)
[8] No paper sensor (PS304) [18] RADF control board (DFCB)
[9] Reverse sensor (PS305) [19] Size sensor board (SSB)
[10] Paper exit sensor (PS306)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-22

1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing
[13] [14] [15] SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2]
[3]
[12] [11] [10]
[4]
[9] M100 [8] M101 [16] [7] [6] [5] 8050fs6700
[1] Front door interlock switch (MS101) [9] Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2] Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) [10] Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104)
[3] No paper sensor (PS108) [11] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103)
[4] Paper feed sensor (PS107) [12] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102)
[5] Feed sensor (PS106) [13] Top cover interlock switch (MS102)
[6] Upper limit sensor (PS109) [14] Top cover open/close sensor (PS100)
[7] Pre-registration clutch (MC102) [15] Paper feed clutch (MC101)
[8] Lower limit sensor (PS101) [16] LT drive board (LTDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-23

1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing
[26]
[25] [27]
[24]
[23] [1]
[2]
[21]
[22]
[20]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[18]
[5]
[17] [6]
[16]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[15] [13]
FRONT
[14] 8050fs6701
[1] Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) [15] Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FN-9 only)
[2] Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) [16] Stacker inlet sensor (PS705)
[3] Gate HP sensor (PS716) [17] Stacker no paper sensor (PS720)
[4] FNS inlet sensor (PS704) [18] Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702)
[5] Stapler movement motor (M711) [19] Stack auxiliary motor (M722)
[6] FNS interlock switch (MS701) [20] Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708)
[7] Clincher rotation motor (M704) [21] Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709)
[8] Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FN-9 only) [22] Stacker inlet motor (M713)
[9] Alignment motor/L (M716) (FN-9 only) [23] Shift HP sensor (PS718)
[10] Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FN-9 only) [24] Shift motor (M702)
[11] Folding knife motor (M719) (FN-9 only) [25] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706)
[12] Stopper motor (M718) (FN-9 only) [26] Sub-tray full sensor (PS719)
VI DIAGRAMS
[13] Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) [27] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
[14] Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FN-9 only)
6-24

[12] [13]
[11] [14]
[10] [1]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
8050fs6702
[1] Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor [8] Relay board (RB)
(PS707)
[2] Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) [9] FNS control board (FNSCB)
[3] Counter rest sensor (PS715) [10] Gate drive motor (M712)
[4] By-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [11] FNS conveyance motor (M701)
[5] Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) [12] Paper exit opening motor (M708)
[6] Tray up/down motor (M703) [13] Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721)
[7] Folding conveyance motor (M720) [14] Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
(FN-9 only)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-25

[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6703
[1] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) [5] Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706)
(FN-9 only) (FN-9 only)
[2] Folding full LED (LED729) (FN-9 only) [6] Stapler rotation motor (M706)
[3] Folding full sensor (PS729) (FN-9 only) [7] Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
[4] Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713) [8] Alignment motor/U (M705)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-26

[6]
[5]
[4] [3]
[2] [1] 8050fs6704
[1] Clincher motor/R (M710) [4] Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730)

Clincher motor/F (M715) Stapler HP sensor/F (PS731)
[2] Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732) [5] Cartridge switch/R (SW701)

Clincher HP sensor/F (PS733) Cartridge switch/F (SW703)
[3] Stapler motor/R (M709) [6] Stapler switch/R (SW702)

Stapler motor/F (M714) Stapler switch/F (SW704)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-27

1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8] [4]
[7]
[6] [5] 8050fs6705
[1] Upper limit sensor (PS110) [7] Relay 2 (RL28)

[2] DC power unit (DCPS) [8] Coil (COL)
[3] Lower limit sensor (PS111) [9] Scrap box detection sensor (PS107)
[4] Holder motor (M106) [10] Conveyance motor (M101)
[5] Circuit breaker (CBR) [11] TU drive board (TUDB)
[6] Relay 1 (RL1)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-28

[13] [14] [15] [16]
[12] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6] 8050fs6706
[1] Scrap removal fan motor (M108) [9] Front door MS2 (MS2)
[2] Scrap full LED (LED101) [10] Paper exit sensor (PS108)
[3] Scrap full sensor (PS109) [11] Stacker S3 (MS3)
[4] Entrance sensor (PS101) [12] Stacker door sensor (PS114)
[5] Trimmer motor (M102) [13] Stacker MS4 (MS4)
[6] Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) [14] Stacker full sensor (PS113)
[7] Press HP sensor (PS105) [15] Pusher HP sensor(PS112)
[8] Press motor (M105) [16] Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
8050fs6707
[1] Stopper movement motor(M103) [4] Stopper release motor (M104)

VI DIAGRAMS
[2] Conveyance sensor (PS102) [5] Stopper HP sensor (PS103)

[3] Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
6-29

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing
A. Printer control board
650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin)

651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin)
340 (W : 28 pin) 700 (W : 26 pin)

572 (W : 4 pin)
376 (W : 28 pin)
620 (BN : 7 pin) 564 (W : 2 pin)
600 (BN : 20 pin) 309 (W : 36 pin)
393 (W : 24 pin)
300 (BN : 18 pin) 573 (W : 3 pin)

353 (BN : 12 pin)
303 (W : 2 pin)
302 (W : 6 pin)
574 (W : 3 pin)
500 (BN : 34 pin)

467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin)

2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
4 (N.C.)
414 (B : 32 pin)
459 (W : 10 pin) 151 (GY : 8 pin)
36 (N.C.) 730 (W : 32 pin)
301 (W : 4 pin)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
464 (BN : 19 pin) 736 (W : 24 pin)

442 (W : 34 pin) 37 (N.C.) 150 (GY : 24 pin) 8050fs6033
VI DIAGRAMS
6-30

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin) 121 (W : 8 pin)

152 (W : 11 pin)
153 (W : 4 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin) 157 (W : 4 pin) 8050fs6034
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin) 8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board
534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin)
518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)

548 (W : 6 pin) 507 (W : 6 pin)
527 (W : 15 pin) 1 (N.C.) 503 (W : 34 pin) 510 (W : 11 pin) 8050fs6036
VI DIAGRAMS
6-31

E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin)
103 (W : 6 pin)
108 (W : 4 pin)
106 (W : 8 pin)
101 (W : 3 pin)
107 (W : 7 pin)
104 (W : 10 pin)
105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F. DC power unit/2
111 (W : 12 pin)
110 (W : 4 pin)
112 (W : 6 pin)
113 (W : 4 pin)
114 (W : 9 pin)
115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6100
VI DIAGRAMS
6-32

H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin) 312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin) 8050fs6039
I. Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
J. High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
734 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6041
VI DIAGRAMS
6-33

K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin)
739 (W : 3 pin)
738 (W : 10 pin)
740 (N.C.)
8050fs6042
L. Image processing board
271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin)
260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin) 254 (BK : 120 pin)

272 (W : 34 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.) 8050fs6043

VI DIAGRAMS
6-34

M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
P. Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
8050fs6047 VI DIAGRAMS
6-35

Q. Overall control board
250 (W : 18 pin) 217 (BN : 50 pin) 258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.)
251 (W : 16 pin) 252 (W : 4 pin)

9 (N.C.)
270 (W : 60 pin) 12 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin) 10 (N.C.)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin)
255 (BK : 8 pin)

254 (W : 120 pin) 11 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.)
5 (N.C.) 14 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.) 8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin) 165 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6049
VI DIAGRAMS
6-36

S. Operation board/1
176 (W : 6 pin) 173 (W : 6 pin) 172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin)
174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T. Operation board/2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board/3
158 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6101
VI DIAGRAMS
6-37

V. Scanner drive board
607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin) 1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin)
603 (W : 3 pin)
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin) 8050fs6052
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board
704 (W : 6 pin) 724 (W : 18 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin)
711 (W : 8 pin)
726 (W : 12 pin)
706 (W : 6 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin) 708 (W : 11 pin) 8050fs6054
Y. Gamma sensor
558 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6055
VI DIAGRAMS
6-38

2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing

A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin) 13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
12 (W : 5 pin)
1 (N.C.) 2 (W : 6 pin)
5 (W : 5 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
8 (N.C.)
7 (W : 9 pin) 10 (W : 8 pin) 6 (W : 2 pin) 8050fs6102
2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing
802 (W : 10 pin) 807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.)
804 (W : 12 pin) 805 (W : 11 pin)
4 (N.C.)
800 (W : 6 pin)
808 (W : 2 pin)
3 (N.C.)
801 (W : 11 pin)
803 (W : 6 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin) 2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.) 8050fs6103
VI DIAGRAMS
6-39

2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing

A. FNS control board
61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin) 33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin)
62 (W : 40 pin) 52 (W : 6 pin)
1 (W : 18 pin) 8 (W : 8 pin)
10 (W : 4 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only
11 (W : 9 pin)
7 (W: 6 pin) 42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only

5 (W : 22 pin)
6 (W : 5 pin) 41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only

4 (W : 40 pin) 2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin) 8050fs6104
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin) 5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only 8 (W : 34 pin)
9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only

1 (W : 40 pin)
7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only 8050fs6105

VI DIAGRAMS
6-40

2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing
402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin) 406 (GY : 20 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin) 405 (W : 4 pin)
408 (W : 3 pin)
407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin) 8050fs6106
VI DIAGRAMS
6-41

VI DIAGRAMS
Item
Time (sec) Code 3.1
Paper feed motor M41
TIMING CHART
Pick up solenoid /1 SD7
Chart 1/2
Paper feed clutch /1 MC7
Pre-registration clutch /1 MC8
Pre-registration sensor /1 PS29

Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 PS27
Registration sensor PS22

3. TIMING CHART
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 MC13

Main Body timing chart
V_TOP
Loop roller motor M31

Register out roller motor M30
F
Fixing motor M29
6-42
R
ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
Fixing paper exit sensor PS17

Paper exit sensor PS13
Reverse/exit sensor PS19
ADU reverse sensor PS21
ADU conveyance PS20
ADU pre-registration sensor PS23
1st transfer pressure/release motor M19

2nd transfer pressure/release motor M34
F
Reverse/exit motor M33
R
F M32
ADU reverse motor
R
Reverse/exit solenoid SD4

ADU conveyance clutch /1 MC2
ADU conveyance clutch /2 MC1
ADU pre-registration clutch MC3
To chart 2/2 A B C D
4969fs6324a
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-
Time (sec) Code
Item
To chart 1/2 A B C D
Chart 2/2
Drum motor /Y M14

Drum motor /M M15
Drum motor /C M16
Drum motor /K M17

Transfer belt motor M18
Charging /Y
Charging /M
Charging /C
Charging /K
Developer bias DC /Y
Developer bias DC /M
Developer bias DC /C
Developer bias DC /K
Developer bias AC /Y
6-43
Developer bias AC /M
Developer bias AC /C
Developer bias AC /K
1st transfer /Y
1st transfer /M
1st transfer /C
1st transfer /K
2nd transfer
Separation AC/DC
Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid SD1
4969fs6324b
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.2
0
No paper sensor Paper unloaded
PS304 Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Registration sensor Paper unloaded

PS301 Paper loaded
Registration clutch OFF
MC301 ON
Paper feed motor CW 300mm/s
M301 CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s

CCW 710mm/s
AFR-20 timing chart
Timing sensor Paper unloaded

PS302 Paper loaded
Conveyance motor CW 710mm/s
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-44
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Reverse sensor Paper unloaded

PS305 Paper loaded
Reverse/exit motor CW 710mm/s
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
Paper exit sensor Paper unloaded

PS306 Paper loaded
Reverse solenoid OFF
SD302 ON
Paper exit solenoid OFF
4969fs6310
SD301 ON
PS304 Paper loaded
PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
Paper feed motor CW
M301 CW 67mm/s

Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-45
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)

PS306 Paper loaded
SD302 ON
8050fs6311
SD301 ON
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS

PS304 Paper loaded
TIMING CHART

PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
M301 CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s

CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-46
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)

PS306 Paper loaded
SD302 ON
4969fs6312
SD301 ON
0

PS304 Paper loaded
PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
M301 CW 67mm/s

Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-47
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)

PS306 Paper loaded
SD302 ON
4969fs6313
SD301 ON
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS

PS304 Paper loaded
TIMING CHART

PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
M301 CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s

CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-48
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s

PS306 Paper loaded
SD302 ON
4969fs6314
SD301 ON
PS304 Paper loaded
PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
M301 CW 67mm/s

Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-49
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s

B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
PS306 Paper loaded

SD302 ON
4969fs6315
SD301 ON
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS

PS304 Paper loaded
TIMING CHART

PS301 Paper loaded
MC301 ON
M301 CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s

CCW 710mm/s

PS302 Paper loaded
M302
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
6-50
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s

PS305 Paper loaded
M303 CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper exit sensor

PS306 Paper loaded
SD302 ON
4969fs6316
SD301 ON
3.3
Time (sec) Code

Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Paper feed motor M101

Paper feed clutch MC101
C-208 timing chart
Paper feed solenoid SD100

A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
Pre-registration clutch
6-51
MC102
Paper feed sensor PS107
Feed sensor PS106
Start button ON
4969fs6317
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.4
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item Code
FNS Entrance sensor PS704
TIMING CHART
670mm/s
FNS Conveyance motor M701
400mm/s
Shift motor M702
Shift HP sensor PS718
A
Paper exit opening solenoid SD704
253mm/s
Paper exit roller motor M707

400mm/s
Main tray paper exit sensor PS706
Tray upper limit sensor PS702
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
FN-120/FN-9 timing chart
FNS operation start

1-1 1-2 2-1
signal ON
6-52
6 7 8 9 Item
Time (sec) Code
670mm/s FNS Conveyance
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
M701
400mm/s motor
Shift motor M702
Shift HP sensor PS718
A
253mm/s Paper exit roller
M707
400mm/s motor
Tray upper limit sensor PS702
UP Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
2-2 3-1 3-2

Copy - Page
Item Time (sec) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

FNS Conveyance drive motor M701
By-pass gate solenoid SD705
Stacker entrance sensor PS705
Stacker entrance motor M713
Stack drive motor M722
Stack drive solenoid SD702
Close
Alignment motor /U M705
Open

Stapler movement motor M711
Stapler, clincher motor /F M714/715 A
Stapler, clincher motor /R M709/710
Paper exit belt HP sensor PS709

950mm/s
Paper exit roller motor 660mm/s M707
280mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
1-1 1-2 1-3 1 - 10 1 - 11 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4
6-53
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Item Code
FNS operation Time (sec)
start signal ON FNS Entrance sensor PS704
670mm/s FNS Conveyance drive motor M701
By-pass gate solenoid SD705
Stacker entrance sensor PS705
Stack drive motor M722
Stack drive solenoid SD702
Close Alignment motor /U M705
Open
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
A Stapler movement motor M711

Stapler, clincher motor /F M714/715
Stapler, clincher motor /R M709/710
950mm/s
660mm/s Paper exit roller motor M707
280mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707
UP Tray up/down motor
DOWN M703
4969fs6319
Copy - Page 2-9 2 - 10 2 -11
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
Time (sec) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Item
Stacker Entrance sensor PS705
670mm/s
TIMING CHART

500mm/s
Alignment HP sensor /U PS708
Alignment motor /U Close
Open M705
Alignment HP sensor /L PS724
Alignment motor /L Close
M716
Open A
Stapler motor, clincher motor /F M714/715
Stapler motor, clincher motor /R M709/710

Stopper HP sensor PS723
Stopper motor Down
Up M718
Folding conveyance motor 670mm/s
500mm/s M720
Folding conveyance sensor PS725
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP sensor PS722
Folding passage sensor PS726
Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712
Paper exit opening motor M706
FNS Operation Open start signal ON 1-1 1-2 1-3
6-54
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Time (sec) Item Code
Stacker Entrance sensor PS705
670mm/s Stacker entrance motor M713
500mm/s
Alignment HP sensor /U PS708
Close Alignment motor /U
Open M705
Alignment HP sensor /L PS724
Close Alignment motor /L M716
Open
Stapler motor, clincher motor /F M714/715
A Stapler motor, clincher motor /R M709/710
Stopper HP sensor PS723
Down Stopper motor M718
Up
670mm/s Folding conveyance motor M720
500mm/s
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
Folding conveyance sensor PS725

Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712
Paper exit opening motor M706
4969fs6320
2-1 2-2 2-3 Copy - Page
Time (sec) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Item
Paper exit belt HP sen- PS709
Gate drive motor M712
Close M705
Alignment motor /U Open
Alignment motor /L Close M716
Open
Stacker Entrance sensor PS705 A

Stacker entrance motor 670mm/s M713
500mm/s

Down
Stopper motor M718
Up
Three-folding gate solenoid SD706
Folding Conveyance motor M720
Folding exit sensor PS725
6-55
FNS operation start signal ON 16 17 18 19 20 Time (sec)
Item Code
Gate drive motor M712
Close Alignment motor /U M705
Open
Close Alignment motor /L M716
Open
A Stacker Entrance sensor PS705
670mm/s M713
500mm/s Stacker entrance motor
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided

Down Stopper motor M718
Up
Three-folding gate solenoid SD706
Folding Conveyance motor M720
Folding exit sensor PS725
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.5
TIMING CHART
Item Time (sec) Code -52 -51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93

Folding Conveyance motor (FNS) M720
M101
TMG-3 timing chart
Conveyance motor
Entrance sensor PS101
Stopper motor M103
Conveyance sensor PS102
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Press motor M105

Cutter motor M102
Stopper clear motor M104
6-56
Holder motor M106
Pressure motor M107
Copy 1 Copy 2
4969fs6322
Item Time (sec) Code -52 -51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
Folding Conveyance motor (FNS) M720

Conveyance motor M101
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Entrance sensor PS101

Stopper motor M103
Conveyance sensor PS102
6-57
Press motor M105
Cutter motor M102
Stopper clear motor M104
Holder motor M106
Pressure motor M107
Copy 1 Copy 2
4969fs6323
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Blank Page
VI DIAGRAMS
6-58

Copyright
2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to

avoid disclosure of confidential information.
7662-4969-11 0309xxxx

Konica cf5001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Konica cf5001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Official Options name : Popular Options name

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

III SERVICE TOOL

4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

6.1 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

7.2 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100

10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

III SERVICE TOOL

1.3 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.6 Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

1.7 Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163

3.2 Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171

5.3 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

4.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

III SERVICE TOOL

7.4.5 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7.4.8 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

7.4.9 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102

8.3 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108

9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139

9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174

III SERVICE TOOL

III SERVICE TOOL

2.7 Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.6.2 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

2.3 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

III SERVICE TOOL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

:Prohibition when using the copier.

:Direction when using the copier.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA